Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 2010-R0629 - Contract 9756 GRG Sanders & Company D.B.A. Hub City Plumbing - 12_15_2010 (3)Resolution No. 2010-RO629 December 15, 2010 Item No. 5.42 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock, Contract No. 9756 for Civic Center physical plant renovations and roof replacement per ITB 11-004-FO, by and between the City of Lubbock and GRG Sanders and Company d/b/a Hub City Plumbing and Mechanical, and related documents. Said Contract is attached hereto and incorporated in this resolution as if fully set forth herein and shall be included in the minutes of the City Council. Passed by the City Council on ATTEST: P"4," '. - --- ' 1-% C Rebecc Garza: City Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTE �1 Scott Snider, Assistant City Manager Community Services Weaver, Assistant City Attorney December 15, 2010 TOM MARTIN, MAYOR vw:ccdocs/RES.Contract-Hub City Plumbing & Mechanical November 24, 2010 ADDENDUMS ISSUED REVISED ADDENDUM # 1 ITB 11-004-FO Civic Center Physical Plant Renovations and Roof Replacement DATE ISSUED: NOVEMBER 8, 2010 CLOSE DATE: NOVEMBER 11, 2010 @ 3:00 P.M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the 1TB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid. Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. Bidders attention is invite to review the following: 1. Clarification of pipe frame requirements S-104: Pipe frame locations and heights are to be coordinated by the general contractor with the pipe support guide supplier, plumber, and steel frame fabricator. Pipe frames are to be located to provide pipe support at continuous pipe lengths less than maximum hanger spacing per Specification 15060 Hangers and Supports. All pipe frames over 110'-0" at the pipe support elevation require lateral and transverse framing at 10'-0" similar to detail A2/S-104. Submit pipe frame supports for review prior to fabrication and construction. Questions and Answers: 1. Specs require prior approval for the "Air and Dirt Separators", section 15120-6, par.2.13. Request r` approval for the Taco brand air/dirt separators as acceptable. Answer Taco brand air/dirt separators will not be acceptable for this application. 2. Please verify — Note 3 of CT Sand Filter System schedule. This does not appear to be applicable to the filters. Answer The options in note 3 are based on the manufacturers' literature for typical HVAC applications for the sand filter systems. 3. Section 15640, Cooling Towers. a. Section 15640-3, Para 2.1C. requires stainless steel casing. Is FRP casing panels acceptable with all other components constructed of 304 stainless steel (i.e., structural steel, fasteners, cold and hot water basins). Answer Yes, FRP casing panels are acceptable. b. Delete any reference to "counterflow" design for the cooling towers, the new cooling towers are "crossflow" design. c. Section 15640-5, Para R requires a Control Package that seems to be redundant with the DDC control system provided by the controls contractor (ref: M-701 and 15940). Please clarify. P.O. Box 2000 ■ 1625 13`h Street ■ Lubbock, TX 79457 ■ 806.775.3150 ■ Purchasing and Contract Management Answer Refer to Specification Section 15900.1.5.A for the BMS Responsibility Matrix. Regarding 15640-5, Para N; The tower motor VFD are specified to be furnished with the towers but are shown separately mounted in the building. Please clarify if the intent is to have these VFD's furnished by the tower manufacturer. Answer Delete any reference to VFD's in specification section 15640. All VFD's for this project are to be furnished by one manufacturer. d. Section 15640-6, Para S requires external platform and handrails at the access doors. I didn't see this shown on the plans. Are these required? Answer Yes, provide manufacturer provided access to tower components not accessible from grade. 4. Drawing M-503 shows the equalizer line size to be 2". This would not be adequate to allow proper and , timely equalizing during various operation scenarios. r, Answer Change all 2" equalizer lines to 10" equalizer lines. 5. ITB 11-004-FO states that this is a reroofing project, but the plan sheets do not note a reroof, nor does the specification manual have a built up roofing specification section with division 7. Can you please clarify if this is going to be a reroof, and if we should expect an addenda with the proper reroofing plan sheets and specification data? There are no notes on the roof plan sheets, concerning reroofing nor is there a reroofing specification within the contract bidding documents. Answer The Sheet A-101 states that areas where a new flue (or any other roof penetration) is to be removed and a - C new one installed, that the roof shall be patched by a certified roofing contractor and shall not void any warranty the Owner currently holds for the existing roof, this is not a "re -roofing" project. 6. The Centrifugal Pump Schedule showed on page M-601 of the drawings, for the Civic Center plant renovations, shows the max NPSH for each pump. Is this the NPSHa of the actual system or the NPSHr of the specific pumps listed? If this is only for the pumps listed what is the actual NPSHa of the system so that an approved equal may be sized to fit the system. Answer { The Max. NPSH scheduled for CTP-1 and CTP-2 should be changed to 25', and this would be the "actual" NPSH calculated for the open cooling tower system. The NPSH listed for the chilled (CHP) and heating (HWP) water pumps is the NPSHr for the pump and is not a maximum, other manufacturers NPSH's may vary for these four pumps. The condensing and chilled water pumps are horizontal split case type pumps and the heating water pumps are end suction. 7. Spec. page Ws 161440-3 thru 16470 are missing, also ch-1 has no VFD motor starter. Are those sections needed? Answer Due to a printing error, these sections are out of order, but are in the specifications; 16470 is behind section 16140. 8. Could you please provide plans showing the locations of the DP Sensor at the Library and the Civic Center Main Mechanical Room and the nearest location that the control system can be connected to the City's computer network (at each building)? Answer The DP sensors need to be installed in each mechanical room as the piping enters the mechanical room space. The New "Front End" controls package computer is to be located in the Civic Centers Maintenance Directors Office, coordinate exact locations at project site. z 9. Please furnish us the specifications on the fencing and a detail on how to attach the razor wire. What size is the intermediate post? Answer Ile - Refer to plan for intermediate post size, identified as "line post" and provide band clamp connectors for barb wire connections, size to match post. 10. The following are questions pertaining to the DDC Controls System: A. Drawing M-701, hot water system notes indicate a differential pressure sensor to be located as follows: Civic Center Main Mechanical Room Mahon Library Main Mechanical Room B. Drawing M-702, Chill Water System notes indicate a differential pressure sensor to be located _ in the same locations. t C. Section 15900 of the specifications page, 15900-1 paragraph LLB states that the new front end is to be located in the Civic Center maintenance office. Answer The DP sensors need to be installed in each mechanical room as the piping enters the mechanical room space. The New "Front End" controls package computer is to be located in the Civic Centers Maintenance Directors Office, coordinate exact locations at project site. 11. The existing system is to stay in operation so that the existing wiring cannot be used, since the 3 locations above are not connected physically or be tunnel to the Plant what is the plan for communication to these locations. The options that I see are wiring, owner furnished IP address at all locations or wireless. We need clarification so that all bidders have the same options. Answer Provide a new wireless DDC control system for this project. 12. The General Notes state that the condenser/chilled water systems will be completed in the course of one "Heating" Season. Please define what months fall under the "Heating" Season. If the council doesn't review the bids until December 2°d, it could be after the first of the year before the notice to proceed and submittals are approved. The lead time for pumps and cooling towers are anywhere from 8 to 14 weeks. Answer Due to the scheduling, lead-times, etc. this issue will be addressed once the bid is awarded. Based on the current timing of the project, adjustments may be required so as to not leave the Civic Center and Mahon Library without either heating or cooling during the primary heating and cooling months, (i.e. for heating: typically, November through Mid March and for cooling: typically, May through Mid September) 13. Are the insulation jackets for exterior piping to be "Stainless Steel" or "Aluminum", both are stated. Is a PVC jacket required in addition to the ASJ on the piping inside the Central Plant? Answer The exterior insulation jacket should be aluminum, not stainless steel. Yes, a PVC jacket is required in r `~ addition to the ASJ on the piping inside the Central Plant. 1, _.1 14. According to the spec written below in section 15900 direct digital controls Only Johnson can supply this to their Branches. Any where it mentions NAE or NIE they will be locked into the Johnson Branch. Have there been any other BMS controls accepted for the bid? Can the language be changed to allow other BMS products? , Answer The intent is for an "open protocol" DDC architecture to be provided for the new DDC system at the Central Plant. BMS providers may modify the specifications as required to achieve an "open protocol" system, reference to specific Johnson Controls equipment (example: NAE or NEE) should be handled as an "or equivalent" to other BMS providers equipment, refer to specification section 15900 . 15. On the remaining controls in the convention center, what protocol will need to be maintained to communicate with existing controllers, example BACnet MS/TP, BACnet over Ip? Answer BMS Contractor shall coordinate the exact requirements for any existing controllers at the project site, - refer to specification section 15900. The intent is for the existing HVAC control systems at the Civic y Center and Mahon Library to remain operational and separate from the new DDC system serving the Central Plant. The new DDC system is to be expandable to allow future expansion to control the Civic Center and the Mahon Library, refer to specification section 15900. Felix Orta, Lubbock, P.O. Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to (806)775-2164 or Email to FOrtap_Ml ibbock.us . THANK YOU, ,fie lix Orta It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive bids. It shall be the bidder's responsibility to advise the Citv of Lubbock Director of Purchasing and Contract Management if anv laneuaee. requirements, etc.. or anv combinations thereof. inadvertentiv restricts or limits the reouirements stated in this ITB to a sinele source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management no later than five (5) business days prior to the bid close date. A review of such notifications will be made. 4 ADDENDUM # 2 ITB 11-004-FO Civic Center Physical Plant Renovations and Roof Replacement DATE ISSUED: NOVEMBER 8, 2010 PREVIOUS CLOSE DATE: NOVEMBER 11, 2010 @ 3:00 P.M. NEW CLOSE DATE: NOVEMBER 16, 2010 @ 3:00 P.M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid. Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. Bidders attention is invite to review the following: 1. The close date has been extended until Tuesday, November 16, 2010 @ 3:00 p.m. 2. Clarification on Cooling Towers design is as follows: Counter -flow or Cross -flow design cooling towers will be acceptable for this proj ect. Felix Orta, Lubbock, P.O. Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to (806)775-2164 or Email to FOrtaA!pylubbock.us . t ti THANK YOU, ,fieCtx Orta It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive bids. It shall be the bidder's responsibility to advise the Citv of Lubbock Director of Purchasin8 and Contract Manaizement if anv laneuaee. requirements, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this ITB to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management no later than five (5) business days prior to the bid close date. A review of such notifications will be made. P.O. Box 2000 ■ 1625 13`h Street ■ Lubbock, TX 79457 ■ 806.775.3150 ■ Purchasing and Contract Management BOND CHECK BEST RATING LICENSED IN TEXAS DATE BY: CONTRACT AWARD DATE CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR Civic Center Physical Plant Renovations and Roof Replacement ITB 11-004-FO CONTRACT: 9756 PROJECT NUMBER: 87055.9226/91195.9226 Plans & Specifications may be obtained from THE REPRODUCTION COMPANY www.thereproductionco!Dpany.com Phone: (806) 763-7770 city of lubbock CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING AND CONTRACT MANAGEMENT OFFICE I �! Contractor Checklist 1 74 Before submitting your bid, please ensure you have completed and included the following documents in the order they are listed. The contractor is only to submit (1) one original copy of every item listed. 1. Carefully read and understand the plans and specifications and properly complete the BID SUBMITTAL FORM. Bid submittal form MUST be completed in blue or black ink or by typewriter. Signatures must be original, in blue or black ink, and by hand. The bidder binds himself on acceptance of his bid to execute a contract and any required bonds, according to the accompanying forms, for performing and completing the said work within the time stated and for the prices stated below. Include corporate seal and Secretary's signature. Identify addenda received (if any). Include firm's FEDERAL TAX ID number or Owner's SOCIAL SECURITY number. 2. •./ Include BID BOND or CASHIER'S OR CERTIFIED CHECK as your bid surety. Failure to ( provide a bid surety WILL result in automatic rejection of your bid. 3. Complete and sign the CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT. _ This must include the signature of the agent or broker. Contractor's signature must be original. 4. Clearly mark the bid number, title, due date and time and your company name and address on the outside of the envelope or container. 5. Ensure our bid is RECEIVED b the City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management Y Y y g g ___ Office prior to the deadline. Late bids will not be accepted. 6. �'� Complete and sign the CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT. P g Q This must include the signature of the agent or broker. Contractor's signature must be original. 7. i Complete and sign the SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE. All "YES" responses must be explained in detail and submitted with Bid. 8. Complete and sign the SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION. Include frrm's FEDERAL TAX ID number or Owner's SOCIAL SECURITY number. 9._1ZComplete and submit the LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS. 10. Complete and sign the Buy American Certification. DOCUMENTS REQUIRED WITHIN SEVEN BUSINESS DAYS AFTER CLOSING: 1 I. Complete and submit the FINAL LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS. FAILURE TO PROVIDE ANY OF THE ABOVE MAY RESULT IN YOUR BID BEING DEEMED NON -RESPONSIVE AND, THEREFORE, NOT FURTHER EVALUATED. PLEASE INCLUDE THIS COMPLETED PAGE AS THE FIRST PAGE OF YOUR BID SUBMITTAL. GRG Sanders & Co. dba Hub City Plumbing & Mechanical (Type or Print Company Name) 2 INDEX 1. NOTICE TO BIDDERS 2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 3. BID SUBMITTAL — (must be submitted by published due date & time) 3-1. LUMP SUM BID SUBMITTAL FORM 3-2. CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT 3-3. SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE 3-4. SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION ►. LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS Buy American Certification ' 6. PAYMENT BOND .., 7. PERFORMANCE BOND 8. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 9. CONTRACT 10. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT -' 11. DAVIS BACON WAGE DETERMINATIONS 12. SPECIAL TERMS & CONDITIONS t , t 'J. SPECIFICATIONS LJ 3 NOTICE TO BIDDERS ITB 11-004-FO The City of Lubbock applied for the Energy Efficiency and Conservation Block Grant (EECBG) from the Department of Energy (DOE) to assist in the replacement of the existing heating and cooling equipment Acknowledgment: "This project is based upon work supported by the Department of Energy [National Nuclear Security Administration] and the City of Lubbock under Award Number DE-EE0000968 / 000. Disclaimer: "This report was prepared as an account of work sponsored by an agency of the United States Government. Neither the United States Government nor any agency thereof, nor any of their employees, makes any warranty, express or implied, or assumes any legal liability or responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, or usefulness of any information, apparatus, product, or process disclosed, or represents that its use would not infringe privately owned rights. Reference herein to any specific commercial product, process, or service by trade name, trademark, manufacturer, or otherwise does not necessarily constitute or imply its endorsement, recommendation, or favoring by the United States Government or any agency thereof. The views and opinions of authors expressed herein do not necessarily state or reflect those of the United States Government or any agency thereof." The Invitation to Bid is subject to the Buy American provision under Section 1605 of the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act (Recovery Act). Details of such requirement are contained in the specifications. You must obtain any required permits and comply with applicable federal, state, and municipal laws, codes, and regulations for work performed under this award. By accepting funds under this award, you agree that none of the funds obligated on the award shall be expended, directly or indirectly, to influence congressional action on any legislation or appropriation - matters pending before Congress, other than to communicate to Members of Congress as described in 18 r U.S.C. 1913. This restriction is in addition to those prescribed elsewhere in statute and regulation. Sealed bids addressed to Marta Alvarez, Director of Purchasing and Contract Management, City of - % Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the office of the Purchasing and Contract Management Office, City Hall, 1625 13th Street, Room 204, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 3:00 P.M. on November 11, 2010 or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform F' all work for the construction of the following described project: Civic Center Physical Plant Renovations and Roof Replacement After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the City Hall, Council Chambers and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to ensure that his bid is actually in the office of the Purchasing and Contract Management Office for the City of Lubbock, before the expiration of the date above first written. Bids are due at 3:00 P.M. on November 11, 2010 and the City of Lubbock City Council will consider the bids on December 2, 2010 at the City Hall, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price t 4 exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $50,000. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of "A" or better. THE BONDS MUST IN A FORM ACCEPTABLE TO THE CITY ATTORNEY AND MUST BE DATED THE SAME DATE THAT THE CONTRACT WAS AWARDED. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within ten (10) business days after notice of award of the contract J to him. FAILURE OF THE BIDDER TO INCLUDE BID SECURITY WITH THE BID SUBMITTAL SHALL CONSTITUTE A NONRESPONSIVE BID AND RESULT IN DISQUALIFICATION OF THE BID SUBMITTAL. THE ESTIMATED BUDGET FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THIS PROJECT IS $ 2.3 MILLION. It shall be each bidder's sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that I such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a non -mandatory pre -bid conference on November 1, 2010 at 10:00 A.M. in the Memorial Civic Center Room 101, 1501 Mac Davis Lane, Lubbock, Texas 79401. A site visit is scheduled for November 1, 2010 for Bidders attending the pre -bid conference. This will begin immediately after the 10:00 a.m. pre bid conference. Site visits for the purpose of bid preparation will be allowed with a minimum of 24 hours notification. Site visits will only be conducted during normal business hours which are defined as Monday through Friday from 8:00 am to 5:00 pm. A staff member from the City of Lubbock Civic Center will be present i during all site visits. Site visits can be scheduled by contacting Felix Orta (806) 775-3150 or by email Forta@mylubbock.us . Site visits will not be allowed after November 5, 2010. Bidders may view the plans and specifications without charge at The Reproduction Company, 210Y" \ Avenue Q, Lubbock, Texas 79405 or at www.thereproductioncompany.com. ONE SET OF PLANS AN _.) SPECIFICATIONS MAY BE OBTAINED, AT THE CITY'S EXPENSE, FROM THE REPRODUCTION COMPANY WITH A $100 REFUNDABLE DEPOSIT, Phone: (806) 763-7770. Deposit Checks shall be made PAYABLE TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK, and will be refunded if documents are returned in good condition within Sixty (60) calendar days after the opening of bids. Additional sets of plans and specifications may be obtained at the bidder's expense. - Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing and Contract Management Office of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this Notice to Bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to Texas Government Code, Chapter 2258, Prevailing Wage Rates, and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises shall be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. 5 The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you require special assistance, please contact the Purchasing and Contract Management Office at (806) 775-2572 or write to Post Office Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas 79457 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. CITY OF LUBBOCK Marta ACvareZ PURCHASING AND CONTRACT MANAGEMENT OFFICE f` 6 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1 BID DELIVERY TIME & DATE 1.1 The City of Lubbock is seeking written and sealed competitive bids to furnish Civic Center Physical Plant Renovations and Roof Replacement per the attached specifications and contract documents. Sealed bids will be received no later than 3:00 P.M. on November 11, 2010 at the office listed below. Any bid received after the date and hour specified will be rejected and returned unopened to the bidder. Each bid and supporting documentation must be in a sealed envelope or container plainly labeled in the r lower left-hand corner: "ITB 11-004-FO, Civic Center Physical Plant Renovations and Roof Replacement" and the bid opening date and time. Bidders must also include their company name and address on the outside of the envelope or container. Bids must be addressed to: Marta Alvarez, Director of Purchasing and Contract Management City of Lubbock 1625 13th Street, Room 204 Lubbock, Texas 79401 1.2 Bidders are responsible for making certain bids are delivered to the Purchasing and Contract Management Office. Mailing of a bid does not ensure that the bid will be delivered on time or delivered at all. If bidder does not hand deliver bid, we suggest that he/she use some sort of delivery service that provides a receipt. 1.3 Bids will be accepted in person, by United States Mail, by United Parcel Service, or by private courier =1 service. No bids will be accepted by oral communication, telephone, electronic mail, telegraphic transmission, or telefacsimile transmission. THE CITY WILL NOT ACCEPT FAX BIDS. 1.4 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to postpone the date and time for opening bids through an addendum. 2 PRE -BID MEETING 2.1 For the purpose of familiarizing bidders with the requirements, answering questions, and issuing addenda j as needed for the clarification of the Invitation to Bid (ITB) documents, a non -mandatory pre -bid meeting will be held on November 1, 2010 at 10:00 A.M. in the Memorial Civic Center Room 101, Y 1501 Mac Davis Lane Lubbock Texas 79401. All persons attending the meeting will be asked to identify themselves and the prospective bidder they represent. 2.2 It is the bidder's responsibility to attend the pre -bid meeting though the meeting is not mandatory. The City will not be responsible for providing information discussed at the pre -bid meeting to bidders who do not attend the pre -bid meeting. . , ADDENDA & MODIFICATIONS 3.1 Any changes, additions, or clarifications to the ITB are made by ADDENDA information available over the Internet at www.bidsync.com. We strongly suggest that you check for any addenda a minimum of forty-eight hours in advance of the response deadline. BUSINESSES WITHOUT INTER -NET ACCESS may use computers available at most public libraries. 3.2 Any bidder in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications or other documents may request an interpretation thereof from the Purchasing and Contract Management Office. At the request of the bidder, or in the event the Purchasing and Contract Management Office deems the interpretation to be substantive, the interpretation will be made by written addendum issued by the Purchasing and Contract Management Office. Such addenda issued by the Purchasing and Contract Management Office will be available over the Internet at www.bidsync.com and will become part of the bid package having the same binding effect as provisions of the original ITB. NO VERBAL EXPLANATIONS OR INTERPRETATIONS WILL BE BINDING. In order to have a request for interpretation considered, the request must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management Office no later than five (5) calendar days before the bid closing date. f 3.3 All addenda, amendments, and interpretations of this solicitation shall be in writing. The City of Lubbock f shall not be legally bound by any amendment or interpretation that is not in writing. Only information supplied by the City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management Office in writing or in this ITB 7 4 6 should be used in preparing bid responses. All contacts that a bidder may have had before or after receipt of this ITB with any individuals, employees, or representatives of the City and any information that may have been read in any news media or seen or heard in any communication facility regarding this bid should be disregarded in preparing responses. 3.4 The City does not assume responsibility for the receipt of any addendum sent to bidders. EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND REQUIREMENTS 4.1 Each bidder shall carefully examine all ITB documents and thoroughly familiarize itself with all requirements before submitting a bid to ensure that their bid meets the intent of these specifications. 4.2 Before submitting a bid, each bidder shall be responsible for making all investigations and examinations that are necessary to ascertain conditions and requirements affecting the requirements of this Invitation to Bid. Failure to make such investigations and examinations shall not relieve the bidder from obligation to comply, in every detail, with all provisions and requirements of the Invitation to Bid. 4.3 Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Purchasing and Contract Management Office and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Purchasing and Contract Management Office prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the bidder fully understands tc work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If bidder does not notify Purchasing and Contra ` " Management Office before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) i calendar days prior to the bid closing date. BID PREPARATION COSTS 5.1 Issuance of this ITB does not commit the City of Lubbock, in any way, to pay any costs incurred in the preparation and submission of a bid. 5.2 The issuance of this ITB does not obligate the City of Lubbock to enter into contract for any services or equipment. 5.3 All costs related to the preparation and submission of a bid shall be paid by the bidder. TRADE SECRETS CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND THE TEXAS PUBLIC INFORMATION ACT 6.1 If you consider any portion of your bid to be privileged or confidential by statute or judicial decision , J - including trade secretsandcommercial or financial information, clearly identify those portions. including 6.2 The City of Lubbock will honor your notations of trade secrets and confidential information and decline to release such information initially, but please note that the final determination of whether a particular l.l portion of your bid is in fact a trade secret or commercial or financial information that may be withheld from public inspection will be made by the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction. In the event a public information request is received for a portion of your bid that you have marked as being confidential information, you will be notified of such request and you will be required to justify your legal position in writing to the Texas Attorney General pursuant to Section 552.305 of the Government Code. In the event that it is determined by opinion or order of the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction that such information is in fact not privileged and confidential under L Section 552.110 of the Government Code and Section 252.049 of the Local Government Code, then such information will be made available to the requester. 6.3 Marking your entire bid CONFIDENTIAUPROPRIETARY is not in conformance with the Texas Open t Records Act. LICENSES, PERMITS, TAXES The price or prices for the work shall include full compensation for all taxes, permits, etc. that the bidder is or may be required to pay. 8 UTILIZATION OF LOCAL BUSINESS RESOURCES Prospective bidders are strongly encouraged to explore and implement methods for the utilization of local resources, and to outline in their bid submittal how they would utilize local resources. 9 CONFLICT OF INTEREST 9.1 The bidder shall not offer or accept gifts or anything of value nor enter into any business arrangement with any employee, official or agent of the City of Lubbock. 9.2 By signing and executing this bid, the bidder certifies and represents to the City the bidder has not offered, conferred or agreed to confer any pecuniary benefit or other thing of value for the receipt of special treatment, advantage, information, recipient's decision, opinion, recommendation, vote or any other exercise of discretion concerning this bid. 10 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ' 10.1 All work covered by the contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. ,.. 10.2 All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work -- contemplated by said contract documents. 1f ] PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without { charge or forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. 12 BIDDER INQUIRIES AND CLARIFICATION OF REQUIREMENTS 12.1 It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permit competitive bids. It shall be the bidder's responsibility to advise the Purchasing and Contract Management Office if any language, requirements, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this ITB to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management Office no later than five (5) calendar days before the bid closing date. A review of such notifications will be made. 12.2 NO BIDDER SHALL REQUEST ANY INFORMATION VERBALLY. ALL REQUESTS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION OR CLARIFICATION CONCERNING THIS INVITATION TO BID (ITB) MUST BE SUBMITTED IN WRITING NO LATER THAN FIVE (5) CALENDAR DAYS PRIOR TO THE BID CLOSING DATE AND ADDRESSED TO: Felix Orta, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management 1625 13'h Street, Room 204 Lubbock, Texas 79401 Fax: 806-775-2164 Email: forta@mylubbock.us Bidsync: www.bidsync.com 13 TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION 13.1 The construction covered by the contract documents shall be substantially completed within 270 (TWO HUNDRED AND SEVENTY) CALENDER DAYS FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND 300(THREE HUNDRED) CALENDER DAYS FOR FINAL COMPLETION from the date specified { in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. 9 f .. 4 13.2 The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to ensure completion of the project within the time specified. 14 PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. 15 AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. 16 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade w;,._,.,.: be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not reliev the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequate ` until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not" relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality, which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. (1 17 GUARANTEES 17.1 All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall famish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 17.2 Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents maC ._ warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data (including, but not limited to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software a fA firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, .) the case may be from the effective date of this Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants calculations will be recognized and accommodated and will not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the procedures it intends to follow in order to comply with all the obligations contained herein. 17.3 The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub- contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and services to be delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its rights under the law and under this Contract including, but not limited to, its right pertaining to termination or default. 17.4 The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this Contract, and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or limitation to the Contractor's liability which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its schedules, its annexes or any document incorporated in this Contract by reference. 18 PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will, upon written request, be furnished up to ten sets of plans and specifications and related contract documents for use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be 10 i; furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 19 PROTECTION OF THE WORK w The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. j (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. 20 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX 20.1 This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. 20.2 The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. 21 PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 22 BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be l necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, (. signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 23 EXPLOSIVES 23.1 The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage, which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. 23.2 Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. 23.3 In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and t such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may }e� 11 24 25 26 deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. INSURANCE 25.1 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance FAI of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein Ei also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contra whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided coverin ._, the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall 1 submitted before contract execution. 25.2 PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AND THE ENGINEER AS A PRIMARY ADDITIONAL INSURED AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS REQUIRED BELOW, OR IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE-.., SHALL INCLUDE PRODUCTS AND COMPLETE OPERATIONS. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS 26.1 Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate that must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Texas Government Code, Chapter 2258, Prevailing Wage Rates providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in the contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under the contract requiring an inspector shall not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: 26.1.1 The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. 26.1.2 Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. 26.2 Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on Sunday or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or 12 holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on Sunday or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. 26.3 In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 27 PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors shall keep a record showing the name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor or subcontractor in the construction of the public work and the actual per diem wages paid to each worker. This record shall be open at all reasonable hours to inspection by the officers and agents of the City. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, sixty dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents 28 PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the _. bidder without being considered. _ 29 PREPARATION FOR BID 29.1 The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City, and all blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in, stating the price in numerals for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the unit price and the extended total for a bid item, the unit price will be taken. A bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. 29.2 If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address - must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The bid shall be executed in ink. 29.3 Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: 29.3.1 Bidder's name GRG Sanders and Company dba Hub City Plumbing and Mechanical 29.3.2 Bid for ITB 11-004-FO, Civic Center Physical Plant Renovations and Roof Replacement 29.4 Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time before the time set for opening of the bids, but no bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 29.5 Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(g), a competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO BID OPENING. 13 30 31 BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and will include the following: (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Submittal. (d) Statutory Bonds (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates for Contractor and all Sub -Contractors. 0) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City o.-1_ 9� Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified there.., in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy the City of Lubbock about the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The bidder's bid may be _. deemed not to meet specifications or the bid may be rejected if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include: (a) The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required. (b) The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified, without delay or interference. (c) The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder. (d) The quality of performance of previous contracts or services. (e) The safety record of the Contractor and proposed Sub -Contractors Before contract award the recommended contractor for this project may be required to show that he has QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS f experience with similar projects that require the Contractor to plan his work efforts and equipment needs with City of Lubbock specifications in mind. Demonstration of experience shall include a complete list of ALL similar municipal and similar non -municipal current and completed projects for the past three (3) years for review. This list shall include the names of supervisors and type of equipment used to perform work on these projects. In addition, the Contractor may be required to provide the name(s) of supervisor(s) that will be used to perform work on this project in compliance with City of Lubbock specifications herein. 32 BID AWARD 32.1 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any or all bids, reject any particular item on a bid, and to t" waive immaterial formalities and to accept the offer most advantageous to the City of Lubbock in its sole discretion. Unless otherwise specified herein, the City shall award the bid based on the total bid for Bid Items 1 plus the sum of any Alternate Bids or Options the City may select. 32.2 All bids are evaluated for compliance with specifications before the bid price is considered. Response to specifications is primary in determining the best low bid. Failure to comply with the specifications may result in disqualification of the bid. i< 14 , i t 32.3 In case of tie bids, preference will be given to local bidders. Consistent and continued tie bidding may be cause for rejection of bids by the City of Lubbock and/or investigation by the Attorney General to determine possible Anti -Trust violations. 32.4 Before the City may award a bid to a nonresident bidder, the nonresident bidder's bid must be lower than lowest bid submitted by a responsible Texas bidder by the same margin or amount that a Texas bidder would be required to underbid the nonresident bidder in the nonresident bidders' home state. 32.5 Any contract made, or purchase order issued, as a result of this Invitation to Bid, shall be entered into the State of Texas and under the laws of the State of Texas. In connection with the performance of work, the Bidder agrees to comply with the Fair Labor Standard Act, Equal Opportunity Employment Act, and all other applicable Federal, State, and Local laws, regulations, and executive orders to the extent that the same may be applicable. x 32.6 NO INDIVIDUAL OF ANY USING DEPARTMENT HAS THE AUTHORITY TO LEGALLY i AND/OR FINANCIALLY COMMIT THE CITY TO ANY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR PURCHASE ORDER FOR GOODS OR SERVICES, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SANCTIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS INVITATION TO BID. 13 ANTI -LOBBYING PROVISION 33.1 DURING THE PERIOD BETWEEN BID SUBMISSION DATE AND THE CONTRACT AWARD, BIDDERS, INCLUDING THEIR AGENTS AND REPRESENTATIVES, SHALL NOT DISCUSS OR PROMOTE THEIR BID WITH ANY MEMBER OF THE LUBBOCK CITY COUNCIL OR CITY STAFF EXCEPT UPON THE REQUEST OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK PURCHASING DEPARTMENT IN THE COURSE OF CITY -SPONSORED INQUIRIES, BRIEFINGS, INTERVIEWS, OR PRESENTATIONS. 33.2 This provision is not meant to preclude bidders from discussing other matters with City Council members or City staff. The policy is intended to create a level playing field for all potential bidders, assure that contract decisions are made in public, and to protect the integrity of the ITB process. Its purpose is to stimulate competition, prevent favoritism and secure the best work and materials at the lowest practicable price, for the best interests and benefit of the taxpayers and property owners. Violation of this provision may result in rejection of the bidder's proposal. 4 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 34.1 Bidders are required to comply with Texas Government Code, Chapter 2258, Prevailing Wage Rates, with respect to the payment of prevailing wage rates for the construction of a public work, including a building, highway, road, excavation, and repair work or other project development or L improvement, paid for in whole or in part from public funds, without regard to whether the work is done under public supervision or direction. A worker is employed on a public work if the worker is employed by the contractor or any subcontractor in the execution of the contract for the proj ect 34.2 A worker employed on a public work by or on behalf of the City of Lubbock shall be paid not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for the work of a similar character in the locality in which the work is performed, and not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for legal holiday and overtime work. 34.3 The State of Texas has adopted the Federal Davis -Bacon wage rates for use in Texas pursuant to and in accordance with the Texas Government Code, Section 2258.022. Bidders may access the U. S. Department of Labor web site at the following web address to obtain the rates to be used in Lubbock County: htip://www.gpo.gov/davisbacon/allstates.htm] 15 34.4 It shall be the responsibility of the successful bidder to obtain the proper wage rates from the web site for the type of work defined in the bid specifications. 34.5 A contractor or subcontractor who violates Texas Government Code Section 2258.023 shall pay to the City of Lubbock $60 for each worker employed for each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the contract. (J 16 BID SUBMITTAL FORM BID SUBMITTAL NORM LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT DATE: November 16 2010 PROJECT NUMBER: 1TB 1.1-004-FO - Civic Center Physical Plant Renovations and Roof Replacement Bid of GRG Sanders & Co. dba Hub City Plumbing & Meehaniea�hereinaftcr called Offero) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Ladies and Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your Invitation to Bid for the Civic Center Physical Plant Renovations and Roof Replacement, having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The bidder binds himself on acceptance of his bid to execute a contract and any required bonds, according to the accompanying forms, for performing and completing the said work within the time stated and for the prices stated below. The bidder binds himself on acceptance of his bid to execute a contract and any required bonds, according to the accompanying forms, for performing and completing the said work within the time stated and for the prices stated below. ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION LUMP SUM COST Base bid consist of the removal and replacement of the 1 existing chillers, boilers and related piping, pumps and $ 2, 1 21 , 797.00 system of the Physical Plan( serving the Civic Center and Mahon Library. The Owner has purchased the new chillers and made arrangements for delivery to the site. The Contractor will be responsible for the installation, piping and start-up of these chillers. _Z�Bidder's Initials Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to substantially complete the project within 270 (TWO HUNDRED AND SEVENTY) CALENDER DAYS FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND 300 (TFI:REE HUNDRED) CALENDR DAYS FOR ANAL COMPLETION thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $525 (FIVE HUNDRED AND TWENTY FIVE) for each calendar day in excess of the time set forth herein above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Liquidated damages is the reasonable amount of anticipated or actual damages for each _day the completion of work is delayed, generally not enforceable under Texas common law if damages are intended to serve as a penalty or are far in excess of the amount of damages that may be reasonably forecast. The basis for liquidated damages of $639 per day is Firm Principal $140/hr for 2 hours/per week, Architect $125/hr for 10 hours/per week, Architect Intern $91/hr for 22 hours/per week, Mileage $.050/per mile for 30 miles a day, Misc. printing, fax, postage, etc. $10 per day. Contractors are required under Texas Local Government Code § 252-.044 to provide in the full amount of the contract price payment bonds for public works contracts more than $50,000 and performance bonds for public works contracts more than $100,000, and the City withholds 5% of each progress payment as security for completion of the project. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 2 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance wi instruction number 29 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in bidding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of SIXTY (60) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check o certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surely company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock. in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the to amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, an execute all necessary bonds (if required) within ten (10) business days after notice of award of the contract to him idder's Initials Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for _ .Dollars (S ) or a 13id Bond in the sum off Dated Six MXXISand Ninety Dollars ($u)6tu(0), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) business days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. I'ursuanl Io'fexas Local Covernment Code 252.043(a), a compelilive sealed hid Ihal has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. TtIEREFORE, ANV CORRECTIONS 1-0 TFIE Bit) PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE Bit) SUBMIT`FAL FORM PRIOR TO 1311) 0PEN INC. ",Seel if'Biddcr is a Corporation) ATTEST: _ Secretary -- Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addenda No. �_ Dale_8 1 0 Addenda No. 2 Date 11 8 1 0 Addenda No. Dale Addenda No. Date Date: Nnvomhor Authorized Signatur Ricky Sanders `---"' (Printed or Typed Name) GRG Sanders & Co. dba Hub City Plumbing & Mechanical Company 502 FM 1585 Address Lubbock Lubbock City, CoUrity TAXa8 , 79423 State Zip Code Telephone: 806 745-1713 Fax: 806 - 745-0261 FEDERALTAX ID or SOCIAL SECURITY No. 75-2886914 EMAIL: ri ckysander s @door. net Woman 131ack American Nalivc American Hispanic American Asian Pacific American Olhu (Specify) BUY AME111CAN PREFERENCES The American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009, Pub. L. 111-5, (Recovery Act) was enacted to preserve and create jobs and promote economic recovery, assist those most impacted by the recession, provide investments needed to increase economic efficiency by spurring technological advances in science and health, invest in transportation, environmental protection, and other infrastructure that will provide long-term economic benefits, stabilize State and local government budgets, in order to minimize and avoid reductions in essential services and counterproductive State and local tax increases. Recipients shall use grant funds in a manner that maximizes job creation and economic benefit. The Recipient shall comply with all tenns and conditions in the Recovery Act relating generally to governance, accountability, transparency, data collection and resources as specified in Act itself and as discussed below. Recipients should begin planning activities for their first tier subrecipients, including obtaining a DUNS number (or updating the existing DUNS record), and registering with the Central Contractor Registration (CCR). Be advised that Recovery Act finds can be used in conjunction with other funding as necessary to complete projects, but tracking and reporting must be separate to meet the reporting requirements of the Recovery Act and related guidance. For projects funded by sources other than the Recovery Act, Contractors must keep separate records for Recovery Act funds and to ensure those records comply with the requirements of the Act. The Government has not fully developed the implementing instructions of the Recovery Act, particularly concerning specific procedural requirements for the new reporting requirements. The Recipient will be provided these details as they become available. The Recipient must comply with all requirements of the Act. Lf' the recipient believes there is any inconsistency between AR.RA requirements and current award terms and conditions, the issues will be referred to the Contracting Officer for reconciliation. REPORTING AND REGISTRATION REQUIREMENTS UNDER SECTION 1512 OF THE RLCOVERY ACT (a) This award requires the recipient to complete projects or activities which are funded under the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 (Recovery Act) and to report on use of Recovery Act funds provided through this award. information from these reports will be made available to the public. (b) The reports are due no later than ten calendar days after each calendar quarter in which the Recipient receives the assistance award funded in whole or in part by the Recovery Act. (c) Recipients and their first -tier subrecipients must maintain current registrations in the Central Contractor Registration (hill-?:Ilwww.cc)-.gov) at all times during which they have active federal awards funded with Recovery Act funds. A Dun and Bradstreet Data Universal Numbering System (DUNS) Number (he113.-1 tivww.dnb.can) is one of the requirements for registration in the Central Contractor Registration. (d) The recipient shall report the information described in section 1512(c) of the Recovery Act using the. reporting instructions and data elements that will be provided online at h11p:/fwww.FederolRel-)orting.gov and ensure that any information that is prc-filled is corrected or updated as needed. w w BUY AM_ERICAN CERTIFICATE By submitting a bid under this solicitation, except for those items listed by the bidder below or on a separate and clearly identified attachment to this bid, the bidder certifies that steel and each manufactured product, are produced in the United States, as defined in the clause (Buy American — Steel and Manufactured Products for Construction Contracts) and that components of unknown origin are considered to have been produced or manufactured outside the United States. Offerors may obtain from the owner a listing of articles, materials and supplies excepted from this provision. Product Country of Origin COMPANY NAME: GRG Sanders & Co. dba Hub City Plumbing & Mechanical DERAL TAX ID or SOCIAL SECURITY No. 75-288691 4 Signature or Company Official: Printed name of company official signing above: Ricky Sanders Date Signed: November 16, 2010 aw ® THE MAIN STREET AMERICA GROUP NGM Insurance Company • Old Dominion Insurance Company Main Street America Assurance Company • MSA Insurance Company information Systems and Services Corporation Bid Bond KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we (Here insertfull name and address or legal title of Contractor) Hub City Plumbing & Mechanical, Inc. PO Box 53502 Lubbock, TX 79453-3502 as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Surety) NGM Insurance Company 55 West Street — Keene, NH 03431 _ ,'a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Florida as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Owner) j . City of Lubbock ., 1625 13th Street Room 204 Lubbock, TX 79401 as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of 5% of Amount Bid Dollars ($5% of Amount Bid), for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for (Here insert full name, address and description of project) _.i ITB11-004-FO -- Civic Center Physical Plant Renovations & Roof Replacement - Boiler Replacement NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter .such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the :penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise ,to remain in full force and effect. f' Signed and sealed this 11th day of November, 2010 �? ness) l (Witness) Hub City Plumbing & Mechanical, Inc. (Principal) (Seal) ?9:5-511DEN7 (Title) NGMAFnsurance Comr)an (Sur tyI (Seal) Dat vn R. Taylor — (Title) Attorney -in -fact Printed in cooperation with the American Institute of Architects (AIA) by the NGMinsu(ance Company of 4601 Touchton Road East, Suite 3400, Jacksonville, FL 32256 904-739-0873. The language in this document confirms exactly to the language used in AIA Document A310, February, 1970 edition. 68-5302(05/2006) No Text CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT To Be Completed by Bidder and Agent y Must be submitted with Bid .a 1,-the undersigned Bidder,_ certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been reviewed by me with the below identified Insurance Agent/Broker. if 1 am awarded this contract by the City of Lubbock, I will be able to, within ten (10) business days after being notified of such award by the City of Lubbock, furnish a valid insurance certificate to (lie City meeting all of the requirements defined in this bid. Ricky Sanders Contractor (Print) CONTRACTOR'S FIRM NAME: GRG Sanders & Co, dba Hub City Plumbin & Mechanical (Print or Type) CONTRACTOR'S FIRM ADDRESS: 502 FM 1 585 Na c of Agent/BrokAgent/Broker:I-1w6ck.. + Fthief x11 \ Agent / Rroker (Signature Lubbock, TX 79423 ✓ etYkce Address of AgenUBroker. R$il,,- rjJde t A "30a _ City/State/Zip: L C-�L,= lcigaLl Agent/Broker Telephone Number: D—t00 Date: it - 1 Ce - a0 k'D NOTE TO CONTRACTOR If the time requirement specified above is not met, the City has the right to reject this bid and award the contract to another contractor. 11' you have any questions concerning these requirements, please contact the Purchasing and Contract Management Office for the City of Lubbock at (806) 775-3150. BID 11-004-FO, Civic Center Physical Plant Renovations and Roof Replacement ALCC)IREV DATE (MM/DD/YYYY) CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 11/16/2010 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACTNAME: Dawn Taylor Aycock S Fowler Insurance Agency acNlu .E:t): (806) 798-2700 I FAX No): (806)791B-2070 9816 Slide Road ADDRESS;dtaylor@aandfins.com .Salta 302 PRODUCER 00000448 CUSTOMER ID#: Lubbock TX 79424 INSURER(S)AFFORD INGCOVERAGE NAIL# INSURED INSURER A :Republic Lloyds INSURERB:Texas Mutual Insurance Company 22945 Hub City Plumbing & Mechanical, Inc. INSURERC: PO BOX 53502 INSURER D INSURER E Lubbock TX 79453-3502 INSURERF: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER:CL10101101255 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIO INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THI CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL SUER POLICY EFF POLICY EXP LIMITS LTR INSR WVD POLICY NUMBER MM/DD/YYYY MM/DD/YYYY GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,0 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY DAMAGE TORENTED PREMISES occurrence) ZOO OOO $ _ r_ A CLAIMS -MADE OCCUR CMP5641764 06 10/12/2010 0/12/2011 _(Ea MEDEXP(Anyone person) 1 $ 5,000 PERSONAL 8 ADV INJURY $ 1,000,0100 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ GENT AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 X POLICY PRO LOC $ AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $ 1,000,000 (Ea accident) X ANY AUTO A ALL AUTOS 5641766 06 10/12/201010/12/2011 BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ OWNED BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ SCHEDULED AUTOS PROPERTY DAMAGE X HIRED AUTOS (Per accident) $ X NON -OWNED AUTOS PIP -Basic $ 2, Uninsured motorist combined $ 11000, X UMBRELLA LIAB X OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ 5,000,000 EXCESS LIAB AGGREGATE $ 5,000, F—ICLAIMS-MADE DEDUCTIBLE $ A X RETENTION $ 10,000 5507958 01 0/12/2010 10/12/2011 $ B WORKERS COMPENSATION WC STATU- OTH- X I AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY Y / N TORY LIMITS_ ER ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000 OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory In NH) N / A SF0001173083 0/12/2010 10/12/2011 E L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 If yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 11000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (Attach ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, if more space is required) Re: Lubbock Memorial Civic Center City of Lubbock is hereby named additional insured and a waiver of subrogation is provided as required by written contract. LotK I IrRiA I t MULUtK City of Lubbock 1625 13th Lubbock, TX 79401 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Taylor/DRT ACORD 25 (2009/09) ©1988-2009 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. INS025 (200909) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD ADDITIONAL COVERAGES Ref # Description U nderinsured motorist combined single limit Coverage Code UNCSL Form No. Edition Date Limit I 1,000,000 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount 1 Deductible Type Premium Ref # Description WC & Employers liability Coverage Code WCEL Form No. Edition Date Limit I 1,000,000 1 1 Limit 2 1,000,000 Limit 3 1,000,000 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium Ref # Description Expense constant Coverage Code EXCNT Form No. 1 Edition Date Limit 1 Limit Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium $150.00 Ref # Description Schedule Mod Factor 1 Coverage Code SCH01 Form No. Edition Date ,nit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium r I 1 1 -$36,147.00 --iii Description anaged Care Option Managed Coverage Code IVICARE Form No. Edition Date Limit 1 Limit 2 I Limit 3 Deductible Am �� Deductible Type Premium -$15,379.00 Ref # Description Schedule Mod Factor 2 Coverage Code SCH02 Form No. Edition Date Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium $3,127.00 Ref # [��TE Description , Experience Mod Factor 1 Coverage Code EXP01 I Form No. Edition Date lit 1 Limit Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium $1,627.00 "I IDescription Premium discount Coverage Code PIDIS Form No. Edition Date I Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium -$12,405.00 -Ref # Description Increased employers liability Coverage Code INEL Form No. Edition Date I Limit 1 I Limit 2 I Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type 1 Premium $1,105.00 Ref # Description Coverage Code Form No. Edition Date Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium Description Coverage Code Form No. Edition Date Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium �OFADTLCV Copyright 2001, AMS Services, Inc. SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE The City of Lubbock City Council desires to avail itself of the benefits of Section 252.0435 of the Local Government Code, and consider the safety records of potential contractors prior to awarding bids on City contracts. Pursuant to Section 252.0435 of the Local Government Code, City of Lubbock has adopted the following written definition and criteria for accurately determining the safety record of a bidder prior to awarding bids on City contracts. The definition and criteria for determining the safety record of a bidder for this consideration shall be: The City of Lubbock shall consider the safety record of the bidders in determining the responsibility thereof. The City may consider any incidents involving worker safety or safety of the citizens of the City of Lubbock, be it related or caused by environmental, mechanical, operational, supervision or any other cause or factor. Specifically, the City may consider, among other things: a. Complaints to, or final orders entered by, the Occupational Safety and Health Review Commission (OSHRC), against the bidder for violations of OSHA regulations within the past three (3) years. b. Citations (as defined below) from an Environmental Protection Agency (as defined below) for violations within the past five (5) years. Environmental Protection Agencies include, but are not necessarily limited to, the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACOE), the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service (USFWS), the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TC.EQ), the Texas Natural Resource Conservation Commission (TNRCC) (predecessor to the TCEQ), the Texas Department of State Health Services (DSHS), the Texas Parks and Wildlife Department (TPWD), the Structural Pest Control Board (SPCB), agencies of local governments responsible for enforcing environmental protection or worker safety related laws or regulations, and similar regulatory agencies of other states of the United Slates. Citations include notices of violation, notices of enforcement, suspension/revocations of state or federal licenses or registrations, fines assessed, pending criminal complaints, indictments, or convictions, administrative orders, draft orders, final orders, and judicial final judgments. C. Convictions of a criminal offense within the past ten (10) years, which resulted from bodily harm or death. d. Any other safety related matter deemed by the City Council to be material in determining the responsibility of the bidder and his or her ability to perform the services or goods required by the bid documents in a safe environment; both for the workers and other employees of bidder and the citizens of the City of Lubbock. In order to obtain proper information from bidders so that City of Lubbock may consider the safety records of potential contractors prior to awarding bids on City contracts, City of Lubbock requires that bidders answer the following three (3) questions and submit them with their bids: QUESTION ONE, 11as the bidder, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by the bidder, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership or institution, received citations for violations of OSHA within the past three (3) years? YES NO X If the bidder has indicated Y1 S f-m- question number one above the bidder mL1St provide to City of Lubbock, with its bid submission, the following information with respect to each such citation: Dale of offense, location of establishment inspected, category of offense, final disposition of offense, if any, and penalty assessed. r idder's Initials i QUESTION TWO Has the bidder, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by the bidder, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership or institution, received citations for violations of environmental protection laws or regulations, of any kind or type, within the past five years? Citations include notice of violation, notice of enforcement, suspension/revocations of state or federal licenses, or registrations, fines assessed, pending criminal complaints, indictments, or convictions, administrative orders, draft orders, final orders, and judicial final judgments. YES NO X If the bidder has indicated YES for question number two above, the bidder must provide to City of Lubbock, with it submission, the following information with respect to each such conviction: Date of offense or occurrence, location where offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of offense, if any penalty assessed. OU.ESTION T1-1RCL Has the bidder, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by bidder, or anyone acting for such corporation, partnership, or institution, ever been convicted, within the past ten (10) years, of a criminal offense v resulted from serious bodily injury or death? YES NO X If the bidder has indicated YES for question number three above, the bidder must provide to City of Lubbock, with its bid submission, the following information with respect to each such conviction: Date of offense, location where offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of offense, in any, and penalty assessed. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT THE STATI OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK certify that i have made no willful misrepresentations in this Questionnaire nor have i withheld information in my IF statements and answers to questions. 1 am aware that the information given by me in this questionnaire shall be investigated, with my fill permission, and that any misrepresentations or omissions may cause my bid to be reje ed. n Signature President Title . ,j 2 SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION Federal Law (A-102 Common Rule and OMB Circular A -I 10) prohibits non -Federal entities from contracting with or making sub -awards under covered transactions to parties that are suspended or debarred or whose principals are suspended or debarred. Covered transactions include procurement contracts for goods or services equal to or in excess of 5.e $50,000 and all non -procurement transactions (e.g., sub -awards to sub -recipients). Contractors receiving individual awards of $50,000 or more and all sub -recipients must certify that their organization and its principals are not suspended or debarred by a Federal agency. Before an award of $50,000 or more can be made to your firm, you must certify that your organization and its principals are not suspended or debarred by a Federal agency. I, the undersigned agent for the firm named below, certify that neither this firm nor its principals are suspended or debarred by a Federal agency. J' COMPANY NAME. GRG Sanders & Co. dba Hub City Plumbing & Mechanical FEDERAL TAX ID or SOCIAL SECURITY No. 75-288691 4 Signature of Company Official: Printed name of company official signing above: Rick-f Sanders Date Signed: November 16, 2010 3 BID 1.1-004-FO, Civic Center Physical Plant Renovations and Roof Replacement 2. 3. 4. 5. .-. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 15 r 16 LIST OF SUB CONTRACTORS Company Name Location All Texas Builders Lubbock Advancetech Insulation Lubbock Services Provided General Const. Insulation Howell TnStilation—dessa_ Insulation AMCO Electric Lubbock Electrical WW Steel Lubbock Structural Johnson Controls Lubbock Controls Digital Air Control Lubbock Controls Craig Hall Westech Elec. Lubbock Electrical Shorts Electric Lubbock Electrical Dent Electric Lubbock Electrical South Plains Steel Lubbock Structural Continental Electric Lubbock Electrical D & K Hunt F.l eri-ri n Lubbock F1 i _al Company GRG Sanders & Co, dba Hub City Plumbing & Mechanical Address 502 FM 1585 Luhbonk Luhhock City, TX Sj�l2Y3 State Zip Code Telephone: 806 - 745-1713 Fax.- 806 - 745-0261 Minority Owned Yes No ❑ Ex IM ❑ ❑ THIS FORM S1-1ALL BE COMPLETED AND RETURNED ALONG WITII YOUR PROPOSAL I I-, NO SUB -CONTRACTORS WILL BE USED PLEASE INDICATESO VA 0 LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS BID 11-004-1+0, Civic Center Physical Plant Renovations and Roof Replacement FINAL LIST OF SUB CONTRACTORS Minority Owned_ Company Name Location Services Provided Yes No I. All Texas Builders Lubbock General Const. ❑ 2. Advancetech Insulation Luhhock Tngu 1 at i on ❑ 3. Johnson Controls Lubbock Controls ❑ Q 4. D & K Hunt Electric Lubbock Electrical ❑ 5. ❑ ❑ .. 6. ❑ ❑ 7. ❑ ❑ 8. 9. ❑ ❑ 10. o ❑ s 12. ❑ ❑ _1 13. o ❑ 14. ❑ ❑ 16. ❑ ❑ Company GRG Sanders & Co. dba Hub City Plumbinq & Mechanical Address 502 FM 1585 Lubbock Lubbock City, Count TX 79Z23 State Zip Code Telephone: 806 - 745-1713 Fax: 806 _ 745-0261 THIS 17011M S1-IALL BE COMPLETED AND RETURNED ALONG WITH YOUR PROPOSAL IF NO SUB —CONTRACTORS WILL BE USED PLEASE INDICATE SO I 1-1 II j 1) PAYMENT BOND L BOND #S-778625 4 STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $50,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that Hub City Plumbing & Mechanical, In(hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and NGM Insurance Company j(hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of Dollars ($2.121,797.00 ) lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. ***Two Million One Hundred Twenty One Thousand Seven Hundred Ninety Seven and no/100 ------------------------------------------- WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 15t° day of December, 2010, to Bid #11-004-FO --Civic Center Physical Plant Renovations and Roof Replacement. and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; `? PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and scaled this instrument this 15th day of December 2010. NGM Insurance Company Sure4it) . By: it _4210� (wn . Tay or, orney In Fact Hub City Plumbing & Mechanical (Company Name) By: � I cy j 5^ N D1^ vc� (Printed Name► (Signs n �'J` 5 r� (Title) The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates J. Kirk Killough an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. NGM Insurance Company Surety By: itle J. Kirk Killough, Agei Approved as to form: City of L By: Ci y ttomcy * Note: If signed by an Office of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. 6 STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $50,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of Dollars ($ ) lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 151h day of December, 2010, to and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this day of 2010. Surety *By: (Title) (Company Name) By: (Printed Name) (Signature) (Title) The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. Surety * By: Approved as to form: City of Lubbock By: City Attorney (Title) * Note: If signed by an Office of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. PERFORMANCE BOND 1 BOND # S778625 I STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $100,000) Hub City Plumbing & Mechanical, Inc. KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and NGM Insurance Company (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of *** Dollars (S2,121,797.00) lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns. jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. ***Two Million One Hundred Twenty One Thousand Seven Hundred Ninety Seven and no/100 -------------------------------------------------- WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 15" day of December, 2010, to Bid 11-004-FO -- Civic Center Physical Plant Renovations and Roof Replacement and said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 15th day of December , 2010, NGM Insura Me Company Surety ill, • By: '7,6 c11 (Titl Dawn R. Taylor, A orney In Fact Hub Citv Plumbina & Mechanical (Company Name) By: (Printed Namc) tSignattt'reX--,,' n5 I (Title) The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates J. Kirk Killough an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. NGM Insurance Company I Surety * By. it) ) J. Kirk Killough, Agent Approved as to Form City of By: City A ttomey * Note: If signed by an Office of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing" that this person has authority to sign such obligation. if signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. 3 No Text STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $100,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of Dollars ($ ) lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. -. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 151h day of December, 2010, to and said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this day of 92010. Surety * By: (Title) (Company Name) By: (Printed Name) (Signature) (Title) 2 The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. Surety *By: (Title) Approved as to Form City of Lubbock By: City Attorney * Note: If signed by an Office of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of, attorney for our files. 3 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 806 798 2070 AYCOCK 8 FOLWER/ S `-mm% 01:41:49 p.m. 01-06-2011 1 /2 ACVRGee CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE �-1 moo"' """ THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(les) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to Ow terms and conditions of the policy, certain pollcles may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endoreemen s . PRODUCER Aycock i Fowler Insurance Agency N, Dawn Taylor FAX PHOt (806)798-2700 (&MNo:(eo6)799-2oTo ADMEss,dtaylorQaandfins. cam 9816 Slide Road suite 302 PRODUCER 00000448 R1SURERs AFFORDING COVERAGE NAICr Lubbock TX 79424 INSURED _ INSURERA:Republic Lloyds INsuRERe:Texas Nutual Insurance C=wany 22945 Hub City Plumbing i Nechanical, Inc. INSURERC: PO Box 53502 INSURER0: INSURERE: Lubbock TX 79453-3502 1 INSURERF: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER:CL10101101255 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBEA POU Y EFF POLICY EXP LIMITS OENERALUABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 11000,000 _ DAWE TO RENTED PREMISE $ 100,000 A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS -MADE X❑ OCCUR 5641764 06 0/12/2010 0/12/2011 MEDEXP (Any one person $ 5,000 PERSONAL 8 ADV INJURY $ 11000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT PLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/Op AGO $ 2,000,000 PRO LOC POLICY iP JECT $ A AUTOMOBILE X LIABILITY ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS BAP5641766 06 0/12/2010 0/12/2011 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (EaBODILY $ 11000,000 INaccident) ._ BODILYINJURY(Peraccide) $ BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ x SCHEDULED AUTOS HIRED AUTOS PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per mom) $ PIP -Bask; $ 2,500 x NON -OWNED AUTOS Unneuredmotorist combined $ 11000,000 X UMBRELLAUAB X OCCURRIMSzD EACH OCCURRENCE $ 2,000,000 AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 EXCESS LIAe CLAIA3-MADE DEDUCTIBLE $ $ A X RETENTION 10,000 UMB5507958 01 10/12/2010 0/12/2011 B WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY ANYPROPRMBERlEXCLUDED?C-CUTIVEQ OFFICERIMEMBER EXCLUOEDT (MandslorylnNH) N/A ( I_ !r8lroo01173083 111 0/12/2010 0/12/2011 OTH- x WC STAIITS ER ElEACH ACCIDENT $ 1 OOO BOO E.LDISEASE-EAEMPLOYE S 1 000 000 If yyees, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L DISEASE •POI ICY LIMIT $ 1 OOO OOO A Contractor's Equipment IC�5641764 06 �0/12/201010112/2011 Leased or Rented $60,000 ' Deductible $500 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEMCLFUS (Altact ACORD 101, AddMorW Remarks Schedule, I mom spa" Is requfmd) Res Bid 11-004-lO, Civic Center Physical Plant Renovation i Roof Replacement City of Lubbock is hereby maned additional insured and a waiver of subrogation is provided as required by written contract. Coverage is Primary and non-contributory with respect■ to the additiional insured. 775-2164 City of Lubbock Attnl Tiffany 1625 13th Lubbock, TX 79401 ACORD 25 (2009/091 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Taylor/DRTp� C 1988-2009 ACORD CORPORATION. All riahts reserved INS025 [200909) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD 806 798 2070 AYCOCK & FOLWER/ S 01:43:03 p.m. 01-06-2011 2 /2 ADDITIONAL COVERAGES Ref # Description Undednsured motorist combined single limit Coverage Code UNCSL Form No. Edition Date Limit 1 1,000,000 Limit 2 Llmk 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium Ref # I Description WC & Employer's liability Coverage Code WCEL Form No. Edition Date Limit 1 1,000,000 Limit 2 1,000,000 Limit 3 1,000,000 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium Rat # Description Expense constant Coverage Code EXCNT Form,No. Edition Date Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium $150.00 Ref # Description Schedule Mod Factor 1 Coverage Code SCH01 Form No. Edition Date Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium -$36,147.00 Ref # Description Managed Care Option Coverage Code MCARE Form No. Edition Date Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium -$15,379.00 Ref # Description Schedule Mod Factor 2 Coverage Code SCH02 Form No. Edition Date Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium $3,127.00 Ref # Description Experience Mod Factor 1 Coverage Code EXP01 Form No. Edition Date Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium $1,627.00 Ref # Description Premium discount Coverage Code PDIS Form No. Edition Date Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium -$12,405.00 Ref # Description Increased employer's liability Coverage Code INEL Form No. Edition Date Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium $1,105,00 Rat # Description Coverage Code Form No. Edition Date Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium Ref # Description TCoverage Code Form No. Edition Date Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3 Deductible Amount Deductible Type Premium rOFADTLCV Copyright 2001, AMS Services, Inc. FAX N0. Jan. 06 2011 01:36PM P1 FROM PACE 02/02 �ii V�r GVll ac. 06 r 1DLlb4 City of Lubbock, TX parchaging & Contract mumpmetut Comrsict )Renewal Nuticm Extension. 2 of 3 BID,1'I'F fM,) #: 07.07G-MA contmut #, 8088 Date_ 12/14/2010 Contract Tale, Radio shop Parts & Rqu4m=t Wective 1?nt ; 0911212007 Not to Fatcecd Datc: 09/11 /2012 Vendor/Contmeter and Otighmftg Depatmraent. ContractorNondon Dailey Wells Communication Departmot' Radio Shop Cootact: Jim Sawyer, Di:rt:Ctot Contact/X'itle; Jack Morrison Phone #: 210.893-6701 Ext #: 806-775-2326 Fax #: 210-8934702 Contract Term: ARcordi�g to tI� aantrgct, Article 1; Me cotttraCt shalt ba for a term of twct (2) v¢arA #itytt pricing, srid date of term banning upon City Ge=cit date of (mmal approval, Upon mutual a}Ireemem between the City and the Contrmtor, the Contract n' bc extended s maally for up to dose addidoW one year (arras under tha some tenor mid conditirm athanvise herein gated, Contract 1?Fim: Cantsactp*ing 1plsCdtant SyWm Wetwork Equipment, 1h1G, System Matmpmem, and Notwotidng 5ynoms, Class Coda C,N P,V R4pahro & C3 Mlantre Ditpatch Cm,"It:: Eopt*ment Clash Code 25% C.JN,P,'V 11mr[Term1pol Equipment, Equiptr4d Claw rods C,N.P 25% Uxer/Ttrminal Equipment! FquipmcntC.1am Code V ]O�b This form wilt eatwe as our notice for tjIt; contract tenor to be extended for an additional term, Pk;vRc con6rWdeny your acceptance in writing em 23,201 AC 4,..,T D BY! / ...�.�.. -- . it mEA J ►data C ttAt""1'C►l2/v4tvt709 r?w►� PI,ACNASING MANAGER Date DECLINED Fax: c�rrr�nc�rori `pAic t7utc - DEPARIVEN t HRAD 4 T � .� r boa Prn 55 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE TO: CITY OF LUBBOCK DATE: P.O. BOX 2000, Room 204 LUBBOCK, TX 79457 TYPE OF PROJECT: THIS 1S TO CERTIFY THAT (Name and Address of Insured) is, at the date of this certificate, insured by this Company with respect to the business operations hereinafter described, for the typed of insurance and in accordance with the provisions of the standard policies used by this company, the further hereinafter described. Exceptions to standard policy noted hereon. TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER EFFECTIVE EFFECTIVE LIMITS DATE DATE GENERAL LIABILITY Commercial General Liability General Aggregate $ Claims Made Products-Comp/Op AGG $ Occurrence Personal & Adv. Injury $ Owner's & Contractors Protective Each Occurrence $ Fire Damage (Any one Fire) $ Med Exp (Any one Person) AUTOMOTIVE LIABILITY Any Auto Combined Single Limit $ All Owned Autos Bodily Injury (Per Person) $ Scheduled Autos Bodily Injury (Per Accident) $ Hired Autos Property Damage $ Non -Owned Autos GARAGE LIABILITY Any Auto Auto Only - Each Accident $ Other than Auto Only: Each Accident $ Aggregate $ BUILDER'S RISK 100% of the Total Contract Price $ INSTALLATION FLOATER $ EXCESS LIABILITY Umbrella Form Each Occurrence $ Aggregate $_ Other Than Umbrella Form $ ORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY The Proprietor/ Included Statutory Limits Partners/Executive Excluded Each Accident $ Offices are: Disease Policy Limit $ Disease -Each Employee $ OTHER The above policies either in the body thereof or by appropriate endorsement provide that they may not be changed or canceled by the insurer in less than the legal time required after the insured has received written notice of such change or cancellation, or in case there is no legal requirement, in less than five days in advance of cancellation. FIVE COPIES OF THE CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE (Name of Insurer) MUST BE SENT TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK By. Title: The Insurance Certificates Furnished shall name the City of Lubbock as a Primary Additional Insured on General Liability and provide a Waiver of Subrogation in favor of the City of Lubbock. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S. THE ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT SHALL INCLUDE PRODUCTS AND COMPLETE OPERATIONS. f CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST A CONTRACTOR SHALL: (1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and -'` (B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing g extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; . _ (7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19-point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS A PRIMARY ADDITIONAL INSURED AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK, OR IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR. REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 512-305-7238 to receive information on the legal ` requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and (8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and 1-- filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; (D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of _v coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. CONTRACT CONTRACT 9756 STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 151' day of December, 2010 by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and GRG Sanders and Company dba Hub City Plumbing and Mechanical of the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: BID 11-00440, Civic Center Physical Plant Renovations and Roof Replacement - and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Conditions of Agreement. GRG Sanders and Company dba Hub City Plumbing and "J Mechanical's bid dated November 16, 2010 is incorporated into and made a part of this agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. CONTRACTOR: By:� PRINTED -kR K TITLE: COMPLETE ADDRESS: Company Huh C1:�V M Address ►�.0 30X 53502 City, State, ZipLmbbc<X , Tx -79463 ATTEST: Corporate S r tary CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS (OWNER): By..���—�'�'r'i� MAYOR ATTEST: City Sec Vary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: Y ` C �— Scott Snider, Assistant City Manager APP V AST FORM: City Attorney GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR - Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co- partnership or corporation, to wit GRG Sanders and Company dba Hub City Plumbing and Mechanical who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or their legal representative. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative Freddy Chavez, Civic Services Director, so designated who shall inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or inspectors as r may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or - inspectors shall act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificates, and all other documents made available to Bidder for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. The above described materials are, sometimes referred to herein as the "contract" or "contract documents". 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES - Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors shall look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. The City reserves the right to approve or disapprove the selection of any subcontractor(s). WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an Office of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to the party who gives the notice. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and sha accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative shall check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 3 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. I " 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY .. t The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the execute work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. Owner's" Representative shall not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor shall Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means, methods techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative shall not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished whenever Owner's Representative deems said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension shall be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades are needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. 2 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the contract. The Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection y by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is -~ furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of 1 any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, (' should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for its decision. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be r deemed waived. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work .., and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any Office, agent, or employee of the Owner, or Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's Representative and Contractor. Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. 18. CHARACTER OF WORKERS The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT f The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution _ and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and., it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, &_ protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment are permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at J all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 20. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contract ; r shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any I location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observati that may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time eA,-- part of the work shall be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any such work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any such work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at-� Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests shall be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such I-] I .t tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective, and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. ` Neither observations b the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made b Y P P PP Y Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by- the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not in R conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. '3. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. r 4. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered .W by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or V Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been charged by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for �3 performance of the extra work. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for j the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the i actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within tit —IN actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintaine`- primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind shall be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and a the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as k provided under Method (C) (1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before the commencement of any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS L It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the bid, thL- specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that 1 11 such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of thein , contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed" that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before bidding of any t. discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. i- 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 6 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an [ insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in t Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or l _a municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and all of its Offices, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages, expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which_ is the subject matter of this contract. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change shall be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self- insurance, rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to -, the City in conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver. The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance x ' protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and -= shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE ALONG WITH A COPY OF THE ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS A PRIMARY ADDITIONAL INSURED TO INCLUDE PRODUCT-COMP/OP AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS REQUIRED BELOW, OR IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR. THE ADDITIONAL INSURED ' ENDORSEMENT SHALL INCLUDE PRODUCTS AND COMPLETE OPERATIONS. 7 0 12 C. L01 E F Commercial General Liability Insurance (Primary Additional Insured and Waiver of Subrogation required) The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Products & Completed Operations AGG Contractual Liability Personal & Adv. Injury WITH HEAVY EQUIPMENT & XCU (Explosion, Collapse, Underground) ENDORSEMENT Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance. For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, - NOT REQUIRED Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance (Waiver of Subrogation Required) The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $500,000 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and non -owned cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and Non -owned Vehicles. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance - NOT REQUIRED. Umbrella Liability Insurance - NOT REQUIRED. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance (Waiver of Subrogation required) Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000 Definitions: r1i r-'111 Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC` 82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage fpr- - the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 406.096, Texas Labor Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner - operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as foodibeverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and V! payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements lj of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. 5. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity shall have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of ' coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and ` for one year thereafter. 7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: a Provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and 9 I i (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; F] (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor w shall provide services on the project shall be covered by worker's compensation coverage fort r r duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insuran ' carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insuranck _ 1 Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. G. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evide , of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of t... i insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. _ (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured_ at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. i L (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. (9) A Contractor shall: - 10 t (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee. " "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 800-372-7713 or 512-804- 4000 (www.tdi.state.tx.us) to receive information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage; " and (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; 11 i 29 30. (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language: "By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this contract is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the person signing this contract who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions."; (iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on t �_.... current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to tH; Contractor: 1 (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal del iverT_1 within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change tl materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and. (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (i)-(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND 1_ FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the - Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its Offices, agents and employees, harmless against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way, manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, material men and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract 12 and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof. Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner, and all of its Offices, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its Offices, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's Representative prior to bidding. ~ ,2. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner, and all of its Offices, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing prior to bidding and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 33. SUBCONTRACTING The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as provided by the contract documents. 34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES - It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are -r essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents. 13 [s i 1-1 If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum- of $525 (FIVE HUNDRED AND j TWENTY FIVE) PER CALENDER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach. IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT 3 TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT. 35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner 1 ; as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this t contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. �j The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 36. TIME OF PERFORMANCE r' The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion( this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in th locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial, and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived. 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS t In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except 14 i_ j where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. OUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS t--> No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their bids offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit rice method .., � P Y P ' payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way _e encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner, and any of its Offices, agents and employees, against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising from or growing out of the performance of this contract. 40. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the bid proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. 41. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. 15 11 42 43 44 PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenthdayof each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative shall determine the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment if submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof. F] The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be i retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by -r Owner under the terms of the contract documents. Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all wo ```- performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which sag.,...._.,,; partial payment is attributable. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION a Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31) working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete the work within the time provided in this contract. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice ; final completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether finL_.- completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completic' ,y Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31st working day after the date of certification of fin -'', completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty 3 or warranties implied by law or otherwise. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative I on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's f Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which i- 16 shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's -- Representative. t , 46. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of. (a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 47. CLAIM OR DISPUTE It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's I , Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor, and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and Owner's Representative, by Contractor. 48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR �.; In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the _. Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the (` Contractor, no further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required. After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the j notice hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the contract documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, _ equity or otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: �a 17 11 (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall _g be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion i of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract w accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and m the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designate -.- hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the wo notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor - and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such F property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies that remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners. The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth. iv 18 49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the project which is the subject matter of this contract. 50. BONDS The Contractor is required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the Contractor is required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $50,000. All bonds shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. 51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. 52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or } ' effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 54. CLEANING UP _n The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. 55. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same _g may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a 19 11 Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5) days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied. f In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage, disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos. 56. NONAPPROPRIATION i All funds for payment by the City under this contract are subject to the availability of an annual appropriation for this purpose by the City. In the event of non -appropriation of funds by the City Council of the City of Lubbock for the goods or services provided under the contract, the City will terminate the contract, without termination charge or other liability, on the last day of the then -current fiscal year or when the appropriation made for the then -current year for the goods or services covered by this contract is spent, whichever event occurs first. If at any time funds are not appropriated for the continuance of this contract, cancellation shall be accepted by the Seller on thirty (30) days prior written notice, but failure to give such notice shall be of no effect and the City shall not be obligated under this contract beyond the date of termination. 57. THE CITY RIGHT TO AUDIT At any time during the term of this Contract and for a period of four (4) years thereafter the City or a duly authorized audit representative of the City, or the State of Texas, at its expense and at reasonable times, reserves - the right to audit Contractor's records and books relevant to all services provided under this Contract. In the eve -*,, such an audit by the City reveals any errors/overpayments by the City, Contractor shall refund the City the amount of such overpayments within thirty (30) days of such audit findings, or the City, at its option, reserves the right to deduct such amounts owing the City from any payments due Contractor. It 20 DAVIS BACON WAGE DETERMINATIONS C I t_ d EXHIBIT A GENERAL DECISION: TX20100296 10/01/2010 TX296 Date: October 1, 2010 General Decision Number: TX20100296 10/01/2010 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20080296 State: Texas Construction Type: Building County: Lubbock County in Texas. ,,,_-BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family omes or apartments up to and including 4 stories). Modification Number Publication Date 0 03/12/2010 1 03/19/2010 2 06/25/2010 3 10/01/2010 BOIL0531-001 07/01/2008 ica�c� riliiyc5 Boilermaker ....................$ 26.02 13.66 ---------------------------------------------------------------- BRTX0005-004 06/01/2009 Rates Fringes Bricklayer .....................$ 24.16-------------8.31 ., ---------------------------------------- CARP0665-002 05/01/2010 Rates Fringes Carpenter ...................... 20.18 556 .------- ENGI0178-004 ---------------- ----$- 12/01/2009 ------------- Rates Fringes OPERATOR: Forklift ..............$ 21.20 9.35 ---------------------------------------------------------------- IRON0263-017 06/01/2008 Rates Fringes Ironworker, reinforcing ........ $ 20.90 4.60 ---------------------------------------------------------------- PAIN0053-003 04/01/2008 C Rates Fringes Painter - Brush, Roller & Spray ............................$ 15.81 4.56 ---------------------------------------------------------------- * PLUM0629-019 09/24/2010 Rates Fringes PLUMBER/PIPEFITTER...............$ 21.00 6.25 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SHEE0049-007 06/16/2010 Rates Fringes SHEETMETAL WORKER (HVAC Duct and System Installation only) .... ---------------------------------------------------------------- $ 21.20 8.95 SUTX2009-168 06/03/2009 Rates Fringes CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER ... $ 18.58 0.00 ELECTRICIAN ......................$ 18.09 2.36 IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL ........... $ 10.38 0.00 LABORER: Common or General ...... $ 8.86 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender - Brick...$ 11.00 0.00 OPERATOR: Backhoe/Excavator..... $ 13.81 0.00 OPERATOR: Blade/Grader .......... $ 12.97 0.00 OPERATOR: Front End Loader ...... $ 12.23 0.00 ROOFER ...........................$ 12.06 0.00 TILE SETTER ......................$ 8.50 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER .....................$ ---------------------------------------------------------------- 10.15 0.00 WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. -------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------- Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(ii)). In the listing above, the "SU" designation means that rates listed under the identifier do not reflect collectively bargained wage and fringe benefit ' rates. Other designations indicate unions whose rates have #� been determined to be prevailing. WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination ' * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on i wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis -Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. ..With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal f irocess described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Waae Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7 ) . Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 ( _i The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. END OF GENERAL DECISION EXHIBIT B Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. EXHIBIT C Prevailing Wage Rates Legal Holiday Rate The rate for legal holidays shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. SPECIAL TERMS & CONDITIONS SPECIAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS Table of Contents Number Subiect Page 1. RESOLUTION OF CONFLICTING CONDITIONS.......................................................... 7 2. AWARD AGREEMENT TERMS AND CONDITIONS..................................................... 7 3. ELECTRONIC AUTHORIZATION OF AWARD DOCUMENTS .................................. 7 4. PAYMENT PROCEDURES — ADVANCES THROUGH THE AUTOMATED STANDARD APPLICATION FOR PAYMENTS (ASAP) SYSTEM ....................................................... 7 5. CEILING ON ADMINISTRATIVE COSTS........................................................................7 6. LIMITATIONS ON USE OF FUNDS...................................................................................8 7. INDIRECT COSTS AND FRINGE BENEFITS ARE NOT REIMBURSABLE .............. 8 ...., 9. .. `,.... 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. r' 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. USE OF PROGRAM INCOME.............................................................................................8 STATEMENT OF FEDERAL STEWARDSHIP.................................................................8 SITEVISITS............................................................................................................................8 REPORTING REQUIREMENTS......................................................................................... 8 PUBLICATIONS..................................................................................................................... 9 FEDERAL, STATE, AND MUNICIPAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................ 9 LOBBYING RESTRICTIONS.............................................................................................. 9 STAGEDDISBURSEMENT..................................................................................................9 NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY ACT (NEPA) REQUIREMENTS ............ 10 HISTORIC PRESERVATION............................................................................................10 WASTESTREAM................................................................................................................11 DECONTAMINATION AND/OR DECOMMISSIONING (D&D) COSTS ...................11 SUBCONTRACT/SUBGRANT APPROVALS..................................................................11 SPECIAL PROVISIONS RELATING TO WORK FUNDED UNDER AMERICAN RECOVERY AND REINVESTMENT ACT OF 2009 (May 2009)..........................................................12 REPORTING AND REGISTRATION REQUIREMENTS UNDER SECTION 1512 OF THE RECOVERYACT.................................................................................................................16 NOTICE REGARDING THE PURCHASE OF AMERICAN—MADE EQUIPMENT AND PRODUCTS -- SENSE OF CONGRESS............................................................................16 REQUIRED USE OF AMERICAN IRON, STEEL, AND MANUFACTURED GOODS — SECTION 1605 OF THE AMERICAN RECOVERY AND REINVESTMENT ACT OF 2009......16 REQUIRED USE OF AMERICAN IRON, STEEL, AND MANUFACTURED GOODS (COVERED UNDER INTERNATIONAL AGREEMENTS) — SECTION 1605 OF THE AMERICAN RECOVERY AND REINVESTMENT ACT OF 2009...............................19 WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS UNDER SECTION 1606 OF THE RECOVERY ACT 22 RECOVERY ACT TRANSACTIONS LISTED IN SCHEDULE OF EXPENDITURES OF FEDERAL AWARDS AND RECIPIENT RESPONSIBILITIES FOR INFORMING SUBRECIPIENTS................................................................................................................. 23 DAVIS—BACON ACT REQUIREMENTS.......................................................................... 23 1. RESOLUTION OF CONFLICTING CONDITIONS Any apparent inconsistency between Federal statutes and regulations and the terms and conditions contained in this award must be referred to the DOE Award Administrator for guidance. 2. AWARD AGREEMENT TERMS AND CONDITIONS This award/agreement consists of the Assistance Agreement, plus the following: a. Special Terms and Conditions. b. Attachments: Attachment Number Title 1. Statement of Project Objectives 2. Federal Assistance Reporting Checklist and Instructions 3. Budget Pages (SF 424A) c. Program regulations, if applicable. d. DOE Assistance Regulations, 10 CFR Part 600 at http://ecfr.gpoaccess.mov. e. Application/proposal as approved by DOE. f. National Policy Assurances to Be Incorporated as Award Terms in effect on date of award at http://manaizement.energy_gov/business doe/1374.htm. 3. ELECTRONIC AUTHORIZATION OF AWARD DOCUMENTS Acknowledgement of award documents by the Recipient's authorized representative through electronic systems used by the Department of Energy, specifically FedConnect, constitutes the Recipient's acceptance of the terms and conditions of the award. Acknowledgement via FedConnect by the Recipient's authorized representative constitutes the Recipient's electronic signature. 4. PAYMENT PROCEDURES - ADVANCES THROUGH THE AUTOMATED STANDARD APPLICATION FOR PAYMENTS (ASAP) SYSTEM i. a. Method of Payment. Payment will be made by advances through the Department of Treasury's ASAP system. b. Requesting_ Advances. Requests for advances must be made through the ASAP system. You may submit requests as - frequently as required to meet your needs to disburse funds for the Federal share of project costs. If feasible, you should time each request so that you receive payment on the same day that you disperse funds for direct project costs and the proportionate share of any allowable indirect costs. If same -day transfers are not feasible, advance payments must be as close to actual disbursements as administratively feasible. c. Adjusting payment requests for available cash. You must disburse any funds that are available from repayments to and interest earned on a revolving fund, program income, rebates, refunds, contract settlements, audit recoveries, credits, discounts, and interest earned on any of those funds before requesting additional cash payments from DOE. d. Payments. All payments are made by electronic funds transfer to the bank account identified on the ASAP Bank Information Form that you filed with the U.S. Department of Treasury. 5. CEILING ON ADMINISTRATIVE COSTS a. Local government and Indian Tribe Recipients may not use more than 10 percent of amounts provided under this program, or $75,000, whichever is greater (EISA Sec 545 (b)(3)(A)), for administrative expenses, excluding the costs of meeting the reporting requirements under Title V, Subtitle E of EISA. These costs should be captured and summarized for each activity under the Projected Costs Within Budget: Administration. b. Recipients are expected to manage their administrative costs. DOE will not amend an award solely to provide additional funds for changes in administrative costs. The Recipient shall not be reimbursed on this project for any final administrative costs that are in excess of the designated 10 percent administrative cost ceiling. In addition, the Recipient shall neither count costs in excess of the administrative cost ceiling as cost share, nor allocate such costs to other federally sponsored project, I unless approved by the Contracting Officer. 6. LIMITATIONS ON USE OF FUNDS i a. By accepting funds under this award, you agree that none of the funds obligated on the award shall be expended, directly or 1 indirectly, for gambling establishments, aquariums, zoos, golf courses or swimming pools. b. Local government and Indian tribe Recipients may not use more than 20 percent of the amounts provided or $250,000, whichever is greater (EISA Sec 545 (b)(3)(13)), for the establishment of revolving loan funds. .J c. Local government and Indian tribe Recipients may not use more than 20 percent of the amounts provided or $250,000, whichever is greater (EISA Sec 545 (b)(3)(C)), for subgrants to nongovernmental organizations for the purpose of assisting the implementation of the energy efficiency and conservation strategy of -the eligible unit of local government or Indian tribL - ' 7. INDIRECT COSTS AND FRINGE BENEFITS ARE NOT REIMBURSABLE n The budget for this award does not include indirect costs or fringe benefits. Therefore, these expenses shall not be charged to nor reimbursement requested for this project nor shall the indirect and fringe benefit costs from this project be allocated to any other federally sponsored project. In addition, indirect costs or fringe benefits shall not be counted as cost share unless approved by the Contracting Officer. This restriction does not apply to subawardees' indirect or fringe benefit costs. S. USE OF PROGRAM INCOME If you earn program income during the project period as a result of this award, you may add the program income to the funds committed to the award and used to further eligible project objectives. 9. STATEMENT OF FEDERAL STEWARDSHIP DOE will exercise normal Federal stewardship in overseeing the project activities performed under this award. Stewardship activities include, but are not limited to, conducting site visits; reviewing performance and financial reports; providing technical assistance and/or temporary intervention in unusual circumstances to correct deficiencies which develop during the project; assuring compliance with terms and conditions; and reviewing technical performance after project completion to ensure that the award objectives have been accomplished. 10. SITE VISITS DOE's authorized representatives have the right to make site visits at reasonable times to review project accomplishments and management control systems and to provide technical assistance, if required. You must provide, and must require your subawardees to provide, reasonable access to facilities, office space, resources, and assistance for the safety and convenience of the government representatives in the performance of their duties. All site visits and evaluations must be performed in a manner that does not unduly interfere with or delay the work. 11. REPORTING REQUIREMENTS a. Requirements. The reporting requirements for this award are identified on the Federal Assistance Reporting Checklist, DOE F 4600.2, attached to this award. Failure to comply with these reporting requirements is considered a material noncompliance with the terms of the award. Noncompliance may result in withholding of future payments, suspension or termination of the current award, and withholding of future awards. A willful failure to perform, a history of failure to perform, or unsatisfactory performance of this and/or other financial assistance awards, may also result in a debarment action to preclude future awards by Federal agencies. 1 F,'. b. Additional Recovery Act Reporting Requirements are found in the Provision below labeled: "REPORTING AND REGISTRATION REQUIREMENTS UNDER SECTION 1512 OF THE RECOVERY ACT." 12. PUBLICATIONS a. You are encouraged to publish or otherwise make publicly available the results of the work conducted under the award. b. An acknowledgment of DOE support and a disclaimer must appear in the publication of any material, whether copyrighted or not, based on or developed under this project, as follows: Acknowledgment: "This material is based upon work supported by the Department of Energy [National Nuclear Security Administration] [add name(s) of other agencies, if applicable] under Award Number(s) [enter the award number(s)]." Disclaimer: "This report was prepared as an account of work sponsored by an agency of the United States Government. Neither the United States Government nor any agency thereof, nor any of their employees, makes any warranty, express or implied, or assumes any legal liability or responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, or usefulness of any information, apparatus, product, or process disclosed, or represents that its use would not infringe privately owned rights. Reference herein to any specific commercial product, process, or service by trade name, trademark, manufacturer, or otherwise does not necessarily constitute or imply its endorsement, recommendation, or favoring by the United States Government or any agency thereof. The views and opinions of authors expressed herein do not necessarily state or reflect those of the United States Government or any agency thereof." 13. FEDERAL, STATE, AND MUNICIPAL REQUIREMENTS You must obtain any required permits and comply with applicable federal, state, and municipal laws, codes, and regulations for work performed under this award. 14. LOBBYING RESTRICTIONS By accepting funds under this award, you agree that none of the funds obligated on the award shall be expended, directly or indirectly, to influence congressional action on any legislation or appropriation matters pending before Congress, other than to communicate to Members of Congress as described in 18 U.S.C. 1913. This restriction is in addition to those prescribed elsewhere in statute and regulation. 15. STAGED DISBURSEMENT a. The total funding allocation for this award, shown in Block 12 of the Assistance Agreement, will be obligated in full with this action; however, funds will be released according to a staged disbursement schedule. All funds must be expended within 36 months of the effective date of the award. 1. The initial disbursement of funds is 50% of the total funding allocation. The amount identified on Page 2 of the Assistance Agreement will be released to the Recipient to begin work on the approved activities listed in the Statement of Project Objectives. If conditions are included in the terms and conditions of this award, upon satisfying the conditions, the Contracting Officer will lift the funding restrictions associated with the conditions and release the remainder of the initial disbursement of funds. 2. Project performance will be monitored and corrective action taken, as necessary to ensure acceptable performance under this award. After one or more progress reviews, in which the Recipient must demonstrate that it has made satisfactory progress on its activities; expended funds appropriately; complied with reporting requirements; and created jobs, the Contracting Officer will approve the release of the remaining balance of the total funding allocation. r-� b. No additional funds will be disbursed to the Recipient for payment, and DOE does not guarantee or assume any obligation to reimburse costs incurred by the Recipient, until the requirements of each progress review are met. Failure by the Recipient to demonstrate acceptable performance under this award will be deemed a noncompliance pursuant to 10 CFR 600. If a noncompliance occurs, the Contracting Officer may unilaterally terminate or suspend this award and deobligate the amounts obligated. In such case, the Recipient shall not be reimbursed for costs incurred at the Recipient's risk, as described above. 16. NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY ACT (NEPA) REQUIREMENTS You are restricted from taking any action using Federal funds, which would have an adverse effect on the environment or limit the choice of reasonable alternatives prior to DOE providing either a NEPA clearance or a final NEPA decision regarding this project. DOE has made a conditional NEPA determination for this award, and funding for certain activities or tasks under this award is contingent upon the final NEPA determination. Activity #1 - Civic Center and Library heating and Cooling Physical Plant Replacement Project- (Retrofit) Prohibited actions include: Demolition, construction, removal, installation or disposal activities, until such time that you comply with the Waste Stream Clause and Historic Preservation Clause. This restriction does not preclude you from: 1) purchasing any necessary equipment or related materials; or 2) conducting assessments, studies and other related administrative work. Recipient shall ensure the safety and structural integrity of any repair, replacement, construction and/or alteration performed under this project. If you move forward with activities that are not authorized for Federal funding by the DOE Contracting Officer in advance of the final NEPA decision, you are doing so at risk of not receiving Federal funding and such costs may not be recognized as allowable cost share. If this award includes construction activities, you must submit an environmental evaluation report/evaluation notification form _ addressing NEPA issues prior to DOE initiating the NEPA process. 17. HISTORIC PRESERVATION Prior to the expenditure of Federal funds to alter any structure or site, the Recipient is required to comply" with the requirements of Section 106 of the National Historic Preservation Act (NHPA), consistent with DOE's 2009 letter of delegation of authority regarding the NHPA. Section 106 applies to historic properties that are listed in or eligible for listing in the National Register of Historic Places. In order to fulfill the requirements of Section 106, the recipient must contact the State Historic Preservation Officer (SHPO), and, L if applicable, the Tribal Historic Preservation Officer (THPO), to coordinate the Section 106 review outlined in 36 CFR Part 800. SHPO contact information is available at the following link: I http://www.ncshpo.oriz/find/index.htm. THPO contact information is available at the following link: http://www.iiathpo.org/i-nap.liti-ni . t Section 110(k) of the NHPA applies to DOE funded activities. Recipients shall avoid taking any action that k- results in an adverse effect to historic properties pending compliance with Section 106. Recipients should be aware that the DOE Contracting Officer will consider the recipient in compliance with Section 106 of the NHPA only after the Recipient has submitted adequate background documentation to the SHPO/THPO for its review, and the SHPO/THPO has provided written concurrence to the Recipient that it ' does not object to its Section 106 finding or determination. Recipient shall provide a copy of this concurrence to the Contracting Officer. 18. WASTE STREAM Prior to the expenditure of Federal funds to dispose of sanitary or hazardous waste, the Recipient is required to provide documentation to the Project Officer demonstrating that it has prepared a disposal plan for sanitary or hazardous waste generated by the proposed activities. Sanitary or hazardous waste includes, but is not limited to, old light bulbs, lead ballasts, piping, roofing material, discarded equipment, debris, asbestos, etc. The DOE Contracting Officer shall consider compliance with this clause complete only after the Recipient ` has submitted adequate documentation to DOE for its review, and DOE has provided written approval to the Recipient of its proposed plan to dispose of its sanitary or hazardous waste. 19. DECONTAMINATION AND/OR DECOMMISSIONING (D&D) COSTS Notwithstanding any other provisions of this Agreement, the Government shall not be responsible for or have any obligation to the Recipient for (i) Decontamination and/or Decommissioning (D&D) of any of the Recipient's facilities, or (ii) any costs which may be incurred by the Recipient in connection with the D&D of any of its facilities due to the performance of the work under this Agreement, whether said work was performed prior to or subsequent to the effective date of the Agreement. 20. SUBCONTRACT/SUBGRANT APPROVALS ' a. In the original application, the subcontractors/subgrantees were proposed by the recipient. In order to receive reimbursement i for the costs associated with subcontractors/activities listed in the approved Statement of Project Objectives (SOPO), each subcontract/subgrant must be approved by the DOE Contracting Officer. 4 b. Upon the recipient's selection of the subcontractors/subgrantees, and within 180 days of the award date in Block 27 of the -- Assistance Agreement, the recipient shall provide the following information for each, regardless of dollar amount: - Name - DUNS Number - Award Amount - Statement of work including applicable activities - EF-1 for all proposed activities c. In addition to the information in paragraph b. above, for each subcontract/subgrant that has an estimated cost greater than 25% of the Total Allocation or $1,000,000, whichever is less, the recipient must submit a Statement of Objectives, SF424A Budget Information — Nonconstruction Programs, and Budget Justification. The DOE Contracting Officer may require additional information concerning these subcontract(s)/subgrant(s) prior to providing written approval. d. No funds shall be expended on the subcontracts supporting the activities listed in the approved SOPO until DOE approval is provided. DOE does not guarantee or assume any obligation to reimburse costs incurred by the Recipient or subcontractor for these activities, until approval is provided in writing by the Contracting Officer. e. Upon written approval by the Contracting Officer, the Recipient may then receive payment for the activities listed in the approved SOPO for allowable costs incurred in accordance with the payment provisions contained in the Special Terms and Conditions of this agreement. { 21. SPECIAL PROVISIONS RELATING TO WORK FUNDED UNDER AMERICAN RECOVERY AND REINVESTMENT ACT OF 2009 (May 2009) Preamble The American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009, Pub. L. 11-1-5, (Recovery Act) was enacted to preserve and create jobs and promote economic recovery, assist those most impacted by the recession, provide investments needed to increase economic efficiency by spurring technological advances in science and health, invest in transportation, environmental protection, and other infrastructure that will provide long-term economic benefits, stabilize State and local government budgets, in order to minimize and avoid reductions in essential services and counterproductive State and local tax increases. Recipients shall use grant funds in a manner that maximizes job creation and economic benefit. The Recipient shall comply with all terms and conditions in the Recovery Act relating generally to governance accountability, transparency, data collection and resources as specified in Act itself and as discussed below. Recipients should begin planning activities for their first tier subrecipients, including obtaining a DUNS number (or updating the existing DUNS record), and registering with the Central Contractor Registration (CCR). Be advised that Recovery Act funds can be used in conjunction with other funding as necessary to complete projects, but tracking and reporting must be separate to meet the reporting requirements of the Recovery Act and related guidance. For projects funded by sources other than the Recovery Act, Contractors must keep separate records for Recovery Act funds and to ensure those records comply with the requirements of the Act. The Government has not fully developed the implementing instructions of the Recovery Act, particularly concerning specific procedural requirements for the new reporting requirements. The Recipient will be 4, provided these details as they become available. The Recipient must comply with all requirements of the Act. If the recipient believes there is any inconsistency between ARRA requirements and current award terms and conditions, the issues will be referred to the Contracting Officer for reconciliation. i 1 Definitions For purposes of this clause, Covered Funds means funds expended or obligated from appropriations under the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009, Pub. L. 111-5. Covered Funds will have special accounting codes and will be identified as Recovery Act funds in the grant, cooperative agreement or TIA and/or modification using Recovery Act funds. Covered Funds must be reimbursed by September 30, 2015 Non -Federal employer means any employer with respect to covered funds -- the contractor, subcontractor, grantee, or recipient, as the case may be, if the contractor, subcontractor, grantee, or recipient is an employer; and any professional membership organization, certification of other professional body, any agent or licensee of the Federal government, or any person acting directly or indirectly in the interest of an employer receiving covered funds; or with respect to covered funds received by a State or local government, the State or local government receiving the funds and any contractor or subcontractor receiving the funds and any contractor or subcontractor of the State or local government; and does not mean any department, I agency, or other entity of the federal government. _ i.. Recipient means any entity that receives Recovery Act funds directly from the Federal government (including Recovery Act funds received through grant, loan, or contract) other than an individual and includes a State that receives Recovery Act Funds. Special Provisions A. Flow Down Requirement Recipients must include these special terms and conditions in any subaward. B. Se negation of Costs Recipients must segregate the obligations and expenditures related to funding under the Recovery Act. Financial and accounting systems should be revised as necessary to segregate, track and maintain these f funds apart and separate from other revenue streams. No part of the funds from the Recovery Act shall be commingled with any other funds or used for a purpose other than that of making payments for costs allowable for Recovery Act projects. C. Prohibition on Use of Funds None of the funds provided under this agreement derived from the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009, Pub. L. 111-5, may be used by any State or local government, or any private entity, for any casino or other gambling establishment, aquarium, zoo, golf course, or swimming pool. D. Access to Records With respect to each financial assistance agreement awarded utilizing at least some of the funds appropriated or otherwise made available by the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009, Pub. L. 111-5, any representative of an appropriate inspector general appointed under section 3 or 8G of the Inspector General Act of 1988 (5 U.S.C. App.) or of the Comptroller General is authorized -- (1) to examine any records of the contractor or grantee, any of its subcontractors or subgrantees, or any State or local agency administering such contract that pertain to, and involve transactions that relate to, the 4 subcontract, subcontract, grant, or subgrant; and 4 (2) to interview any officer or employee of the contractor, grantee, subgrantee, or agency regarding such transactions. E. Publication An application may contain technical data and other data, including trade secrets and/or privileged or confidential information, which the applicant does not want disclosed to the public or used by the Government for any purpose other than the application. To protect such data, the applicant should specifically identify each page including each line or paragraph thereof containing the data to be protected and mark the cover sheet of the application with the following Notice as well as referring to the Notice on each page to which the Notice applies: Notice of Restriction on Disclosure and Use of Data The data contained in pages ---- of this application have been submitted in confidence and contain trade secrets or proprietary information, and such data shall be used or disclosed only for evaluation purposes, [I provided that if this applicant receives an award -as-a result of or in connection with the submission of this k application, DOE shall have the right to use or disclose the data here to the extent provided in the award. This restriction does not limit the Government's right to use or disclose data obtained without restriction [ from any source, including the applicant. t _j Information about this agreement will be published on the Internet and linked to the website www.recovery.gov, maintained by the Accountability and Transparency Board. The Board may exclude posting contractual or other information on the website on a case -by -case basis when necessary to protect national security or to protect information that is not subject to disclosure under sections 552 and 552a of title 5, United States Code. F. Protecting State and Local Government and Contractor Whistleblowers. The requirements of Section 1553 of the Act are summarized below. They include, but are not limited to: Prohibition on Reprisals: An employee of any non -Federal employer receiving covered funds under the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009, Pub. L. 11 1-5, may not be discharged, demoted, or otherwise discriminated against as a reprisal for disclosing, including a disclosure made in the ordinary course of an employee's duties, to the Accountability and Transparency Board, an inspector general, the Comptroller General, a member of Congress, a State or Federal regulatory or law enforcement agency, a person with supervisory authority over the employee (or other person working for the employer who has the authority to investigate, discover or terminate misconduct), a court or grant jury, the head of a Federal agency, or their representatives information that the employee believes is evidence of: - gross management of an agency contract or grant relating to covered funds; - a gross waste of covered funds; - a substantial and specific danger to public health or safety related to the implementation or use of covered funds; - an abuse of authority related to the implementation or use of covered funds; or - as violation of law, rule, or regulation related to an agency contract (including the competition for or negotiation of a contract) or grant, awarded or issued relating to covered funds. Agency Action: Not later than 30 days after receiving an inspector general report of an alleged reprisal, the - head of the agency shall determine whether there is sufficient basis to conclude that the non -Federal employer has subjected the employee to a prohibited reprisal. The agency shall either issue an order denying relief in whole or in part or shall take one or more of the following actions: i - Order the employer to take affirmative action to abate the reprisal. - Order the employer to reinstate the person to the position that the person held before the reprisal, together with compensation including back pay, compensatory damages, employment benefits, and other terms and conditions of employment that would apply to the person in that position if the reprisal had note been taken. - Order the employer to pay the employee an amount equal to the aggregate amount of all costs and expenses (including attorneys' fees and expert witnesses' fees) that were reasonably incurred by the i. employee for or in connection with, bringing the complaint regarding the reprisal, as determined by the head of a court of competent jurisdiction. t_ Nonenforceability of Certain Provisions Waiving Rights and remedies or Requiring Arbitration: Except as provided in a collective bargaining agreement, the rights and remedies provided to aggrieved employees by this section may not be waived by any agreement, policy, form, or condition of employment, including any i, pr-edispute-arbitration agreement. No predispute arbitration agreement shall be valid or enforceable if it requires arbitration of a dispute arising out of this section. q p g Requirement to Post Notice of Rights and Remedies: Any employer receiving covered funds under the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009, Pub. L. 111-5, shall post notice of the rights and remedies as required therein. (Refer to section 1553 of the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009, Pub. L. 111-5, www.Recovery.gov, for specific requirements of this section and prescribed language for the notices.). G. Reserved H. False Claims Act Recipient and sub -recipients shall promptly refer to the DOE or other appropriate Inspector General any credible evidence that a principal, employee, agent, contractor, sub -grantee, subcontractor or other person has submitted a false claim under the False Claims Act or has committed a criminal or civil violation of laws pertaining to fraud, conflict of interest, bribery, gratuity or similar misconduct involving those funds. I. Information in Support of Recovery Act Reporting Recipient may be required to submit backup documentation for expenditures of funds under the Recovery Act including such items as timecards and invoices. Recipient shall provide copies of backup documentation at the request of the Contracting Officer or designee. J. Availability of Funds Funds obligated to this award are available for reimbursement of costs until 36 months after the award date. K. Additional Funding Distribution and Assurance of Appropriate Use of Funds Certification by Governor — For funds provided to any State or agency thereof by the American Reinvestment and Recovery Act of 2009, Pub. L. 111-5, the Governor of the State shall certify that: 1) the state will request and use funds provided by the Act; and 2) the funds will be used to create jobs and promote economic growth. Acceptance by State Legislature -- If funds provided to any State in any division of the Act are not accepted for use by the Governor, then acceptance by the State legislature, by means of the adoption of a concurrent resolution, shall be sufficient to provide funding to such State. Distribution -- After adoption of a State legislature's concurrent resolution, funding to the State will be for distribution to local governments, councils of government, public entities, and public -private entities within the State either by formula or at the State's discretion. L. Certifications With respect to funds made available to State or local governments for infrastructure investments under the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009, Pub. L. 111-5, the Governor, mayor, or other chief executive, as appropriate, certified by acceptance of this award that the infrastructure investment has 4.. received the full review and vetting required by lawandthat the chief executive accepts responsibility that the infrastructure investment is an appropriate use of taxpayer dollars. Recipient shall provide an additional certification that includes a description of the investment, the estimated total cost, and the amount of covered funds to be used for posting on the Internet. A State or local agency may not receive infrastructure _ investment funding from funds made available by the Act unless this certification is made and posted. 22. REPORTING AND REGISTRATION REQUIREMENTS UNDER SECTION 1512 OF THE RECOVERY ACT (a) This award requires the recipient to complete projects or activities which are funded under the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 (Recovery Act) and to report on use of Recovery Act funds provided through this award. Information from these reports will be made available to the public. (b) The reports are due no later than ten calendar days after each calendar quarter in which the Recipient C-1 receives the assistance award funded in whole or in part by the Recovery Act. (c) Recipients and their first -tier subrecipients must maintain current registrations in the Central Contractor Registration (http://www.ccr.gov) at all times during which they have active federal awards funded with Recovery Act funds. A Dun and Bradstreet Data Universal Numbering System (DUNS) Number (hitp://www.dnb.com) is one of the requirements for registration in the Central Contractor Registration. (d) The recipient shall report the information described in section 1512(c) of the Recovery Act using the reporting instructions and data elements that will be provided online at hitp://www.FederalReporting.gov and ensure that any information that is pre -filled is corrected or updated as needed. 23. NOTICE REGARDING THE PURCHASE OF AMERICAN-MADE EQUIPMENT AND PRODUCTS -- SENSE OF CONGRESS It is the sense of the Congress that, to the greatest extent practicable, all equipment and products purchased with funds ma available under this award should be American -made. *Special Note: Definitization of the Provisions entitled, "REQUIRED USE OF AMERICAN IRON, STEEL, AND MANUFACTURED GOODS — SECTION 1605 OF THE AMERICAN RECOVERY AND REINVESTMENT ACT OF 2009" and "REQUIRED USE OF AMERICAN IRON, STEEL, AND MANUFACTURED GOODS (COVERED UNDER INTERNATIONAL AGREEMENTS) — SECTION 1605 OF THE AMERICAN RECOVERY AND REINVESTMENT ACT OF 2009" will be done upon definition and review of final activities. 24. REQUIRED USE OF AMERICAN IRON, STEEL, AND MANUFACTURED GOODS — SECTION 1605 OF THE AMERICAN RECOVERY AND REINVESTMENT ACT OF 2009 (a) Definitions. As used in this award term and condition— (1) Manufactured good means a good brought to the construction site for incorporation into the building or work that has been— (1) Processed into a specific form and shape; or (ii) Combined with other raw material to create a material that has different properties than the properties of the individual raw materials. (2) Public -building and public work means a public building of, and a public work of, a governmental entity (the United States; the District of Columbia; commonwealths, territories, and minor outlying islands of the United States; State and local governments; and multi -State, regional, or interstate entities which have governmental functions These buildings and works may include without limitation bridges, dams plants, g )• g Y• g >p , highways, parkways, streets, subways, tunnels, sewers, mains, power lines, pumping stations, heavy generators, railways, airports, terminals, docks, piers, wharves, ways, lighthouses, buoys, jetties, breakwaters, levees, and canals, and the construction, alteration, maintenance, or repair of such buildings and works. (3) Steel means an alloy that includes at least 50 percent iron, between .02 and 2 percent carbon, and may include other elements. (b) Domestic preference. (1) This award term and condition implements Section 1605 of the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 (Recovery Act) (Pub. L. 111-5), by requiring that all iron, steel, and manufactured goods used in the project are produced in the United States except as provided in paragraph (b)(3) and (b)(4) of this section and condition. (2) This requirement does not apply to the material listed by the Federal- Government as follows: To Be Determined (3) The award official may add other iron, steel, and/or manufactured goods to the list in paragraph (b)(2) of this section and condition if the Federal Government determines that— (i) The cost of the domestic iron, steel, and/or manufactured goods would be unreasonable. The cost of domestic iron, steel, or manufactured goods used in the project is unreasonable when the cumulative cost of such material will increase the cost of the overall project by more than 25 percent; (ii) The iron, steel, and/or manufactured good is not produced, or manufactured in the United States in sufficient and reasonably available quantities and of a satisfactory quality; or (iii) The application of the restriction of section 1605 of the Recovery Act would be inconsistent with the public interest. (c) Request for determination of inapplicability of Section 1605 of the Recovery Act. (1)(i) Any recipient request to use foreign iron, steel, and/or manufactured goods in accordance with paragraph (b)(3) of this section shall include adequate information for Federal Government evaluation of the request, including — (A) A description of the foreign and domestic iron, steel, and/or manufactured goods; (B) Unit of measure; (C) Quantity; (D) Cost; (E) Time of delivery or availability; (F) Location of the project; (G) Name and address of the proposed supplier; and (H) A detailed justification of the reasonforuse of foreign iron, steel, and/or manufactured goods cited in accordance with paragraph (b)(3) of this section. (ii) A request based on unreasonable cost shall include a reasonable survey of the market and a completed cost comparison table in the format in paragraph (d) of this section. (Ili) The cost of iron, steel, and/or manufactured goods material shall include all delivery costs to the construction site and any applicable duty. (iv) Any recipient request for a determination submitted after Recovery Act funds have been obligated for a project for construction, alteration, maintenance, or repair shall explain why the recipient could not reasonably foresee the need for such determination and could not have requested the determination before the funds were obligated. If the recipient does not submit a satisfactory explanation, the award official need not make a determination. (2) If the Federal Government determines after funds have been obligated for a project for construction, 1.-3 alteration, maintenance, or repair that an exception to section 1605 of the Recovery Act applies, the award official will amend the award to allow use of the foreign iron, steel, and/or relevant manufactured goods. When the basis for the exception is nonavailability or public interest, the amended award shall reflect adjustment of the award amount, redistribution of budgeted funds, and/or other actions taken to cover costs associated with acquiring or using the foreign iron, steel, and/or relevant manufactured goods. When the basis for the exception is the unreasonable cost of the domestic iron, steel, or manufactured goods, the award official shall adjust the award amount or redistribute budgeted funds by at least the differential established in 2 CFR 176.110(a). (3) Unless the Federal Government determines that an exception to section 1605 of the Recovery Act applies, use of foreign iron, steel, and/or manufactured goods is noncompliant with section 1605 of the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act. (d) Data. To permit evaluation of requests under paragraph (b) of this section based on unreasonable cost, the Recipient shall include the following information and any applicable supporting data based on the survey of suppliers: Foreign and Domestic Items Cost Comparison Description Unit of measure Quantity Cost (dollars)* Item 1: Foreign steel, iron, or manufactured good Domestic steel, iron, or manufactured good Item 2: Foreign steel, iron, or manufactured good Domestic steel, iron, or manufactured good List name, address, telephone number, email address, and contact for suppliers surveyed. Attach copy of response; if oral, attach summary. 1 Include other applicable supporting information. *Include all delivery costs to the construction site. 25. REQUIRED USE OF AMERICAN IRON, STEEL, AND MANUFACTURED GOODS (COVERED UNDER INTERNATIONAL AGREEMENTS) — SECTION 1605 OF THE AMERICAN RECOVERY AND REINVESTMENT ACT OF 2009 (a) Definitions. As used in this award term and condition — Designated country — (1) A World Trade Organization Government Procurement Agreement country (Aruba, Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Canada, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hong Kong, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Israel, Italy, Japan, Korea (Republic of), Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Singapore, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom; (2) A Free Trade Agreement (FTA) country (Australia, Bahrain, Canada, Chile, Costa Rica, Dominican Republic, El Salvador, Guatemala, Honduras, Israel, Mexico, Morocco, Nicaragua, Oman, Peru, or Singapore); or (3) A United States -European Communities Exchange of Letters (May 15, 1995) country: Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, and United Kingdom. Designated country iron, steel, and/or manufactured goods — (1) Is wholly the growth, product, or manufacture of a designated country; or (2) In the case of a manufactured good that consist in whole or in part of materials from another country, has been substantially transformed in a designated country into a new and different manufactured good distinct from the materials from which it was transformed. Domestic iron, steel, and/or manufactured good — (1) Is wholly the growth, product, or manufacture of the United States; or (2) In the case of a manufactured good that consists in whole or in part of materials from another country, has been substantially transformed in the United States into a new and different manufactured good distinct from the materials from which it was transformed. There is no requirement with regard to the origin of. components or subcomponents in manufactured goods or products, as long as the manufacture of the goods occurs in the United States. Foreign iron, steel, and/or manufactured good means iron, steel and/or manufactured good that is not domestic or designated country iron, steel, and/or manufactured good. Manufactured good means a good brought to the construction site for incorporation into the building or work that has been— (1) Processed into a specific form and shape; or i-I_ (2) Combined with other raw material to create -a material that has different properties than the properties of the individual raw materials. Public building and public work means a public building of, and a public work of, a governmental entity (the United States; the District of Columbia; commonwealths, territories, and minor outlying islands of the United States; State and local govermn-ents; and multi -State, regional, or interstate entities which have governmental functions). These buildings and works may include, without limitation, bridges, dams, plants, highways, parkways, streets, subways, tunnels, sewers, mains, power lines, pumping stations, heavy generators, railways, airports, terminals, docks, piers, wharves, ways, lighthouses, buoys, jetties, breakwaters, levees, and canals, and the construction, alteration, maintenance, or repair of such buildings and works. Steel means an alloy that includes at least 50 percent iron, between .02 and 2 percent carbon, and may include other elements. (b) Iron, steel, and manufactured goods. (1) The award term and condition described in this section implements— (i) Section 1605(a) of the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 (Pub. L. 111-5) (Recovery Act), by requiring that all iron, steel, and manufactured goods used in the project are produced in the United States; and (ii) Section 1605(d), which requires application of the Buy American requirement in a manner consistent with U.S. obligations under international agreements. The restrictions of section 1605 of the Recovery Act do not apply to designated country iron, steel, and/or manufactured goods. The Buy American requirement in section 1605 shall not be applied where the iron, steel or manufactured goods used in the project are from a Party to an international agreement that obligates the recipient to treat the goods and services of that Party the same as domestic goods and services. This obligation shall only apply to projects with an estimated t IIJI value of $7,443,000 or more. �1. (2) The recipient shall use only domestic or designated country iron, steel, and manufactured goods in perfonning the work funded in whole or part with this award, except as provided in paragraphs (b)(3) and r (b)(4) of this section. (3) The requirement in paragraph (b)(2) of this section does not apply to the iron, steel, and manufactured goods listed by the Federal Government as follows: To Be Determined (4) The award official may add other iron, steel, and manufactured goods to the list in paragraph (b)(3) of this section if the Federal Government determines that— (1) The cost of domestic iron, steel, and/or manufactured goods would be unreasonable. The cost of domestic iron, steel, and/or manufactured goods used in the project is unreasonable when the cumulative cost of such material will increase the overall cost of the project by more than 25 percent; (ii) The iron, steel, and/or manufactured good is not produced, or manufactured in the United States in sufficient and reasonably available commercial quantities of a satisfactory quality; or r 0 (iii) The application of the restriction of section 1605 of the Recovery Act would be inconsistent with the public interest. (c) Request for determination of inapplicability of section 1605 of the Recovery Act or the Buy American Act. (1)(i) Any recipient request to use foreign iron, steel, and/or manufactured goods in accordance with paragraph (b)(4) of this section shall include adequate information for Federal Government evaluation of the request, including — (A) A description of the foreign and domestic iron, steel, and/or manufactured goods; (B) Unit of measure; (C) Quantity; (D) Cost; (E) Time of delivery or availability; (F) Location of the project; (G) Name and address of the proposed supplier; and (H) A detailed justification of the reason for use of foreign iron, steel, and/or manufactured goods cited in accordance with paragraph (b)(4) of this section. (ii) A request based on unreasonable cost shall include a reasonable survey of the market and a completed cost comparison table in the format in paragraph (d) of this section. (iii) The cost of iron, steel, or manufactured goods shall include all delivery costs to the construction site and any applicable duty. (iv) Any recipient request for a determination submitted after Recovery Act funds have been obligated for a project for construction, alteration, maintenance, or repair shall explain why the recipient could not reasonably foresee the need for such determination and could not have requested the determination before the funds were obligated. If the recipient does not submit a satisfactory explanation, the award official need not make a determination. (2) If the Federal Government determines after funds have been obligated for a project for construction, alteration, maintenance, or repair that an exception to section 1605 of the Recovery Act applies, the award official will amend the award to allow use of the foreign iron, steel, and/or relevant manufactured goods. When the basis for the exception is nonavailability or public interest, the amended award shall reflect adjustment of the award amount, redistribution of budgeted funds, and/or other appropriate actions taken to cover costs associated with acquiring or using the foreign iron, steel, and/or relevant manufactured goods. When the basis for the exception is the unreasonable cost of the domestic iron, steel, or manufactured goods, the award official shall adjust the award amount or redistribute budgeted funds, as appropriate, by at least the differential established in 2 CFR 176.110(a). (3) Unless the Federal Government determines that an exception to section 1605 of the Recovery Act applies, use of foreign iron, steel, and/or manufactured goods other than designated country iron, steel, and/or manufactured goods is noncompliant with the applicable Act. (d) Data. To permit evaluation of requests under paragraph (b) of this section based on unreasonable cost, the applicant shall -include the following information and any applicable supporting data based on the survey of suppliers: Foreign and Domestic Items Cost Comparison Description Unit of measure Quantity Cost (dollars)* Item 1: Foreign steel, iron, or manufactured good Domestic steel, iron, or manufactured good Item 2: Foreign steel, iron, or manufactured good Domestic steel, iron, or manufactured good List name, address, telephone number, email address, and contact for suppliers surveyed. Attach copy of response; if oral, attach summary. Include other applicable supporting information. *Include all delivery costs to the construction site. 26. WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS UNDER SECTION 1606 OF THE RECOVERY ACT t. (a) Section 1606 of the Recovery Act requires that all laborers and mechanics employed by contractors and subcontractors on projects funded directly by or assisted in whole or in part by and through the Federal Government pursuant to the Recovery Act shall be paid wages at rates not less than those prevailing on projects of a character similar in the locality as determined by the Secretary of Labor in accordance with subchapter IV of chapter 31 of title 40, United States Code. LJ Pursuant to Reorganization Plan No. 14 and the Copeland Act, 40 U.S.C. 3145, the Department of Labor - has issued regulations at 29 CFR parts 1, 3, and 5 to implement the Davis -Bacon and related Acts. Regulations in 29 CFR 5.5 instruct agencies concerning application of the standard Davis -Bacon contract t " clauses set forth in that section. Federal agencies providing grants, cooperative agreements, and loans under r the Recovery Act shall ensure that the standard Davis -Bacon contract clauses found in 29 CFR 5.5(a) are incorporated in any resultant covered contracts that are in excess of $2,000 for construction, alteration or repair (including painting and decorating). ; (b) For additional guidance on the wage rate requirements of section 1606, contact your awarding agency. Recipients of grants, cooperative agreements and loans should direct their initial inquiries concerning the f -1 application of Davis -Bacon requirements to a particular federally assisted project to the Federal agency J funding the project. The Secretary of Labor retains final coverage authority under Reorganization Plan Number 14. 27. RECOVERY ACT TRANSACTIONS LISTED IN SCHEDULE OF EXPENDITURES OF FEDERAL AWARDS AND RECIPIENT RESPONSIBILITIES FOR INFORMING SUBRECIPIENTS (a) To maximize the transparency and accountability of funds authorized under the AmericanRecoveryand Reinvestment Act of 2009 (Pub. L. 111-5) (Recovery Act) as required by Congress and in accordance with 2 CFR 215.21 "Uniform Administrative Requirements for Grants and Agreements" and OMB Circular A- 102 Common Rules provisions, recipients agree to maintain records that identify adequately the source and application of Recovery Act funds. OMB Circular A-102 is available at http://www.whitehouse.govlomblcircularsla]021a]02.html. (b) For recipients covered by the Single Audit Act Amendments of 1996 and OMB Circular A-133, "Audits 5 of States, Local Governments, and Non -Profit Organizations," recipients agree to separately identify the expenditures for Federal awards under the Recovery Act on the Schedule of Expenditures of Federal Awards (SEFA) and the Data Collection Form (SF —SAC) required by OMB Circular A-133. OMB Circular A-133 is available at http://www.whitehouse.gov/oinb/circulars/a133/a133.html. This shall be accomplished by identifying expenditures for Federal awards made under the Recovery Act separately on the SEFA, and as separate rows under Item 9 of Part III on the SF —SAC by CFDA number, and inclusion of the prefix "ARRA-" in identifying the name of the Federal program on the SEFA and as the first characters in Item 9d of Part III on the SF —SAC. (c) Recipients agree to separately identify to each subrecipient, and document at the time of subaward and at the time of disbursement of funds, the Federal award number, CFDA number, and amount of Recovery Act funds. When a recipient awards Recovery Act funds for an existing program, the information furnished to subrecipients shall distinguish the subawards of incremental Recovery Act funds from regular subawards under the existing program. (d) Recipients agree to require their subrecipients to include on their SEFA information to specifically identify Recovery Act funding similar to the requirements for the recipient SEFA described above. This information is needed to allow the recipient to properly monitor subrecipient expenditure of ARRA funds as well as oversight by the Federal awarding agencies, Offices of Inspector General and the Government Accountability Office. 28. DAVIS-BACON ACT REQUIREMENTS Note: Where necessary to make the context of these articles applicable to this award, the term "Contractor" shall mean "Recipient" and the term "Subcontractor" shall mean "subrecipient or Subcontractor" per the following definitions. Recipient means the organization, individual, or other entity that receives an award from DOE and is financially accountable for the use of any DOE funds or property provided for the performance of the project, and is legally responsible for carrying out the terms and conditions of the award. Subrecipient means the legal entity to which a subaward is made and which is accountable to the recipient _y, for the use of the funds provided. The term may include foreign or international organizations (such as 1-11 agencies of the United Nations). Davis -Bacon Act (a) Definition. --"Site of the work"-- (1) Means-- (i) The primary site of the work. The physical place or places where the construction called for in the award will remain when work on it is completed; and (ii) The secondary site of the work, if any. Any other site where a significant portion of the building or work is constructed, provided that such site is-- -3 (A) Located in the United States; and (B) Established specifically for the performance of the award or project; (2) Except as provided in paragraph (3) of this definition, includes any fabrication plants, mobile factories, batch plants, borrow pits, job headquarters, tool yards, etc., provided-- (i) They are dedicated exclusively, or nearly so, to performance of the award or project; and » The are adjacent or virtually adjacent to the " nma site of the work" as defined in paragraph(a)(1)(1),1-1 O Y J Y J P rY P g P or the "seconds site of the work" as defined inparagraph a 1 ii of this definition; "secondary O( )( �) (3) Does not include permanent home offices, branch plant establishments, fabrication plants, or tool yards of a Contractor or subcontractor whose locations and continuance in operation are determined wholly without regard to a particular Federal award or project. In addition, fabrication plants, batch plants, borrow, pits, job headquarters, yards, etc., of a commercial or material supplier which are established by a supplier of materials for the project before opening of bids and not on the Project site, are not included in the "site of the work." Such permanent, previously established facilities are not a part of the "site of the work" even if the operations for a period of time may be dedicated exclusively or nearly so, to the performance of a award. (b) (1) All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site of the work will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR Part 3)), the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash I equivalents thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, or as may be incorporated for a secondary site of the work, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be r alleged to exist between the Contractor and such laborers and mechanics. Any wage determination incorporated for a secondary site of the work shall be effective from the first day on which work under the award was performed at that site and shall be incorporated without any adjustment in award price or estimated cost. Laborers employed by the construction Contractor or construction subcontractor that are transporting portions of the building or work between the secondary site of the work and the primary site of the work shall be paid in accordance with the wage determination applicable to the primary site of the work. f (2) Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under section 1(b)(2)-of the Davis -Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of paragraph (e) of this article; also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs which cover the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such V , period. (3) Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid not less than the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits in the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in the article entitled Apprentices and Trainees. Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked therein; provided, that the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. (4) The wage determination (including any additional classifications and wage rates conformed under Jparagraph c of this article and the Davis -Bacon poster WH-1321 shall be posted at all times b the O ) p ( ) p Y Contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers. (c) (1) The Contracting Officer shall require that any class of laborers or mechanics which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the award shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. The Contracting Officer shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefore only when all the following criteria have been met: �_ (i) The work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination. r (ii) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry. (Ili) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination. (2) If the Contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives and the Contracting Officer agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by the Contracting Officer to the Administrator of the: Wage and Hour Division Employment Standards Administration U.S. Department of Labor Washington, DC 20210 The Administrator or an authorized representative will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise the Contracting Officer or will notify the Contracting Officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (3) In the event the Contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification, or their i representatives, and the Contracting Officer do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), the Contracting Officer shall refer _J the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of the Contracting Officer, to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division for determination. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise the Contracting Officer or will notify the Contracting Officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (4) The wage rate (including fringe benefits, where appropriate) determined pursuant to subparagraphs (c)(2) and (c)(3) of this article shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this award from the first day on which work is performed in the classification.; (d) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the award for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the Contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof. (e) If the Contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the Contractor may conside as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program; provided, that the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the Contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis -Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the Contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program. H11 Rates of Wages - Prior Approval for Proceeding with Davis -Bacon Construction Activities If the Recipient determines at any time that any construction, alteration, or repair activity as defined by 29 CFR 5.20) (http://cfr.vlex.com/vid/5-2-definitions-19681309) will be performed during the course of the project, the Recipient shall request approval from the Contracting Officer prior to commencing such work. If the Contracting Officer concurs with the Recipient's determination, the Recipient must receive Contracting Officer approval to proceed with such activity, and must comply with all applicable Davis - Bacon requirements, prior to commencing such work. A modification to the award which incorporates the appropriate Davis -Bacon wage rate determination(s) will constitute the Contracting Officer's approval to proceed. If the Contracting Officer does not concur with the Recipient's determination, the Contracting Officer will so notify the Recipient in writing. 1 SPECIFICATIONS IJ: Project Manual City of Lubbock Civic Center Physical Plant Renovations and Roof Replacement Lubbock, Texas DOE Award No. DE-EE0000968 September 2010 PARKHILLSMITH&COOPS f PSC Project # 03878709 111 I TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 0 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT INFORMATION Not Used DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 Summary 01200 Price and Payment 01300 Administrative Requirements 01330 Submittal Procedures 01400 Quality Requirements 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01650 Starting of Systems 01700 Execution Requirements DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK 02072 Minor Demolition for Remodeling 02300 Earthwork DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete DIVISION 4 - MASONRY Not Used DIVISION 5 - METAL 05120 Structural Steel DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06114 Wood Blocking and Curbing DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07600 Sheet Meta C1.6. yZA10 07900 Joint Sealers 03878709 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - 1 09/ 10 9 DIVISIONS 8 - 14 Not Used DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15000 General Mechanical Requirements 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 15060 Hangers and Supports 15074 Vibration Isolation 15075 Mechanical Identification 15080 Mechanical Insulation 15120 Piping Specialties 15130 Pumps 15180 Hydronic Piping and Equipment 15195 Gas Piping 15471 HVAC Water Filtration Equipment 15500 Variable Frequency Drives 15514 Finned Water -Tube Boilers 15550 Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks 15622-A Package Water Chillers — For Reference Only 15622-B Package Water Chillers - Centrifugal 15635 Refrigerant Detection and Alarm 15640 Induced Draft Counterflow Cooling Towers 15830 Fans 15900 Direct Digital Controls 15940 Sequence of Operation 15950 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16000 Basic Electrical Methods 16111 Conduit 16123 Building Wire and Cable 16130 Boxes 16140 Wiring Devices 16170 Grounding and Bonding 16180 Equipment Wiring Systems 16190 Supporting Devices 16195 Electrical Identification 16441 Enclosed Switches 16463 DryTypc Transformers 16470 Switchboards and Panelboards 16481 Enclosed Motor Controllers H 03878709 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - 2 09/ 10 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY The specification sections authenticated by my sea] and signature are limited to the following: DIVISION 2 — SITE WORK 02300 Earthwork DIVISION 3 — CONCRETE 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete DIVISION 5 —METAL 05120 Structural Steel OF ................................. RUSSELL R.CARTER ................. 4 92661 Ille C E 14, 5 F-560 03878709 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY RRC - 1 09"o DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY The specification sections authenticated by my seal and signature are limited to the following: DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL l_ t 15000 General Mechanical Requirements 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 15060 Hangers and Supports 15074 Vibration Isolation 15075 Mechanical Identification 15080 Mechanical Insulation 15120 Piping Specialties 15130 Pumps 15180 Hydronic Piping and Equipment 15195 Gas Piping 15471 HVAC Water Filtration Equipment 15500 Variable Frequency Drives 15514 Firmed Water -"Tube Boilers 15550 Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks 15622-A Package Water Chillers — For Reference Only 15622-B Package Water Chillers - Centrifugal - 15635 Refrigerant Detection and Alarm 15640 Induced Draft Counterflow Cooling Towers 15830 Fans 15900 Direct Digital Controls 15940 Sequence of Operation 15950 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing KEVEN WILLIS � 00355 Q' F-560 03878709 09/ 10 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY 1 c DESIGN PROFESSIONAL. RESPONSIBILITY The specification sections authenticated by my seal and signature are limited to the following: DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16000 Basic Electrical Methods 16111 Conduit 16123 Building Wire and Cable 16130 Boxes 16140 Wiring Devices 16170 Grounding and Bonding 16180 Equipment Wiring Systems 16190 Supporting Devices 16195 Electrical Identification 16441 Enclosed Switches 16463 Dry Type Transformers 16470 Switchboards and Panelboards 16481 Enclosed Motor Controllers O3878709 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY 09/ 10 'I'DS - 1 SECTION 01100 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS g A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, and xDivision 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project; Work covered by Contract Documents. P..., B. Work by Owner. C. Owner furnished products. D. Contractor use of site and premises. E. Future work. F. Work Sequence. G. Owner occupancy. 1.3 PROJECT; WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Without force or effect, work of the Project consists of the removal and replacement of the existing chillers, boilers and related piping, pumps and system of the Physical Plant serving the Civic Center and Mahon Library. 1.4 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES _.; A. Limit use of site and premises to allow: 1. Owner occupancy. 2. Work by Owner. 3. Use of site and premises by public. 1.5 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. The Owner will occupythe remises during entire period of construction for the conduct of P g normal operations. B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Owner's operations. ' C. Schedule the Work to accommodate this requirement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03878709 SUMMARY 01100 - 1 09/10 SECTION 01200 PRICE AND PAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Schedule of Values. B. Application for Payment. C. Change Procedures. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01330 — Submittal Procedures: Schedule of Values. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit typed schedule on AIA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet. B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. C. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the major specification Section. Identify site mobilization, general conditions, testing, bonds and insurance as separate line items. D. Include within each line item, a directly proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. E. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application for Payment. F. Revise schedule to list approved weather days with each Application for Payment. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Submit three copies of each application on AIA Form G702 - Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA G703 - Continuation Sheet. B. Content and Format: Utilize Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for Payment. C. Payment Period: As defined in Owner -Contractor agreement. D. Include one copy of waiver of liens from each subcontractor. 1.6 CHANGE PROCEDURES A. The Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time as authorized by AIA A201, 1997 Edition, Paragraph 7.4 by issuing Architect's Supplemental Instructions on AIA Form G710. 03878709 PRICE AND PAYMENT 01200 - 1 09/10 B. The Architect may issue a Construction Change Request which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications and a change in Contract Time for executing the change. Contractor will prepare and submit an estimate within 7 days. C. The Contractor may propose a change by submitting request for change to the Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work. Include a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01600. D. Stipulated Sum/Price Change Order: Based on Proposal Request and Contractor's fixed price quotation or Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by Architect. E. Unit Price Change Order: For pre -determined unit prices and quantities, the Change Order will be executed on a fixed unit price basis. For unit costs or quantities of units of work which are not pre -determined, execute Work under a Construction Change Directive. Changes in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time will be computed as specified for Time and Material Change Order. F. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a directive, on AIA Form G713 Construction Change Directive signed by the Owner, instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. Document will describe changes in the Work, and designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum/Price _ or Contract Time. Promptly execute the change. G. Time and Material Change Order 1. Submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. 2. Architect will determine the change allowable in Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents. 3. Maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material basis. 4. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for changes in the Work. H. Change Order Forms: AIA G701 Change Order. 1. Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract. J. Change Order: Furnish an itemized breakdown, in form acceptable to Architect of all costs and L supporting information including but not limited to quantities, material prices, tier subcontracted work is performed at, labor rates and employer payments and rental rates. The itemized breakdown detail shall be the same for any subcontractor work. Provide complete supporting information for profit and overhead or markups used when so requested. Consider the following items a part of overhead or Contractor's and sub -contractor's mark-up and do not include as a separate cost item: Labor for Superintendents, Assistant Superintendents, home t- office personnel, timekeepers and maintenance mechanics at any level of contracting; individual pieces of equipment, hand tools or instruments having a new value of $500.00 or ^ less, whether or not consumed by use; on site and main offices; modification to record contract ' documents nor guarantee period costs. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used j 03878709 PRICE AND PAYMENT 01200 - 2 09/ 10 i i �j gg PART 3 - EXECUTION t. Not Used END OF SECTION 03878709 PRICE AND PAYMENT 01200 - 3 09/10 SECTION 01300 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coordination. B. Preconstruction meeting. C. Request for information. D. Progress meetings. E. Preinstallation meetings. F. Cutting and patching. G. Alteration project procedures. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Sections of the Project Manual to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. D. In finished areas, except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. E. Large Apparatus: Any large piece of apparatus which is to be installed in any space in the building, and which is too large to permit access through windows, doorways or shafts, shall be brought to the job by the Contractor involved and placed in the space before the enclosing structure is completed. F. Items which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Division 16 for: 1. Voltage. 2. Phase. 3. Ampacity. 4. No. and size of wires. 5. Wiring diagrams. 6. Starter size, details and location. 7. Control devices and details. G. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion and for portions of Work designated for Owner's occupancy. 03878709 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 1 09/10 _o H. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site with Owner for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. t 1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Architect or Owner will schedule a meeting after Notice to Proceed. I B. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect, Engineer, Contractor and major Subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 2. Distribution of Contract Documents. 3. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products, Schedule of Values, and progress schedule. 4. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract and the Architect. -k 5. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for _ payments, proposal request, Change Orders, Request for Information (RFI), and Contract closeout procedures. J 6. Review Notice to Proceed (NTP) and Substantial Completion Dates. Scheduling. a. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. b. Owner's requirements and occupancy. C. Temporary utilities provided by Owner. d. Security and housekeeping procedures. e. Construction progress meetings. f. Procedures for maintaining record documents. g. Requirements for start-up of equipment. h. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. D. Architect shall record minutes and distribute copies to participants. 1.5 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION A. Contractor shall use Architect's standard form when submitting Requests For Information (RFI). Architect will issue a copy of this form to Contractor in both hard copy and electronic media. Only Contractor can submit RFIs to Architect. RFI requests from subcontractors or material suppliers will not be considered. B. All information indicated on the form to be provided by Contractor shall be complete before a request can be submitted to the Architect's office. Requests with incomplete information will be returned to the Contractor. Submission of a complete RFI request by Contractor does not t- constitute an RFI until Architect makes the determination. If Architect determines that request cannot be answered with the information provided in the Contract Documents, Architect will l then assign an RFI tracking number. Requests determined by Architect not to be an RFI will be returned to Contractor without being assigned an RFI tracking number. A transmittal document returning the denied RFI request will be provided with a response indicating action to be taken by Contractor. C. If request and proposed solution cannot fit on the form, an attachment may be identified in the Request or Contractor Proposed Solution areas, then attached to the form and submitted to Architect. RFIs may contain more than one item when the items are related issues. Otherwise, only one item shall be addressed on each RFI request. 03878709 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 2 09/10 m D. Architect's response to the RFI will be in writing on the same form, or by attachmentand issued to Contractor and Owner. E. Responses from Architect will not change any requirement of the Contract Documents. Should Contractor believe an RFI response to cause a change to the Contract, Contractor shall give written notice to Architect in accordance with the requirements in the Contract. Written notice shall include specific reasons and an order of magnitude of Cost and/or Time that Contractor deems appropriate based on the Architect's RFI response. Contractor's written notice does not constitute a Change Order, but provide a basis for further review and discussion with the Architect. 1.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Architect shall schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at minimum bi-monthly intervals. B. Architect will make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, ° preside at meetings. C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, and Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off -site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to Work. -E� E. Record minutes, and distribute copies within three days to Architect, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 1.7 PREINSTALLATION MEETING A. When required in individual specification Sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at work site prior to commencing work of the Section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific Section. C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting. 1. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Record minutes, and distribute copies within three days after meeting to participants, with three copies to Architect. 03878709 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 09/ 10 01300 - 3 �s PART 2 - PRODUCTS _ 2.1 EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Motors: Specific motor type is specified in individual specification sections. B. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Size terminal lugs to NFPA 70, include lugs for terminal box. C. Cord and Plug: Provide minimum 6 foot cord and plug including grounding connector for connection to electric wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual specification sections. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. `- Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural attachment of new Work being applied or i attached. A C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correcti location. 3.2 PREPARATION El A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. PP g B. Sea] cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply any manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING l` J A. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching. B. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements which affects: �J 1. Structural integrity of element. 2. Integrity of weather -exposed or moisture -resistant elements. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element. 4. Visual qualities of sight -exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. C. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete Work, and to: 1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work. 2. Uncover Work to install or correct ill-timed Work. 3. Remove and replace defective and non -conforming Work.-1 4. Remove samples of installed Work for testing. 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work. D. Execute work by methods which will avoid damage to other Work, and provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. E. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. g 03878709 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 4 09/10 r- ` F. Restore Work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. H. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids. I. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. J. Identify any hazardous substance or condition exposed during the Work to the Architect for .' decision or remedy. 3.4 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES A. Materials: As specified in product Sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. B. Employ skilled and experience installer to perform cutting and patching. C. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. D. Remove, cut, and patch work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide a means of restoring products and finishes to original condition unless otherwise specified. E. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. F. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. Patched work to match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance. G. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and submit recommendation to Architect for review. H. Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs, submit recommendation for providing a smooth transition for Architect review. - I. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections. J. Finish surfaces as specified in individual product Sections. END OF SECTION 03878709 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 09/I 0 01300 - 5 (( PARKHILLS; s &COOPER RFITO: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. FROM: [No.] PROJECT NAME: City of Lubbock Civic Center Physical Plant (assigned by PSC) PROJECT NO.: 03878709 DATE: T 'Items to be completed by Contractor before submittal to PSC for review. *Specification Section/Paragraph No.: *Request: *Contractor Proposed Solution: l; *Signed by: ❑ No RFI tracking number assigned Response: L_ ❑ Attachments: Date Rec'd: Signed by: Copies: ❑ Owner Amarillo El Paso t Las Cruces Lubbock Midland *Drawing Reference/Detail No.: Date Ret'd: ❑ Consultants ❑ *Response needed in X days XA2000787.MC LE R{CALISpecs18787-01300.dac 4222 85th Street Lubbock, Texas 79423 806.473.2200 Fax 806.473.3500 0 0 SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittal procedures. B. Construction progress schedules. C. Shop drawings. D. Product data. E. Samples. F. Design data. G. Test reports. H. Certificates. 1. Manufacturers' instructions. J. Manufacturers' field reports. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01200 - Price and Payment: Schedule of Values. B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Manufacturers' field services and reports; Testing Laboratory Services. C. Section 01700 -Execution Requirements: Contract Closeout: Contract warranty, manufacturer's certificates and closeout submittals. 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Submit to Architect for review for limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. B. Produce copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article and for record documents purposes described in Section 01700. C. Transmit each submittal separately with Contractor's standard transmittal letter including Contractor's name, address and phone number. Each submittal shall contain only one specification section. D. Sequentially number transmittal forms using Section number or Contractors other sequential numbering system. E. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing sheet and detail number(s), and specification Section number, appropriate to submittal. F. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. 03878709 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 1 09/10 G. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Architect at business address. k__a Coordinate submission of related items. H. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Ti Contractor. r I. Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of completed Work. J. Allow space on submittals for Contractor and Architect review stamps. K. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions.- L. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. M. Format 1. Submit all submittals digitally using .PDF file extension. Each submittal shall be a single .PDF file including transmittal letter. Multiple files for the same submittal will not be i accepted. 2. Submittals in any other format, including .ZIP files, will be rejected. 3. Hard copies will not be accepted. 4. To ensure each page is legible, .PDF pages of drawings shall be the same size/scale as a hard copy. Where applicable, scale symbols should be provided to indicate scale. Illegible submittals will be rejected. 5. Submittals will be uploaded to Architect's Info Exchange website. N. The submittal procedures described in this Article applies to the Construction Progress Schedule, Products List, Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples (actual samples to be submitted, not digital files), Design Data, Test Reports, Certificates, Manufacturer's Instructions and Field Reports, Erection Drawings and any other type of submittal submitted to Architect. 1.5 RESUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Revise and resubmit submittals, as required, and resubmit to meet requirements as specified and as noted on submittal reviews. B. Mark as RESUBMITTAL. C. Re -use original transmittal number and supplement with sequential alphabetical or numeric suffix for each re -submittal. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES A. Submit initial progress schedule for Architect's review within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. B. Revise and resubmit as required. C. Submit revised schedule with each Application for Payment, identifying changes since previous version. 1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and L location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. B. Printable Image Size: Minimum 8 '/2 x 11 inches and maximum 30 x 42 inches. C. Draw details to a minimum scale of 1/2 inches equal to 1 foot. D. Draw site plans to same scale indicated on contract drawings. E. Draw all other plans to a minimum scale of 1/8 inch equal to 1 foot. 03878709 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 2 09/10 i F. Construction Documents (electronic or paper format) issued by the Architect cannot be used in any shape, form or fashion in the creation and development of shop drawings, except that electronic files containing floor plans or site plans which have been purchased from the Architect may be used as "backgrounds" for Contractor, subcontractors, sub -subcontractors and material suppliers in the Shop Drawing process. G. Electronic Files 1. Electronic drawing files are available for purchase from the Architect upon request. Cost of the files are indicated below plus applicable taxes. 0 — 3 sheets $100.00 per sheet 4 — 6 sheets $400.00 flat fee 7 — 9 sheets $500.00 flat fee Only the Contractor or his subcontractors and sub -subcontractors may purchase an electronic file. An electronic file will be provided in AUTOCAD format of the release currently used by the Architect. File will be provided via Architect's Info Exchange website. Prior to delivery of the file, purchaser shall sign an Electronic File Transfer Release Form. Payment for an electronic file shall occur upon delivery of file to purchaser. Electronic file shall be used only for the production of information required by this project and shall not be used in any other form (in whole or part). In the creation and publication of Shop Drawings, under no circumstances shall the Design Professional's seal or title block of the drawing be reproduced. All shop drawings must be original works from the Contractor subcontractors, sub -subcontractors and material suppliers. 1.8 PRODUCT DATA A. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project. B. Include recommendations for application and use, and reference to compliance with specified standards of trade associations and testing agencies. C. Include notation of special coordination requirements for interfacing with adjacent work and building utilities where applicable. D. After review, distribute in accordance with Article titled SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES above and provide copies for Record Documents described in Section 01700 — Execution Requirements. I.9 SAMPLES A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. B. Unless otherwise specified, submit samples of finishes from manufacturers' full range of standard colors,_ textures, and patterns, for Architect's selection. C. Where variations in color, pattern or texture are inherent in the material or product, submit multiple samples to indicate the approximate range or variations. D. Include full Project information and identification of manufacturer, model number, type, style and color on each sample. E. Submit the number of samples specified in individual specification Sections; one of which will be retained by Architect. 03878709 09/10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 3 F. Reviewed samples which may remain as part of the Work are indicated in individual specification Sections. G. Samples will not be used for testing purposes unless specifically stated in individual specification section. 1.10 DESIGN DATA A. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. B. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. 1.11 TEST REPORTS A. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. B. Submit test reports for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. 1.12 CERTIFICATES A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by manufacturer, installation/application subcontractor, or Contractor to Architect. B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Architect. 1.13 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit manufacturers' printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing. B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents. C. Indicate special procedures, conditions requiring special attention and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. 1.14 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD REPORTS A. Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. B. Submit report within 30 days of observation to Architect for information. C. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used C1\ I 03878709 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 4 09/ 10 PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used 03878709 09/10 END OF SECTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-5 I f: SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality control and control of installation. B. Tolerances. C. References. D. Mock-up requirements. E. Testing and Inspection services. F. Manufacturers' field services. G. Examination H. Preparation 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submission of Manufacturers' Instructions and Certificates. B. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Starting of Systems. 1.4 QUALITY CONTROL AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. F. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings or as instructed by manufacturer. G. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement. 03878709 09110 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 1 1.5 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers'tolerances. Should manufacturers'tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing in place. 1.6 REFERENCES A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by Code. C. Obtain copy of standards when required by specification section. D. Neither contractual relationship, duties nor responsibilities of parties in Contract nor those of the Architect shall be altered from Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.7 MOCK-UP REQUIREMENTS A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections. B. Assemble and erect specified items, with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. C. Accepted mock-ups shall be comparison standard for quality level for the Work. D. Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect and is specified in individual specification sections to be removed, remove mock-up and clear area. 1.8 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES A. Owner will appoint, employ, and pay for specified services of an independent firm to perform inspection and testing. B. The independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and other services specified in individual specification Sections and as required by the Architect or the Owner. C. Testing, inspections and source quality control may occur on or off project site. Perform off -site testing as required by Architect or Owner. D. Independent Testing Laboratory firm's reports will be submitted to the Architect, with a copy to the Contractor. Reports will indicate observations and results of tests and will indicate compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. E. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage, provide safe access to project site, and provide assistance by incidental labor as requested. 1. Notify Owner, Architect and independent firm 48 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. 2. Pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's use. F. Employment of independent testing agency or laboratory does not relieve Contractor from performing Work to contract requirements. 03878709 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 2 09/10 G. Re -testing and/or re -inspection required because -of non-conformance to specified requirements will be charged to the Contractor by deducting re -testing and/or re -inspection charges from the Contract Sum/Price. 1.9 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, and start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. ....; B. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect 30 days in advance of required observations. Observer subject to approval of Architect. C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. D. Refer to Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures, Manufacturers' Field Reports article. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new Work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Verify utility services are available, of correct characteristics, and in correct locations. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying new material or substance in contact or bond. END OF SECTION 03878709 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 3 09/10 SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary Utilities. B. Temporary Controls. C. Construction Facilities. D. Removal of utilities, facilities, and controls. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Final Cleaning 1.4 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Connect to existing power service. Power consumption shall not disrupt Owner's need for continuous service. B. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy. C. Power Service Characteristics: As indicated on drawings. D. Provide flexible power cords as required. E. Provide main temporary service disconnect and overcurrent protection at convenient location in conformance with National Electric Code. F. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction. G. Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch circuits for power and lighting. 1. Provide 20 ampere duplex outlets, single phase circuits for power tools for every 2000 sq ft of active work area and at specific locations as required. 2. Provide 20 ampere, single phase branch circuits for lighting. 1.5 TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES A. Existing building lighting maybe utilized during construction. Owner will maintain lighting and pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy. B. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required. C. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. ` 03878709 09/10 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 01500 - 1 1� i 1.6 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Utilize Owner's existing heat plant, extend and supplement with Contractor provided temporary heat devices as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. B. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy. C. Enclose building prior to activating temporary heat in accordance with Exterior Enclosure Article in this Section. D. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify that installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts. E. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications. 1.7 TEMPORARY COOLING A. Utilize Owner's existing cooling plant, extend and supplement with Contractor provided temporary cooling devices as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. B. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy. C. Enclose building prior to activating temporary cooling in accordance with Enclosures article in this section. D. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary cooling purposes, verify installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts. E. Maintain maximum ambient temperature of 80 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications. 1.8 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. B. Provide temporary fan units as required to maintain clean air for construction operations. C. Owner will pay cost of energy used. -Exercise measures to conserve energy. 1.9 TEMPORARY COMMUNICATION SERVICES A. Provide, maintain and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization. B. Owner's communication systems shall not be used. C. As a minimum, provide cellular mobile telephone service for the on -site superintendent and home office telephone service. 1.10 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Connect to existing water source for construction operations. Extend and supplement with temporary devices as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. B. Owner will pay cost of water used. Exercise measures to conserve water. L 03878709 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 01500 - 2 09/10 Y` 1.11 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Existing facilities shall not be used. 1.12 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS A. Existing spaces may be used for field offices as designated by Owner. B. Storage Areas And Sheds 1. Size storage to requirements for products of individual Sections, allowing for access and orderly provision for maintenance and for inspection of products. _y 2. Fire Extinguishers: Appropriate type fire extinguisher at each storage area. 3. Interior Materials in Storage Sheds: As required to provide specified environmental conditions for storage of products. 4. Heating and Ventilation: As required to maintain products in accordance with Contract Documents 5. Lighting: As required for maintenance and inspection of products. C. Preparation: Fill and grade sites for temporary structures sloped for drainage away from buildings. D. Maintenance And Cleaning: 1. Daily janitorial services for offices; periodic cleaning and maintenance for office and storage areas. 2. Maintain approach walks free of mud, water, and snow. E. Removal: At completion of Work remove buildings, foundations, utility services, and debris. Restore areas. 1.13 EMPLOYEE RESIDENTIAL OCCUPANCY A. Not allowed on Owner's property. �- 1.14 PARKING A. Locate as approved by Owner. B. Permanent Pavements And Parking Facilities: 1. Avoid traffic loading beyond paving design capacity. Tracked vehicles not allowed. C. Maintenance: 1. Maintain traffic and parking areas in sound condition free of excavated material, construction equipment, products, mud, snow, and ice. 2. Maintain existing and permanent paved areas used for construction; promptly repair s.a breaks, potholes, low areas, standing water, and other deficiencies, to maintain paving and drainage in original, or specified, condition. D. Removal, Repair: 1. Repair existing facilities damaged by use, to original condition. 1.15 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. 03878709 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 01500 - 3 f - 09/10 C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site and dispose off -site at intervals as required to maintain clean site. 1.16 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION r A. Project Identification Sign: Coordinate with Architect and Owner. 1.17 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B. Provide protection for trees shrubbery and lawns designated to remain. Replace damaged trees shrubbery and lawns to original condition. C. Protect site improvements including but not limited to pavements, walkways and drainage structures from damage. Replace damaged site improvements to original condition. D. Protect non -owned vehicular traffic and stored materials from damage. 1.18 TEMPORARY FENCING A. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence. 1.19 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification Sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage. C. Provide protective coverings at openings in walls, roof, and soffits. D. Protect finished walkways, drives, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03878709 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 09/ 10 01500 - 4 SECTION 01650 STARTING OF SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Starting systems. B. Demonstration and instructions. C. Testing, adjusting, and balancing. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturers field reports. B. Section 01700 — Execution Requirements: System operation and maintenance data and extra materials. C. Division 15 - Testing Adjusting and Balancing. 1.4 STARTING SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Architect seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage. D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible manufacturer's representative and Contractors' personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01400 that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 1.5 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of final inspection. B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season. C. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. 03878709 09/10 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 01650 - 1 D. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed -upon times, at equipment location. E. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. PART2-PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03878709 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 01650 - 2 09/ 10 SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Closeout procedures. B. Final cleaning. C. Starting of systems. D. Demonstration and instructions. E. Testing, adjusting and balancing. F. Protecting installed construction. G. Hazardous materials affidavits. H. Project record documents. I. Operation and maintenance data. J. Manual for materials and finishes. K. Manual for equipment and systems. L. Spare parts and maintenance products. M. Product warranties and product bonds. N. Maintenance service. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 15 Section - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing: Testing, Adjusting and Balancing services. 1.4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Arch itect/Engineer's review. B. Provide submittals to Architect required by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. D. Owner will occupy all of building as specified in Section 01100. 1.5 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment. B. Clean equipment and fixtures to sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to surface and material being cleaned. C. Replace filters of operating equipment. D. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. 03878709 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 1 09/ 10 E. Clean -site; -sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. F. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from site. 1.6 STARTING OF SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Architect, Engineer, and Owner seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions which may cause damage. D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable manufacturer's representative in _ accordance with manufacturers' instructions. 1 G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01330 that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 1.7 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior " to date of Substantial Completion. B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months. C. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. D. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, troubleshooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time and at designated cj] location. E. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. F. Required instruction time for each item of equipment and system is specified in individual sections. 1.8 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING A. Testing, adjusting and balancing will be performed in accordance with requirements specified in Division 15 Section —Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. B. Reports will be submitted by independent firm to Engineer indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with requirements of Contract Documents. 11 03878709 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 2 09/10 1.9 PROTECTING INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. 1 ' B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. C. V Pn Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. When traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. jF. }. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. t 1.10 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS AFFIDAVITS ;�.... ` A. Contractor, each subcontractor, each sub -subcontractor, and each material/product supplier to provide a notarized affidavit declaring that hazardous materials were not incorporated into construction of or delivered to the Project. B. Hazardous materials include asbestos, lead polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), prohibited termite eradication chemicals or any substance of any proportion determined or suspected by an agency of federal or state government to create a health hazard. C. Provide table of contents listing all affidavits in alphabetical order and assemble with metal prong binder in durable plastic presentation cover. D. Prepare binder cover with printed title "AFFIDAVITS OF NON -INCORPORATED HAZARDOUS MATERIALS", Title of Project, Project Address, Owner's Name, Address and Phone and date of Construction Completion. E. Provide two complete, identical binders of the aforementioned information in the prescribed format. F. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. f 1.11 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 6. Complete set of MSDS sheets for all materials. 7. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. ;.9 B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress, not less than weekly. E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. . 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. E 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. 03878709 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 3 09/ 10 F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: l . Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract drawings. G. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) 1. Comply with the most current requirements of the Department of State Health Services, Texas Asbestos Health Protection Rules (TAHPR), Title 25., HEALTH SERVICES, Part I, Chapter 29 5 -Occupational Health, § 295.34-Asbestos Management in Facilities and Public Buildings, paragraph (i) as a minimum and as outlinedbelow. 2. Submit MSDS on all products used in construction of Project. 3. Submit MSDS in 8 1/2x l l inch format text pages, bound in three D-ring binders '' ' with durable plastic covers. 4. Prepare binder cover with printed title "MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS (MSDS)", Title of Project, Project Address, Owner's Name, Address and Phone, and Date of Construction Completion. 5. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, organized into the 16 Division CSI format, with tab title clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. 6. Prepare a table of contents, listing each of the 16 Divisions headings and listing each material/product under each heading by manufacturer and material/product name. t 7. Submit two complete, identical binders of the aforementioned information and in the prescribed format. 8. Submit binders with Application for final Payment. Binders shall include all MSDS for materials/products delivered or installed in Project. 9. Failure to submit updated MSDS binders will cause Application for Payment to be r_ held by Architect (not submitted to Owner for processing) until such time updated MSDS binders are received and reviewed for compliance by Architect. H. Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. 1.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit data bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch (A4) text pages, three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers. B. Prepare binder cover with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. C. Internally subdivide binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. D. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. 1 03878709 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 4 09/ 10 E. Contents: Prepare Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description identified, typed on white paper, in three parts as follows: 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. C. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. 3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a. Shop drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. C. Certificates. d. Originals of warranties and bonds. 1.13 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect/Engineer will review draft and return one copy with comments. B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. C. Submit one copy of completed volumes 15 days prior to final inspection. Draft copy be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of document sets as required prior to final submission. D. Submit two sets of revised final volumes in final form within 10 days after final inspection. E. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. Include information for re -ordering custom manufactured products. F. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. G. Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products: Include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Include recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair. H. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. I. Include listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data. 1.14 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before 1 start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments. B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. 03878709 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 5 09/10 C. Submit one copy of completed volumes 15 days prior to final inspection. Draft copy be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of document sets as required prior to final submission. D. Submit two sets of revised final volumes in final form within 10 days after final inspection. 3 E. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of unit or system, and component parts. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. F. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and , communications; typed. G. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed. H. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency a instructions. Include summer, winter, and special operating instructions. 3 I. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and P alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. J. Include servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. K. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. L. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. M. Include original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. N. Include control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. O. Include Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams as installed. P. Include charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. Q. Include list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. R. Include test and balancing reports as specified in Section 01400. S. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. T. Include listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed dividers and space for insertion of data. 1.15 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Furnish spare parts, maintenance, and extra products in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to and place in location as directed by Owner; obtain receipt prior to final payment. 1.16 PRODUCT WARRANTIES AND PRODUCT BONDS A. B. C. D. E. F. Obtain warranties and bonds executed in duplicate by responsible subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of applicable item of work. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents and bonds from subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. Verify documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. Co -execute submittals when required. Include Table of Contents and assemble in three D side ring binder with durable plastic cover. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. a_1 03878709 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 6 09/10 I a Time Of Submittals: l . For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within ten days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as beginning of warranty or bond period. 1.17 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections from date of Substantial Completion during warranty period. B. Examine system components at frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required. C. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by manufacturer of original component. D. Do not assign or transfer maintenance service to agent or Subcontractor without prior written consent of Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03878709 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 09/10 01700 - 7 SECTION 02072 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Construction of temporary barriers. B. Removal of designated building equipment and fixtures. C. Removal of designated construction. D. Disposal of materials. E. Salvage of removed materials. Refer to items as indicated on drawings. F. Storage of removed materials. Refer to items as indicated on drawings. G. Identification of utilities. 1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 01330 — Submittal Procedures. B. Submit proposed location for dumpster or other demolition material container(s). C. Submit proposed route for movement of demolition materials within the existing building. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT A. Section 01700 — Execution Requirments: Procedures for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities and subsurface obstructions. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for demolition work, dust control, products requiring electrical disconnection and reconnection. B. Obtain required permits from authorities. C. Do not close or obstruct egress width to any building or site exit. D. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without 5 days prior written notice to Owner. E. Conform to procedures applicable when hazardous or contaminated materials are discovered. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Remove only existing roofing materials being replaced with new materials same day C. Coordinate Work with other affected mechanical and electrical work associated with roof penetrations. 03878709 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02072 - 1 09/10 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas. B. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger and notify Architect. Do not resume operations until directed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Provide, erect, -and maintain temporary barriers at locations coordinated with Owner. B. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings. C. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odors, and noise to permit continued Owner occupancy. D. Where interior demolition occurs immediately adjacent to occupied portions of the building, construct dust -proof partitions of minimum nominal 4-inch studs, 5/8-inch drywall (joints taped) on occupied side, 1/2-inch fire -retardant plywood on demolition side. Fill partition cavity with sound -deadening insulation full thickness of partition depth. E. Protect existing materials, equipment and finishes which are not to be demolished. F. Provide protective covers over existing carpet, vinyl composition flooring and stairs including floor finish in elevator. G. Provide elevator manufacturer's standard protective padding on elevator walls. H. Provide temporary protective corner protection at all outside corners along route for removal of refuse. 1. Do not store nor pile demolition materials or equipment on any part of the structure in a manner that would cause permanent damage. J. Prevent movement of structure; provide bracing and shoring. K. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. L. Mark location and termination of utilities. Provide bypass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas of building. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Architect if shutdown of service is necessary during changeover. M. Provide appropriate temporary signage including signage for exit or building egress. N. Set refuse containers at location approved by Owner. O. Environmental Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other methods to limit dust and dirt migration. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. P. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, and pollution. J 03878709 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02072 - 2 09/ 10 t 3.2 3.3 DEMOLITION A. General 1. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting structural members. 2. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris to avoid imposing excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. a. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Maintain fire protection services during demolition operations. B. Hazardous Materials 1. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling, and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. C. Flame Cutting 1. Do not use cutting torches for removal until work area is cleared of flammable materials. 2. At concealed spaces, such as interior of ducts and pipe spaces, verify condition of hidden space before starting flame -cutting operations. 3. Maintain portable fire suppression devices during flame -cutting operations. D. Utilities and Equipment 1. Disconnect and identify designated utilities within demolition areas. E. Concrete, Plaster and Masonry Material Demolition 1. Saw cut masonry materials with power operated saws designed specifically for this purpose. 2. Cut plaster at junctures with construction to remain using power -driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power -driven impact tools. 3. Demolish plaster in small sections. F. Roofing 1. Remove metal counter flashings. 2. Scrape roofing gravel from membrane surface. 3. Remove roofing membrane, perimeter base flashings, flashings around roof protrusions, pitch pans and pockets, insulation vents, and gutters and downspouts. 4. Remove insulation, fasteners, cant strips and blocking. 5. Remove underlay. 6. Remove damaged deck materials. 7. Repair existing deck surface to provide smooth working surface for new roof system. G. Mechanical and Electrical Equipment 1. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the conflict. 2. Submit report to Architect in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from Architect, rearrange demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without undue delay. DISPOSAL A. Coordinate route for movement of refuse within the existing building with the Owner to create the least amount of interference with Owner's continuing occupancy and operations. B. Remove demolished materials from site except where specifically noted otherwise. C. Do not burn or bury materials on site. 03878709 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 09/10 02072 - 3 D. Storage or sale -of removed items on site will not be permitted. E. Remove materials as Work progresses. 3.4 SALVAGED MATERIALS A. Salvaged Items: 1. Carefully remove, clean, and deliver to Owner at location as directed by the Owner, the salvaged items. 2. Carefully remove, clean, store and protect for re -use the items indicated in the schedule at the end of this Section. 3.5 CLEANUP A. Repair damaged pavement and landscaping under refuse containers and return to original condition. B. Repair existing finishes to remain, which are damaged during demolition, to match adjacent finishes. C. Shampoo all soiled carpet along the refuse removal route. Repair or replace carpet along the refuse removal route which has been damaged. Make repairs to satisfaction of Owner. D. Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment, and demolished materials from site. E. Remove protections and leave exterior areas broom clean. F. Remove temporary Work. G. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to start operations. H. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by demolition work. END OF SECTION 03878709 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02072 - 4 09/10 SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparing subgrades for slabs -on -grade and walks. B. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary controls, utilities, and support facilities. B. Divisions 2, 15, and 16 Sections for installing underground mechanical and electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical structures. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low -strength material used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off -site for use as fill or backfill. C. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. 1. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. D. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. E. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. F. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. G. Utilities: On -site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. H. Topsoil: Natural, friable surface soil possessing the characteristics of representative soils on the site that produce growths of grass or other vegetation. Topsoil growths includes grasses and other vegetation. I. Subgrade: Consists of that portion of the surface on which a compacted earth fill or embankment is constructed. 03878709 09/ 10 EARTHWORK 02300 - 1 1_ J. Compacted_ Earth Fill or Embankment: Earth fill placed and compacted between the top of existing grades and finish grade. K. Finish Grading: Operations required for smoothing disturbed areas that are not overlaid with pavement. 1.5 SUBMITTALS -� A. Product Data: For the following: B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on -site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on -site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. g I . Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. 3. Contact utility -locator service for area where Project is located before excavating. B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. 1.7 PROTECTION A. Protect vegetation and other features not required to be removed. B. Protect benchmarks, structures, fences, roads, and paving. C. Notify the Owner of unexpected subsurface conditions. D. Where damage could result from continuing work, discontinue work in area until Owner` notifies the Contractor of the require modifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. Remove any excess soil and/or grubbing material from the site and lawfully dispose of. B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GC, GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, SC, CL and SM, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. Satisfactory soils shall have a liquid limit not exceeding 35 and shall have a plasticity index between 7 and 15. Satisfactory soil shall have a maximum aggregate size of 3 inches with 25-50 percent retained on No. 4 sieve and 50-85 percent retained on No. 40 sieve. 03878709 EARTHWORK 02300 - 2 09/ 10 C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups ML, OL, CH,_MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups. 1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. D. Granular Fill: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 448; coarse -aggregate size 89; with 100 percent passing a''/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 50 sieve. E. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand. 2.2 EQUIPMENT Use equipment that is required to complete this project. A. Excavating Equipment: Furnish, operate and maintain such equipment as is necessary to excavate to the depth, lines and grades as indicated on the Contract Drawings. B. Grading Equipment: Furnish, operate and maintain such equipment as is necessary to produce uniform layers, section and smoothnessofgrade for compaction and drainage. C. Furnish, operate and maintain equipment for compaction of earth fills or embankments. D. Miscellaneous Equipment: Scarifiers, disks, spring tooth or spike tooth harrows, earth hauling equipment, and other equipment must be suitable for removal of material from the excavation and construction of fills or embankments. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 2 Section "Site Clearing." C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 2 Section "Site Clearing," during earthwork operations. 3.2 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 03878709 EARTHWORK 02300 - 3 09/10 3.3 EXCAVATION, GENERAL A. Objective: As shown on the drawings, excavate to lines, grades and elevations. B. Drainage: During excavation maintain grades for complete drainage. C. Stockpiling: Stockpile excavated material in areas approved. Height and location of D. stockpile and spoil pile shall be directed by Owner. Dressing: Uniformly dress cut and fill slopes to grades, cross section and alignment, as shown. E. Stripping of Ground Surface: All vegetation, all decayed vegetable matter, rubbish and other unsuitable material within the areas to be graded, not removed by clearing, shall be stripped or otherwise removed to ground level before grading or other earthwork is started. In no case will such material be allowed to remain in or on the areas to be graded. F. Excavation: After all necessary stripping has been done, excavation of every description and of whatever substances encountered within the grading limits of the project shall be performed to the lines and grades indicated on the drawings. G. NO ALLOWANCE WILL BE GIVEN FOR ROCK. *' H. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the.a Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions. 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. 3.4 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Ground surface on which fill is to be placed shall be stripped of live, dead, or decayed vegetation, rubbish, debris and other unsatisfactory material. Remove 6 inches of material from the surface. B. Stripped ground surface shall be plowed, disced, or otherwise broken up; pulverized; moistened or aerated as necessary; thoroughly mixed; and compacted to at least 95 percent laboratory maximum density in accordance with ASTM D-698. C. The prepared ground surface shall be scarified and moistened or aerated as required just prior to placement of fill or embankment materials to assure adequate bond between fill or embankment material and the prepared ground surface. D. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus l inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 3.5 SUBGRADE INSPECTION A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade. B. Proof -roll subgrade below the building slabs and 5' beyond building footprint with heavy pneumatic -tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof -roll wet or saturated subgrades. 1. Completely proof -roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof -rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. 1 03878709 EARTHWORK 02300 - 4 09/10 11 2. Proof -roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem -axle dump truck weighing not less_ than 15 tons. 3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed. C. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation. 3.6 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Architect. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect. 3.7 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS I I A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.8 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.9 SOIL FILL A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. Under building slabs, satisfactory soil material. 2. Under footings and foundations, satisfactory soil material. C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. D. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. E. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. F. Under steps and ramps, use satisfactory soil material. 03878709 09/10 EARTHWORK 02300 - 5 3.10 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. 3.11 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C'' C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit ` J weight according to ASTM D 698: 1. Under structures, building slabs and steps; remove top 6 inches of existing subgrade, scarify and recompact subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact p each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent. 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent. 4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85 percent. 3.12 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations 4•..--' indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. C. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality -control testing. B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply.- with requirements. 03878709 EARTHWORK 02300 - 6 09/ 10 i i_ C. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1. Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1 test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than 3 tests. 2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests. D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.14 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. r Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. I. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 3.15 DISTRIBUTION OF TOPSOIL A. Preparation: 1. Prior to placing topsoil, scarify the fill areas to a depth of 2 inches to provide effective bonding of the topsoil with the fill. 2. Shape all areas including cut and fill areas, to receive a minimum of 6 inches of topsoil B. Placement: 1. Do not haul or place wet topsoil. Also prohibited is placement of topsoil on a subgrade that is excessively wet, extremely dry, or in a condition otherwise .g detrimental to proper grading or proposed planting. 2. Distribute topsoil uniformly and spread evenly to an average thickness of 6 inches. Lightly compact topsoil. Correct irregularities in the surface to prevent formation of depressions where water could stand. 3. Perform the spreading operation so that planting can proceed with little additional tillage or soil preparation. Leave the area smooth. C. Maintenance: Where any portion of the surface becomes eroded or otherwise damaged, repair the affected area to establish the condition and grade prior to topsoil placement; then replace topsoil. D. The Contractor shall notify Engineer 24 hours in advance prior to placement of topsoil. 03878709 EARTHWORK 02300 - 7 09/10 3.16 OVEREXCAVATION Areas of the excavation that are excavated to elevations below those specified on the plans shall be backfilled and compacted as specified for embankment fill. 3.17 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 03878709 EARTHWORK 02300 - 8 09/ 10 SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section specifies cast -in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02300 - Earthwork. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast -furnace slag, and silica fume. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. 1. Reinforcement accessories. 2. Admixtures. _. 3. Curing materials. 4. Adhesives. -5. Repair materials. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant -g adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared according to ACI315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3 A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. 03878709 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 1 09/ 10 B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association's Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the " testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. I. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-I or an equivalent certification program. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the same manufacturer. i E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated: 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete." 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1. Prior to placing any concrete, hold a pre -installation conference meeting involving the Superintendent, Architect, applicable subcontractors, and testing lab. The meeting will include the following subjects (minimum): a. Site Preparation. b. Grades and drainage. C. Installation of auxiliary materials (vapor retarders, ducts, etc.). d. Reinforcement and placement. e. Joints. f. Flatness and levelness. g. Concrete materials, production, placement and delivery. h. Compaction of soil. i. Finishing tools and finishing. fr j. Curing/Sealing/hardeners: type and timing/duration of application. k. Testing and inspection. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. 1. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement. 2. Repair damaged epoxy coatings on steel reinforcement according to ASTM D 3963 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM -FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth -Formed Finished Concrete: Form -facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of L joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. B. Rough -Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, earth, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. 03878709 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 2 09/ 10 C. Chamfer_ Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum. D. Form -Release Agent: Commercially formulated form -release agent that will not bond with, .� stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form -release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form -facing materials. E. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, removable or snap -off metal or glass -fiber -reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of the exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface. 3. Furnish ties with integral water -barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. B. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184, assembled with clips. 1. Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed bars. C. Plain -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. D. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into ., flat sheets. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, and spacers for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber -reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic -protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless -steel bar supports. 2. Plastic, wood, concrete or clay blocks and other devices are not permissible. B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain -steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. C. Joint Dowel System: Diamond dowel system from PNA Construction Technologies, Speed Plate from Green Streak Group, Inc. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1/II. 1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C. -s B. Normal -Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, and as follows: 1. Class: Moderate weathering region, but not less than 3M. 2. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 inch. 3. Combined Aggregate Gradation: Well graded from coarsest to finest with not more than 18 percent and not less than 8 percent retained on an individual sieve, except that less than 8 percent may be retained on coarsest sieve and on No. 50 sieve, and less than 8 percent may be retained on sieves finer than No. 50. C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94. 03878709 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 3 09/ 10 i 1 2.5 ADMIXTURES A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. B. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. C. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. D. High -Range, Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F. E. Water -Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E. F. Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 2.6 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. Dayton Superior — Sure Film J-74 or equal. B. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap -polyethylene sheet. C. Water: Potable. D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. 2.7 RELATED MATERIALS A. Joint -Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosic fiber. B. Epoxy Joint Filler: Two -component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Shore A hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240. s C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. D. Epoxy -Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two -component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements, and as follows: 1. Type 1I, non -load bearing, for bonding freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. 2. Types I and II, non -load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. 3. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.-- E. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.0217-inch- thick galvanized steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. F. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot -dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 0.0336 inch thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. 2.8 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 03878709 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 4 09/ 10 re, 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well -graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. ' 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109. B. Repair Topping: Traffic -bearing, cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling product - !! that can be applied in thicknesses from 1 /4 inch. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic ' cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well -graded, washed gravel, 1 /8 to l /4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5700 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.9 CONCRETE MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows: 1. Proportion normal -weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301. B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the laboratory trial mix basis. C. Footings and Drilled Piers: Proportion normal -weight concrete mix as follows: l . Minimum Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi. 2. Minimum Slump: 3 inches. 3. Maximum Slump: 5 inches. 4. Maximum Slump for Concrete Containing High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture: 8 inches after admixture is added to concrete with 2- to 4-inch slump. 5. Maximum water—cementitious material ratio:.55. r D. Cementitious Materials: For concrete exposed to deicers, limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements. E. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: l . Fly Ash: 20 percent. F. Air Content: Add air -entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus 1 or minus 1.5 percent, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Air Content: 5.5 percent for 1-1/2-inch- nominal maximum aggregate size. 2. Air Content: 6 percent for 1-inch- nominal maximum aggregate size. 3. Air Content: 6 percent for 3/4-inch- nominal maximum aggregate size. G. Do not air entrain concrete to trowel -finished interior floors and suspended slabs. Do not allow entrapped air content to exceed 3 percent. H. Admixtures with chloride -ions are prohibited. I. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water -reducing admixture or high -range water -reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water -reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 03878709 CASTJN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 5 _ , 09/10 3. Use water -reducing admixture_in_pumped concrete, concrete for heavy -use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. f 2.10 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.11 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 degF, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI H 7. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class B, 1 /4 inch. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 1. Do not use rust -stained steel form -facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike -off templates or compacting -type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form -release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. [ 03878709 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 6 09/ 10 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast -in -place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. l . Install anchor bolts, accurately located, to elevations required. 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form -removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Leave formwork, for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved the following: 1. 28-day design compressive strength. 2. At least 70 percent of 28-day design compressive strength. 3. Determine compressive strength of in -place concrete by testing representative field - or laboratory -cured test specimens according to ACI 301. 4. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form -facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form -release agent. D. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.4 SHORES AND RESHORES A. Comply with ACI318, ACI301, and recommendations in ACI347R for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring. B. In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will induce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement. C. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection. 3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 03878709 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 7 09/10 _ t E. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable_ lengths on bar supports spacer] to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. F. All reinforcement to be in place prior to placing of concrete. Equipment will not be allowed to drive over reinforcement. 3.6 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. I. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway -section forms, or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least I-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. 4. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 5. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at joints where indicated. 1. Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt -coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Before placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high -range water -reducing admixtures to mix. 2. Do not add water to concrete beyond the limit of water withheld from the plant. C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. D. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic, to avoid cold joints. I. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309R. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of 03878709 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 8 09/10 1 m." vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix constituents to segregate. E. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. 4. Cold -weather concrete water-cementitous material ratio must meet concrete mix and usage requirements without exceeding fly ash percentage by weight provided in Section 2.10. F. Hot -Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows, when hot -weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water -soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified. B. Smooth -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material, -~ arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1 /8 inch in height. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, or painting. 2. Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth -formed finish. C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth -formed finished concrete: 1. Smooth -Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 03878709 09/ 10 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 9 3.9 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in -place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel -troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. 3.10 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI306.1 for cold -weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot -weather protection during curing. r --1— i�o , P% of i I .1 9p v I � �� a o N. 0 60 80 100 11 i Air temperature, 'F #I Z —i+_J-- 21 C� "p 04 —f o a o t w I j � 4 0"2 E - i (X Q 03878709 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 10 09/ 10 B. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or a combination of the following methods: C. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water -fog spray. C. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with I2-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period ` usingcover material and waterproof tape. P P a. Moisture cure or use moisture -retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. - 3. Curing Compound: After moisture curing, apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain -> continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.11 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six months. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry. C. Install semirigid epoxy joint filler full depth in saw -cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry -pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than I inch in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush -coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form -tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 03878709 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 11 09/ 10 t 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 03878709 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 12 09/10 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A C. FBI E. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement according to requirements specified in this Article. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive -strength tests for each concrete mix, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal -weight concrete; ASTM C 173, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; cast and laboratory cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test two laboratory -cured specimens at 7 days and two at 28 days. a. A compressive -strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 7. Testing specimens are to be taken after all admixtures and/or field added water has been added and incorporated into concrete. When strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory -cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in -place concrete. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive -strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive -strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive -strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests. 03878709 CAST-fN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 13 09/l 0 F. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. G. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect. END OF SECTION 03878709 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 14 09/ 10 I SE-CTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural steel. B. Grout. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural -steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Connections: Provide details of connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural -steel fabricator, including comprehensive engineering design by a qualified professional engineer, to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360. 2. Use LRFD; data are given at factored -load level. B. Construction: Braced frame. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural -steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip -critical high -strength bolted connections. 5. For structural -steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include structural design data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Product Test Reports: For the following: I . Shop primers. 2. Nonshrink grout. 03878709 09/10 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 1 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD. B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed structural steel work similar in material design and extent to that indicated for this project and with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 360. 3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. 1. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop primers and 1 topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates; ._'. instructions, and directions for installation. ` 3 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL -STEEL MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M. B. Channels, Angles, M, S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Cold -Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Weight Class: Standard. 2. Finish: Black except where indicated to be galvanized. F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 03878709 STRUCTURAL STEEL 09/ 10 1. 05120 - 2 z 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy -hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy -hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon -steel washers; all with plain finish. 2.3 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage -Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory -packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC 360. 1. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 2. Mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. 3. Complete structural -steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop -priming operations. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Bolt Holes: Cut drill or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. P P rP D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." F. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel framing members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 2.5 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High -Strength Bolts: Shop install high -strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS DLL/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material. 03878709 09/10 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 3 2.6 GALVANIZING A. Hot -Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot -dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. 1. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work unless they will function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. B. Bolted Connections: Shop -bolted connections will be visually inspected. C. Welded Connections: Shop -welded connections will be visually inspected. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION — A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry -bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. U 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360. B. Base Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry -bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug -tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge 1-j of plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage -resistant grouts. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." F _} 03878709 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 4 09/ l 0 J D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. l . Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated. F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS DI. I/DI.IM. G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed -stud shear connectors according to AWS D 1.1 /D 1.1 M and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High -Strength Bolts: Install high -strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. l . Joint Type: Snug tightened. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Use G70XX Electrode. 2. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 3. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 4. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material. 3.5 QUALITY FIELD Q CONTROL A. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." B. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS DI.1/DI.IM. C. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. 03878709 09/10 END OF SECTION STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 5 SECTION 06114 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division l - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Nailers. B. Roof curbs. C. Blocking in wall and roof openings. D. Preservative treatment of wood. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 07600 - Sheet Metal: Nailers under coping. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ALSC (American Lumber Standards Committee) - Softwood Lumber Standards. B. ANSI A208.1 - Mat -Formed Wood Particleboard. C. APA/EWA (APA/The Engineered Wood Association) - Certification. D. ASTM Al 53 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) of Iron and Steel Hardware. E. ASTM A563 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. F. ASTM F568 Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Fasteners. G. AWPA Cl (American Wood Preservers Association) - All Timber Products - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process. H. AWPA C9 Plywood, Pressure Treatment. I. AWPA C20 (American Wood Preservers Association) - Structural Lumber Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process. J. AWPA C27 Plywood, Fire -Retardant Pressure Treatment. K. FS FF-N-105B Nails, Brads, Staples and Spikes: Wire, Cut and Wrought. L. SPIB (Southern Pine Inspection Bureau) - Lumber Grading Rules. M. WCLIB (West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau) - Lumber Grading Rules. N. NLGA (National Lumber Rules Authority) O. WWPA (Western Wood Products Association). 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the following agencies: l . Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC. 2. Wood Structural Panel Grading Agency: Certified by APA/EWA - The Engineered Wood Association. 3. Lumber Grading Rules: WWPA. 03878709 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 06114 - 1 09/10 B. Factory grade stamp each piece of lumber and each wood structural panel. In lieu of grade { t' stamping, submit manufacturer's certificate certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements. C. Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved ' by ALSC's Board of Review. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit following in accordance with Section 01330: 1. Product Data i a. Provide technical data on wood preservative materials and application instructions. B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products conform to specified requirements. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect all wood materials from warping or other distortion by stacking in vertical position, braced to resist movement. B. Keep all wood materials covered and dry. Provide air circulation within and around stacks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS LLLJ A. General 1. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Nailers and Miscellaneous Framing: Yellow Pine species, No. 2 and better grade, 19 percent maximum moisture content, pressure preservative treat.' C. Plywood: APA, Grade C-D; Exposure Durability 1 unsanded. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Fasteners: ASTM F568 and FS FF-N-105B, Hot dipped or Electro galvanized steel. 2. Decking Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing cadmium plated or zinc coated. 3. Anchors: a. At Grout Filled Masonry and Concrete: Expansion bolts or self tapping masonry anchors as required by project conditions. B. Structural Framing Connectors: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions. r t 03878709 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 06114 - 2 09/ 10 2.3 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Shop pressure treat and deliver to site ready for installation, wood materials requiring pressure impregnated preservatives. B. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Treatment C 1 using water borne preservative with 0.25 percent retainage. C. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious materials, roofing and related metal flashings and other exterior locations. D. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure site -sawn ends are similarly treated. E. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting members. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious materials, roofing and related metal flashings and all other exterior locations. B. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Treat site -sawn ends. D. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting members. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Set members level and plumb, in correct position. B. Place horizontal members, crown side up. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. Roof Blocking: S/P/F species, 19 percent maximum moisture content, pressure preservative treatment. 03878709 09/10 END OF SECTION WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 06114 - 3 SECTION 07600 SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coping flashings. B. Fascias. C. Counterflashings. D. Counterflashings at roof mounted equipment and vent stacks. E. Gutters. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. C. Division 15 Section: Flashing sleeves and collars for mechanical items protruding through roofing membrane. D. Division 15 Section: Flashing sleeves and collars for plumbing items protruding through roofing membrane. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal. B. ASTM B 10 1 - Lead -Coated Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. C. ASTM B370 - Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. D. ASTM B486 - Paste Solder. E. ASTM B749 - Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products. F. ASTM D2178 - Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. G. CDA (Copper Development Association) - Copper in Architecture - Handbook. H. CDA (Copper Development Association) - Contemporary Copper, A Handbook of Sheet Copper Fundamentals, Design, Details and Specifications. 1. FS TT-C-494 - Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent Type, Acid Resistant. J. NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) - Roofing Manual. K. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual - Fifth Edition with Addendum No. 1. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profiles, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details. 03878709 SHEET METAL 07600 - 1 09/10 C. Product Data: Submit data on manufactured components metal types, finishes, and characteristics. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA standard details and requirements. B. Conform to SMACNA Manual for sizing components for rainfall intensity determined by a storm occurrence of l in 10 years. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator and Installer: Company specializing in sheet metal flashing work with 3 years documented experience. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. B. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Preformed Metal and Accessories I . Cheney Flashing Co. 2. Keystone Flashing Co. 3. Metal -Era Inc; Waukesha, W1. B. Prefinished Metal 1. AEP/Span Metals Corp., Dallas, Texas. 2. Alumax Corp., Mesquite, Texas. 3. MBCI - Grand Prairie, Texas. 4. Peterson Aluminum — Elk Grove Village, IL. 2.2 SHEET MATERIALS A. Pre -Finished Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A755/A755M using ASTM A653/A653M, G90 (Z275) zinc coated sheet; 24 gage core steel, pre -coated with PVDF (polyvinylidene fluoride) coating. B. Pre -Finished Aluminum Sheet: ASTM 13209/13209M, manufacturer's standard alloy and temper for specified finish; 0.032 inch thick; mill plain finish shop pre -coated with PVDF (polyvinylidene fluoride). C. Lead: ASTM B749, 2.5 lb/sq ft inch thick. D. Copper: ASTM B370, cold rolled thickness as indicated in schedule at end of this Section 16 oz/sq ft natural finish. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel Copper with soft neoprene washers at exposed locations. 03878709 SHEET METAL 07600 - 2 09/l 0 B. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybate alkyd conforming to FS-TT-C-494. C. Sealant: Specified in Section 07900. -, D. Bedding Compound: Butyl type. E. Gutter and Downspout Anchorage Devices: Same material as gutter and downspout. F. Gutter Supports: Match existing. G. Solder: ASTM B32; type suitable for application and material being soldered. H. Touch-up Paint: To match factory finish. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General I . Fabricate sheet metal items in accordance with SMACNA details indicated in paragraph SCHEDULE at the end of this section unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 2. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. 3. Fabricate cleats of same material as item being attached type sheet metal. 4. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. 5. Fabricate with required connection pieces. 6. Hem exposed edges on underside''/2 inch; miter and seam comers. 7. Pretin edges of copper sheet. Solder shop formed copper metal joints. After soldering, remove flux. Wipe and wash solder joints clean. Weather seal joints. 8. Fabricate copper cleats under pre -finished metal; solder for rigidity, seal with sealant. 9. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1 /4 inch and hemmed to form drip. B. Fabricate all sheet metal exposed to normal view from copper. C. Fabricate all concealed sheet metal and sheet metal hidden from normal view from copper. D. Gutters 1. Fabricate gutter to match existing profile. 2. Solder watertight. 3. Size: To match existing. - 4. Accessories: Profile to suit gutters and downspouts. {'f E. Downspouts 1. Fabricate downspouts to match existing profile. 2. Solder watertight. 3. Downspout Size: Match existing. 4. Accessories: Profile to suit gutters and downspouts. .. F. Coping Flashings 1. Fabricate to profile indicated on drawings. 2. Fabricate with integral slope tapering 1 inch from front to back unless otherwise required. 3. Provide minimum 4 inch vertical leg on front side with continuous cleat. 4. Provide minimum 3 inch vertical leg on back side. 5. Fabricate inside and outside comers with continuously factory soldered mechanically seamed and sealed joints. Provide finish to match remainder of cap flashing. 6. At mechanically seamed and sealed coping comers, fabricate inside and outside corner cleats with a minimum horizontal dimension of 18 inches and continuously shop soldered or comer joint. 03878709 SHEET METAL 07600 - 3 09/ 10 t__ r 2.5 FINISH Fl� A. Prefinished Metal: Fluoropolymer coating produced with Hylar 5000 or Kynar 500 resin complying with the following: J 1. Salt Spray Test a. Withstand salt spray test for a minimum of 1000 hours in accordance with ASTM B 117, including scribe requirement in test. b. Receive a rating of 10, no blistering, as determined by ASTM D 714 immediately upon removal of panel from test, and rating of 7, 1/16-inch failure at scribe, as determined by ASTM D 1654. 2. Formability Test: No evidence of fracturing to naked eye when subjected to a 180-degree bend over a 3/8-inch diameter mandrel in accordance with ASTM D 522. 3. 2000 Hour Accelerated Weathering Requirements a. Test Conformance: ASTM G 23 using a Type D apparatus. b. No cracking, peeling, blistering, loss of adhesion of protective coating, or corrosion of base metal. C. Loss of Adhesion: Protective coating that can be readily removed from base metal with tape in accordance with ASTM D 3359, Test Method B. d. Chalking: Not greater than No. 8 rating in accordance with ASTM D 4214 test procedures. C. Color Change: Maximum 2 NBS units in accordance with ASTM D 4214 and ASTM D 2244 test procedures. 4. Humidity Test: No signs of blistering, cracking, creepage or corrosion when scored panel subjected to a humidity cabinet test in accordance with ASTM D 2247 for 1000 hours. 5. Impact Resistance: Withstand direct and reverse impact in accordance with ASTM D 2794 equal to 1.5 times metal thickness in mils, expressed in inch -pounds, with no loss of adhesion. 6. Abrasion Resistance Test: Withstand a minimum of80liters of sand before appearance of base metal when subjected to falling sand test in accordance with ASTM D 968. 7. Pollution Resistance: No visual effects when immersion tested in a 10 percent ,-- hydrochloric acid solution for 24 hours in accordance with ASTM D 1308.� 8. Color a. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line. B. Exposed Fasteners: Factory finished to match color of item being fastened. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 03878709 SHEET METAL 07600 - 4 09/ 10 i 3.2 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Conform to details on drawings and details included in the SMACNA manual. B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15. C. Fill back of cap flashing with plastic roofing cement. D. Backbed lap joints of flashings in horizontal position. E. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. F. Termination Bars 1. Install in longest practical lengths. 2. Seal top of bar to supporting construction with sealant as specified in Section 07900 - JOINT SEALERS. G. Coping Flashing 1. Install with front edge engaged in continuous cleat. 2. Fasten back edge to parapet substrate with hex head washered fasteners. H. Fit flashings tight in place. I. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. J. Solder concealed and concealed from normal view metal joints for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water. K. Secure gutters and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01410. B. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with specified requirements. 03878709 09/10 END OF SECTION SHEET METAL 07600 - 5 SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces. B. Sealant and backing. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07600 - Sheet Metal: Sealants used in conjunction with metal flashings. 1.4 REFERENCES A. AAMA 803.3 - Voluntary Specification for Narrow -Joint Seam Sealer. B. AAMA 808.3 - Voluntary Specification for Exterior Perimeter Sealing Compound C. ASTM C719 - Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants Under Cyclic Movement. D. ASTM C792 - Effects of Heat Aging on Weight Loss, Cracking, and Chalking of Elastomeric Sealants. E. ASTM C570 - Oil and Resin - Base Caulking Compound for Building Construction. F. ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds. G. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. H. ASTM C1311 - Solvent Release Sealants. I. ASTM C1193 - Use of Joint Sealants. J. ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber. K. ASTM D1667 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Closed -Cell Foam). 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations and color availability. 2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. B. Samples 1. Submit four sample kits in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples, consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view. 03878709 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 1 09/10 C. Mockup 1. Construct field sample panel illustrating sealant type, color, and tooled surface. 2. Locate where directed. 3. Accepted sample may not remain as part of the Work. D. Certificates 1. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements and are suitable for use indicated. _3 2. Joint sealant manufacturer's certification that sealants, primers, and cleaners required for sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic - compounds. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section -s with minimum ten years documented experience. rt B. Applicator: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum five . years documented experience. C. Conform to ASTM C1193 requirements for materials and installation. 1. Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product �. required. 2. Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. D. Preconstruction Field Testing: Prior to installation of joint sealants, field-test sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each type of elastomeric and non-elastomeric sealant joint substrate indicated. 3. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mock-ups will be erected. 4. Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand pull method described below: a. Install joint sealants in 5-foot joint lengths using same materials and methods for joint preparation and joint sealant installation required for completed Work. i Allow sealants to cure fully before testing. b. Make knife cuts horizontally from one side of joint to other followed by 2 vertical j cuts approximately 2 inches long at side of joint and meeting horizontal cut at top of 2-inch cuts. Place mark 1 inch from top of 2-inch piece. C. Use fingers to grasp 2-inch piece of sealant just above 1-inch mark; pull firmly down at a 90-degree angle or more while holding a ruler along side of sealant. Pull sealant out of joint to distance recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesive capability, but not less than that equaling specified maximum movement capability in extension; hold this position for 10 seconds.._ 5. Report whether or not sealant in joint connected to pulled -out portion, failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of i product and joint substrate. % I 6. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. r 03878709 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 2 09/10 i a E. Field -Constructed Mock -Ups: Prior to installation of joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants as follows to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution: 1. Joints in field -constructed mock-ups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants specified in this Section. F. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. r a 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements 1. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces. 2. Do not install sealants when joint substrates are wet. 3. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work of this Section with all Sections referencing this Section. 1.10 WARRANTY . , A. Provide five year warranty. B. Warranty: Include coverage of installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve air tight ' and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Elastomeric Sealants 1. General: Manufacturer's standard chemically curing, urethane, polyurethane, or polysulfide polymer based elastomeric sealant complying with ASTM C 920. 2. Types a. S-1: Type M, Grade P, Class 25. b. S-2: Type S, Grade P, Class 25. C. S-3: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25. d. S-4: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 03878709 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 3 09/10 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 4. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. B. Latex Sealants 1. General: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, mildew -resistant, paintable latex sealant of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations and that accommodates indicated percentage change in joint width existing at time of installation without failing either adhesively or cohesively. 2. Types: a. S-5; Acrylic -Emulsion Sealant 1) Composition: Manufacturer's standard product accommodating joint movement of not more than 5 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 10 percent. 2) Conformance: ASTM C 834. b. S-6; Silicone Emulsion Sealant 1) Composition: Manufacturer's standard product that accommodates joint movement of not more than 25 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 50 percent. 2) Conformance: ASTM C 834 and, except for weight loss measured per ASTM C 792, ASTM C 920. 3) Special Properties: Fungus and mildew resistant. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 4. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. C. Type S-7; Acrylic Sealant 1. General: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, solvent -release -curing acrylic terpolymer sealant complying with AAMA 808.3, with capability to withstand 15 percent maximum cyclic movement (7-1/2 percent movement in both extension and compression) at time of application and remain adhered to joint substrates indicated for Project without failing cohesively when tested for adhesion and cohesion per ASTM C 719. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 3. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. D. Type S-8; Butyl Sealant 1. General: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, nonstaining, paintable, solvent -release -curing, polymerized butyl sealant formulated with minimum of 75 percent solids and tack -free time of 24 hours or less, complying with ASTM C 1311. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 3. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. E. Type S-9; Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealant 1. General: Manufacturer's standard, solvent -release -curing, pigmented synthetic rubber sealant formulated for sealing joints 3/16 inch or smaller in width, complying with AAMA 803.3. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 3. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. F. Accessories l . Primer: Non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 2. Joint Cleaner: Non -corrosive and non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. 3. Joint Backing: ANSI/ASTM Dl 056; round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. 03878709 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 4 09/l 0 1 4. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 5. Masking Tape: Non -staining, non -absorbing type as recommended by sealant T manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on Drawings and recommended by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions and substrate. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and -prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. D. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C 1193. E. Install masking tape where required to protect adjacent finished surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. &- C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/2 the joint width. D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E. Remove and replace joint backing which has become wet, dirty, or exposed to weather for extended period of time. r` F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when '§ sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. G. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. H. Tool joints concave in accordance with ASTM C1193 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section. C. Cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants and repair so that repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without -> deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. 03878709 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 5 09/10 i 3.6 SCHEDULE F" A. Exterior Joints 1. Horizontal traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1 or S-2. 2. Horizontal traffic joints exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1 or S-2. 3. Horizontal non -traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1, S-2, S-3 or S-4. 4. Vertical or inclined joints such as panel, coping and control: Sealant types S-3 or S-4. 5. Vertical or inclined joints such as perimeters of doors, windows, wall penetrations: Sealant types S-3 or S-4. [_J 6. Sealant Bedding: Seale: S-8. Threshold h'P 7. 8. Joints in Masonry Flashing: Sealant Type S-9. Joints in Sheet Metal Flashing: Sealant Type S-9. B. Interior Joints ' 1. Horizontal traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1, or S-2.,, 2. Horizontal non -traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1, S-2,.. S-3, or S-4. _a 3. Vertical or inclined joints such as panel, coping and control: Sealant types S-3, S-4. 4. Vertical or inclined joints such as perimeters of doors, windows, wall penetrations: Sealant types S-3, S-4 or S-6. 5. Non-structural hollow metal doors and borrowed lites. Sealant types S-3, S-4 S-5, S-6 or S-7. 6. Non-structural perimeter seals around plumbing fixtures, joints between ceramic tile and joints between ceramic tile and dissimilar materials: Sealant type S-6. 7. Non-structural perimeter seals at joints between countertops, backsplashes and walls: Sealant type S-7. END OF SECTION J U 03878709 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 6 09/I0 SECTION 15000 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division I - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Work covered by this Division shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment, supplies and materials and in performing all operations necessary for the installation of complete and operating mechanical systems as required by these specifications and/or shown -on the drawings, subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. The work shall also include the completion of such mechanical and electrical details not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all systems described on the drawings or required by these specifications; this includes the furnishing all materials for the filling the systems to make them operable, including water, refrigerant, oil and grease. Prove satisfactory operation of all equipment and controls to the Engineer on request. B. Work not included — Certain labor, material and equipment may be furnished and/or installed under other divisions of these specifications. This Contractor shall coordinate with other trades and arrange his work to make the part fit together. The following items are to be accomplished under other divisions of these specifications: I . Temporary Heat: Refer to paragraph in this Section. 2. Temporary Water and Toilet: Refer to General Conditions. 3. Roof Curbs: Refer to paragraph in this Section. 4. Electrical Equipment and Wiring: Refer to paragraph in this Section. 5. Concrete: Refer to paragraph in this Section. C. Equipment Furnished by Owner — Rough -in services pipes to locations as required by architectural and mechanical drawings and equipment shop drawings. Provide service valves on all pipes except waste and vent pipes. Final Connection to equipment will be made by this Contractor. 1.3 BIDDING A. All mechanical equipment shall be new unless specified otherwise in the specifications or on the drawings. B. All bids must be based only on the equipment and materials as scheduled on the drawings and as specified or on equivalent equipment and materials. Any Contractor who assumes equivalence of products and who bases his proposal on that assumption does so at his own risk. C. A listing of approved alternative manufacturers does not mean that all products of a particular alternative manufacturer are acceptable alternative to the scheduled items. All fixtures and devices must still be submitted according to the prescribed procedures. In addition, some items that have an important visual affect, e.g. electric water coolers, may be required to receive Owner's or Architectural approval also. 03878709 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 09/10 15000 - 1 1.4 1.5 i 1.7 EXISTING UTILITIES A. The drawings indicate the locations, type and sizes of various utilities within the site where ? known. These utilities are indicated as accurately as possible. If the Contractor encounters any f utilities during construction which are not shown on the drawings, they shall ask for written instructions from the Architect. Any relocation or remodeling required will then be directed by a change order. This Contractor shall assume all responsibility for protection of all utilities, shown or not, and for repair required by this construction. B. Contractor shall verify location, size, elevation, pressure and any other pertinent data of the existing utilities. Additional costs incurred due to failure to verify such data and to coordinate associated work with respective utility providers shall not be the Owner's responsibility but shall be borne by the Contractor. C. All costs associated with providing utilities including, but not limited to, connection fees, boring under roads, etc., shall be included in the Contractor's proposal price whether such costs are incurred by Contractor or charged by the utility company. D. Submission of a proposal by the Contractor shall be considered an acknowledgment by the Contractor of his compliance with this section. -' CODES, PERMITS AND FEES A. Contractor shall comply with all local, state and national codes and shall pay for all applicable costs, fees, permits, licenses and inspections for this division. TEMPORARY HEAT A. Temporary heat will be furnished by the General Contractor. Use of the permanent heating system will not be allowed without written authorization from the Engineer, Architect and Owner. In case the permanent heating system is used for temporary heat, the General Contractor shall pay all the costs until acceptance by the Owner. Warranty of equipment shall not start until acceptance by the Owner. DRAWINGS A. Contract drawings are diagrammatic only and are not intended to be scaled for dimensions. All dimensions shall be taken from Architectural drawings, certified equipment drawings and from the structure itself before fabricating and work. All space requirements and equipment locations shall be verified, coordinated with other trades, as it is the various Contractor's responsibility to install the systems complete in the space provided without extra charges to the Owner. B. It is intended that anything, whether labor and materials, which is usually furnished as part of any equipment specified and which is necessary for operation shall be furnished as part of the Contract without additional cost, whether or not shown or described. C. All piping in finished areas of the building shall be concealed except where otherwise noted on the drawings. D. All equipment shall be installed.in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, unless approval is given in writing be the Consulting Mechanical Engineer for deviation. 03878709 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 2 09/10 1.8 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. The mechanical work shall be performed in strict accordance with the local and state codes, ordinances, and regulations governing the particular work involved. Furnish, without extra charge, any additional material and labor when and where required to comply with these Rules and Regulations, though the work is not mentioned in the Specifications or shown on the Drawings. When the Specifications or Drawings call for or describe materials or construction of a better quality or larger sizes than required by the above mentioned Rules and Regulations, the provisions of these Specifications and accompanying Drawings shall take precedence. 1.9 QUALIFICATIONS A. All mechanics shall be capable journeymen, skilled in the work assigned to them with licensing required by the inspecting authority. All welders must have been certified within the past three years to perform the work, which they are doing. 1.10 WARRANTY A. All materials and equipment shall be new unless otherwise specified. B. Guarantee all workmanship, material and equipment and replace any found defective without cost to the Owner, for ONE year after final acceptance, as defined in General Conditions. C. Each warranty for longer than one year as described above (that comes with equipment used on the job) shall be passed into the Owner in the Operation and Maintenance Manual, along with the dates of start and end of warranty. D. Refer to General Conditions for additional information regarding specific warranty requirements. I, 1.11 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS { A. Before final payment, provide the Architect with one clean set of drawings and specifications corrected up-to-date as job progress. These documents shall reflect the As -Built conditions. Refer to General Conditions for additional information. 1.12 SUBMITTALS A. The intent of this section is to give general submittal information, refer to specific submittal information in the subsequent mechanical sections. B. Within 10 days after award of the contract, and before orders are placed, Contractor shall submit specific information on list of equipment and principal materials specified. Contractor shall indicate and/or provide names of manufacturers, catalog and model numbers, cut sheets, and such other supplementary information as necessary for evaluation. Submittal shall be electronic using *.pdf file extension. C. Requirements for Each Submittal: - I . Bear a dated stamp or specific written indication that the Contractor has reviewed and approved all submittal prior to submission to Engineer, 2. Have all information deleted by Contractor that pertains to the means and methods of construction or to fabrication, assembly, installation, or erection (approval by Engineer shall not extend to these areas unless specifically noted by Engineer), 03878709 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 3 09/10 3. Be clearly and SPECIFICALLY marked as to which specific piece of equipment is being submitted, by use of a permanent marker, stamp, etc., so as to distinguish it from other pieces of equipment that may occur on the same page, 4. Be clearly marked as to which available options are being submitted that are associated with a piece of equipment, and 5. Be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specific performance, materials, and similar data to enable the Engineer to review the proposed equipment. ^` Omission by Contractor of any of the above requirements or submittals will subject submittal to automatic rejection without review. Any submittals received by Engineer that were not requested shall be returned without review of any kind. - D. Installation Instructions - For certain products or systems as identified in subsequent specifications sections or on the drawings, the Contractor shall be required to provide copies of ....A ^ manufacturer's installation instructions with the submittal. When required as such, the installation instructions are considered part of the submittal and their omission may result in automatic rejection of the submittal. Where more than one identical device are scheduled, only ' one set of installation instructions needs to be submitted, e.g. if seven five -ton split systems air conditions are scheduled, only one five -ton unit installation instruction needs to be submitted. Similarly, if one set of installation instructions is identified by the manufacturer and on the instructions to be applicable to more than one type or size of devices, e.g. if one set of air conditioner instructions is good for three, four, five -ton units, then only one instruction set is required for these devices. 1.13 SUBSTITUTED PRODUCTS A. Material or equipment specified by Manufacturer's name is being used as a basis of standard, unless otherwise noted. The Engineer will be the sole judge on the equivalence of substituted . equipment and materials. B. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to verify that submitted substitute equipment will fit in space available. The Contractor's submittal for acceptance of the substitute shall include a written statement of whether or not such acceptance would require any subsequent or associated ) changes to the drawings or specifications. Any such changes shall be described in writing, 3 briefly but complete. 1 - C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of any such modifications due to substitution of materials or equipment for that which was specified or scheduled. The cost shall be complete, that is, it shall include the cost affect of any and all other trades. D. The Engineer may request detailed shop drawings or plan layouts of mechanical rooms or systems of the substituted equipment. 1.14 SAFETY A. General — Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the work, and Contractor shall comply with all laws governing safety, specifically the "Occupational Safety and Health Standards" and the "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction", state and federal. z 03878709 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 4 09/10 1. B. According to OSHA, a hazardous chemical is any chemical, which is a physical hazard or a health hazard. This may include items such as paints, solvents, adhesives, sealants, cleaners, etc. If a contractor produces, uses, or stores hazardous chemicals at the workplace, them the contractor shall develop, implement, and maintain a hazard communication program in compliance with the latest OSHA requirements. In projects with multiple tenants in which the building is partially occupied during all or part of the project, Contractor shall inform the building manager or Owner, according to OSHA guidelines, of any hazardous chemicals being produced, stored, or used in the building so that other tenants may be notified. Contractor shall employ required methods of training, information, handling, ventilation, labeling, storing, disposal, and removal of hazardous chemicals. 1.15 LABELING A. Each device for which an independent testing authority has established a standard shall have affixed a label indicating its compliance and listing. Refer to General Conditions for list of such independent testing authorities. 1.16 SITE VISIT REPORTS A. During the course of the job, the Engineer will make site visits to observe work in progress and will subsequently prepare a written site visit report, which will be sent to the Contractor and to whomever else the Engineer desires. The Contractor shall prepare a written and typed response within seven (7) calendar days of his receiving the site visit report. The General Contractor shall include in his response the following information. 1. Date of site visit by the Engineer, 2. Date of receipt of the site visit report, 3. Name and title of the preparer of the response, 4. An item number referenced to the site report, 5. A brief three or four word description of the item, 6. The Contractor or Subcontractor affected, 7. The proposed course of action, and 8. An expected time of completion of the action. 1.17 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. No joists, beams, girders, columns, slabs, or other structural elements shall be cut, drilled, or altered in any way by the Contractor without first obtaining written permission and instructions from the Engineer and Architect. B. Where it is necessary to cut through any non-structural elements of walls, floors, or ceilings to permit the installation of any work under this contract, or to repair any defects that may appear up to the expiration of the guarantee, such cutting shall be done by Contractor with as little damage as reasonably possible to the element being cut or to adjacent elements. C. After the necessary work has been completed, the damage shall be repaired by the respective Contractor, who shall pay all costs of such cutting, repairs and patching. All patching or sealing of cuts, penetrations, etc., including final appearance of same, shall be done to the approval of the Engineer and Architect. 03878709 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 09/10 15000 - 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be new and of specified quality, unless specifically noted otherwise. Materials shall be free from defects. Where manufacturer names are mentioned in the specifications or on the drawings, it has been done in order to establish a standard of quality and construction. B. Contractor will be responsible for transportation of his material to and from the job site, and will be responsible for the storage and protection of his materials and work until the final acceptance of the job. At the end of each day of work, each Contractor is responsible for covering or protecting his work and/or materials that may be susceptible to damage even if such damage is the result of unforeseen causes, e.g. an overnight thunderstorm. Failure to do so will be sufficient cause for rejection of any item in question, and any such item shall be replaced by Contractor at no cost to the Owner. C. Contractor shall verify that all pieces of equipment will fit through available openings in the building and that all equipment can be installed without modification of building structure. 2.2 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE A. All equipment major items are specified in the equipment schedules on the drawings and shall be new and furnished complete with all accessories normally supplied with the catalog item listed and all other accessories necessary for a complete and satisfactory installation. B. Equipment items so noted will require start-up by factory trained personnel. Equipment items so noted will require factory approved service personnel who shall provide all service, including all parts and all labor, as requested by the Owner, during the full period of equipment warranty. 2.3 EQUIPMENT RATINGS A. Equipment capacities as scheduled on the drawings are at project site altitude. Capacities of submitted equipment must be corrected for project site altitude unless otherwise noted. 2.4 WORKMANSHIP A. The workmanship shall, in all respects, be of the highest grade, and all construction shall be done according to the best practices of the trade. Piping, ducting and conduit shall be concealed unless otherwise noted, and installed square to the building lines. Any work not meeting this requirement shall be replaced or rebuilt without extra expense to the Owner. 2.5 V-BELT DRIVES A. V-belt drives shall be of fabric and rubber construction of approved manufacture. Multiple belts shall be matched and all belts shall be adjusted to drive the apparatus properly and to prevent slippage and undue wear in starting motor nameplate rating. 03878709 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 6 09/10 2.6 BELTGUARDS A. The Contractor shall provide for each V-belt drive a painted steel belt guard, which shall be constructed around an angle iron frame, securely bolted to the floor or apparatus. The guard shall completely enclose drives and pulleys and be constructed to comply with all safety requirements. Hinged access doors not less than 6" x 6" shall be provided for access to motors and fan shaft for test purposes. 2.7 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT A. All disconnects, motor starters, relays, wiring, etc. shall comply with all requirements of 16000 Sections of the electrical specifications. B. The Mechanical Contractor must refer to the electrical control equipment and wiring shown on the Electrical Drawings. Any changes or additions required by specified equipment furnished shall be the complete responsibility of the Contractor furnishing the equipment. C. All electrical equipment characteristics (voltage, etc.) must be verified by the Contractor prior to ordering. It is imperative that voltage and phase characteristics are checked with the electrical drawings. D. All motors shall be built in accordance with the current applicable IEEE, ASA and NEMA standards. All general-purpose motors shall be open drip -proof machines for installation indoors and/or in protected locations. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motors shall be used in all areas of exposure to weather or other environmental contamination. Motors shall be rated explosion -proof when located in hazardous atmospheres. Type II weather -protected motors may be used in lieu of TEFC motors on roof fan units and similar equipment. Motors mounted in direct sun shall be provided with a shield to forbid direct radiation from the sun when the sun is 45 degrees or greater above the horizon. E. Unless indicated otherwise, motors shall be NEMA design B with a service factor of 1.15 with 40°C rise and total temperature rise of 65°C ambient and when powered from the system voltage feeding the motor. TEFC motors shall have a service factor of 1.00 with total temperature rise of 65°C. in the above conditions. Single-phase motors shall be NEMA Type N split phase induction motors with built-in thermal protectors. Single-phase motors connected on loads requiring high starting torque shall be capacitor -start induction motors. F. All motors shall be all copper wound, high power factor, high efficiency motors. Electric motors shall be an energy efficient type as defined in the latest edition of NEMA Document No. MG 1. Motor efficiency shall be made available to the Engineer as required. 2.8 EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SUPPORTS A. All supporting systems for piping, equipment, and materials supported by the building structure shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to purchase and installation. 2.9 ROOF PENETRATIONS A. Piping 1. Penetration shall be accomplished with factory -made assemblies designed specifically for the purpose. The use of pitch pans or pitch pockets is not allowed. Contractor shall provide a factory -made penetration assembly as follows: a. For pipes, conduits, etc. up to 3-inches in diameter that can or are intended to be turned to horizontal after passing through the roof (e.g. small electrical conduit, gas piping, refrigerant lines, water pipes, etc.) the device shall consist of a curb 03878709 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 7 09/10 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 and Section 15000 of the specifications. B. Product data for following piping specialties: 1. Mechanical sleeve seals. 1 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Access doors. C. Samples of color, lettering style, and other graphic representation required for each identification material and device. D. Prepare coordination drawings according to Division 1 Section "Submittals" to a '/4 inch equals 1 foot (1:48) scale or larger. Detail major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Show space requirements for installation and access. Show where sequence and coordination of installations are important to the efficient flow of the Work. Include the following: 1. Proposed locations of piping, equipment, and materials. Include the following: a. Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty locations and valve stem movement. b. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. C. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. d. Equipment service connections and support details. -- e. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. 2. Scheduling, sequencing, movement and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME "Boiler and Pressure G"`'' Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions of ASME B31 Series "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed A W S qualification tests for the welding processes a involved and that certification is current. B. ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. C. Equipment Selection: Equipment of greater or larger power, dimensions, capacities, and ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and equipment spaces are increased. No additional costs will be approved for these increases, if larger equipment is approved. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of the equipment are specified, the equipment must meet the design requirements and commissioning requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory -applied end -caps. Maintain end -caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe -end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. 03 878709 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 2 09/ 10 B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. When stored inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor. C. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt. D. Protect stored plastic pipes from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING k, A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components. Refer to General Notes on plans for sequencing of work. In general, replacement of heating water systems are to occur during the cooling seasons and the condensing/chilled water systems are to occur during the heating seasons. B. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction to allow for mechanical installations. C. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured -in -place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. E. Coordinate connection of electrical services. F. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. G. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors where mechanical items requiring access are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors." H. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting where devices are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices prior to installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Refer to individual piping system specification Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory -threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.2 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual piping system specification Sections in Division 15 for special joining materials not listed below. B. Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for the chemical and thermal conditions of the piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos -free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness, except where thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full -Face Type: For flat -face, Class 125 cast-iron and cast -bronze flanges. b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250 cast-iron and steel flanges. 2. ASME B16.20 for grooved, ring joint, steel flanges. 03878709 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 3 ( 09/10 3. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, except where other thickness is indicated; and full -face or ring type, except where type is indicated. C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B 18.2.1, carbon steel, except where other material is indicated. D. Plastic Pipe Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, except where other type or material is indicated. E. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32. 1. Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Tin (approximately 95 percent) and silver (approximately 5 percent), having 0.10 percent lead content. F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8. 1. BCuP Series: Copper -phosphorus alloys. 2. BA91: Silver alloy. G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. H. Solvent Cements: Manufacturer's standard solvents complying with the following: 1. Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS): ASTM D 2235. 2. Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC): ASTM F 493. 3. Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC): ASTM D 2564. 4. PVC to ABS Transition: Made to requirements of ASTM D 3138, color other than orange. 1. Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTM F 477, elastomeric gasket. J. Flanged, Ductile -Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber gasket, carbon steel bolts and nuts. K. Couplings: Iron body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match outside diameters of plain -end pressure pipes. 1. Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron. 2. Followers: ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M), Grade 32510 or ASTM A 536 ductile iron. 3. Gaskets: Rubber. 4. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA Cl 11. 5. Finish: Enamel paint. 2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep -pattern type where required to conceal protruding fittings and sleeves. 1. Inside Diameter: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation. 2. Outside Diameter: Completely cover opening. 3. Cast Brass: One-piece, with setscrew. a. Finish: Rough brass. b. Finish: Polished chrome plate. 4. Cast Brass: Split casting, with concealed hinge and setscrew. a. Finish: Rough brass. b. Finish: Polished chrome plate. 5. Stamped Steel: One-piece, with setscrew and chrome -plated finish. 6. Stamped Steel: One-piece, with spring clips and chrome -plated finish. 7. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, setscrew, and chrome -plated finish. 8. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome -plated finish. 9. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with exposed -rivet hinge, setscrew, and chrome -plated finish. 03878709 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 4 09/ l 0 1.0. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with exposed -rivet hinge, spring clips, and chrome -plated finish. 11. Cast -Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting. B. Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar - metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. 1. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld neck end types and matching piping system materials. - 2. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. 3. Dielectric Unions: Factory -fabricated, union assembly for 250-psig minimum working pressure at a 180-deg F temperature. -! 4. Dielectric Flanges: Factory -fabricated, companion -flange assembly for 150- or 300-psig minimum pressure to suit system pressures. 5. Dielectric -Flange Insulation Kits: Field -assembled, companion -flange assembly, full -face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. a. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure to suit system pressures. 6. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized -steel coupling, having inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining, with threaded ends and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F temperature. 7. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple, having inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining, with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved end types and 300-psig working pressure at 225 deg F temperature. C. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular, watertight mechanical type. Components include interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. Connecting bolts and pressure plates cause rubber -sealing elements to expand when tightened. D. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations: 1. Steel Sheet Metal: 24-gage or heavier galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. 2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. 3. Cast -Iron: Cast or fabricated wall pipe equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, having plain ends and integral water stop, except where other features are specified. 4. Wall Penetration Systems: Wall sleeve assembly, consisting of housing, gaskets, and pipe sleeve, with 1 mechanical joint end conforming to AWWA C110 and 1 plain pipe -sleeve end. a. Penetrating Pipe Deflection: 5 percent without leakage. b. Housing: Ductile -iron casting having waterstop and anchor ring, with ductile -iron gland, steel studs and nuts, and rubber gasket conforming to AWWA C111, of housing and gasket size as required to fit penetrating pipe. C. Pipe Sleeve: AWWA C151, ductile -iron pipe. _ d. Housing -to -Sleeve Gasket: Rubber or neoprene push -on type of manufacturer's design. 5. Cast -Iron Sleeve Fittings: Commercially made sleeve having an integral clamping flange, with clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing. a. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews. 03878709 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 5 09/10 3razing Manual" in the "Pipe and ids according to ASME B1.20.1. )m tallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B. -eaded pipe ends to remove burrs er ics: Post -hardening, volume -adjusting, dry, hydraulic -cement grout, d valves as follows: noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior or valve ends, and proximity of 30 ,e should be threaded into joint. M 5000-psi 28-day compressive strength. xternal pipe threads (except where "remixed and factory -packaged. alve end into which pipe is being ., el access doors with 16 ga. frame and 14 ga. Panel. Prime coat finish. fittings having threads that are rin )inges, screwdriver cam -lock. Doors in fire rated surfaces shall be U.L. F that have cracked or open welds. �oors to be Milcor or approved equivalent. .. ,,. )10.12 "Recommended Practices using qualified processes and - ice" Article. appropriate gasket material, size, psket concentrically positioned. .-C �IMON REQUIREMENTS tke initial contact of flanges and ibricants on bolt threads. Tighten `ing as described below, except where system Sections specify otherwise. �ystem specification Sections in Division 15 specify piping installation ;an and dry joining surfaces by IAf pr �e to the piping system. )e and fittings according to the !and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate of id arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements of solvent -cement and primers. si pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design vl D 2235 and ASTM D 2661. ;tall piping as indicated, except where deviations to layout are approved on STM D 2846 and ASTM F 493. Nn at ings. Picated slope. i ition: ASTM D 2672. )plication: ASTM D 2855. Per i having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. 1, 3rocedure and solvent cement Ding �, Dncealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and t pipe and fittings and join with " of sags and bends. rinted instructions. terior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. 'prohibited, indicated. s except where i <et joining. to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow piping connections as specified )ove removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal. t( 'low application of insulation plus I -inch clearance around insulation. .ent to each valve and at final " ' )ipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing. -inch or smaller threaded pipe changes in direction and branch connections. rig iccording to manufacturer's printed instructions. -nt to flanged valves and at final �C^ heons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall board - d pipe connection. pended ceilings according to the following: and flanges to connect piping ►el ited Piping: Cast -brass, one-piece, with setscrew, and polished e-i ted finish. Use split -casting escutcheons, where required, for existing rig and nipple fittings to connect alb l Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast -brass or stamped -steel, with setscrew. als J Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates. t FHODS 15050 - 8 VIECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 6 i E_ 3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION --COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom where mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to the Architect. C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, except where otherwise indicated. D. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location. E. Install equipment giving right-of-way to piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.3 ACCESS DOORS A. Furnish an access door for each pipe chase for each floor. This includes both toilet plumbing chases and pipe riser chases. Access doors assembly to be size 16" x 16". B. Also, furnish access doors in all non -removable ceiling and in partitions and walls where necessary access to plumbing cleanouts, shock absorbers, fire dampers, manual dampers, valves and other mechanical devices requiring access. Size these as required for access with minimum size of 12" x 12". C. _E Any access doors furnished for installation in fire rated surfaces or assembly shall carry an approved fire rating for that use. D. Any access doors furnished for installation in glued on acoustical surfaces or assembly shall have recessed door to allow installation of tiles. E. Provide all access doors to the General Contractor for them to construct into the building. 3.4 PAINTING AND FINISHING A. Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting requirements. g P g q _ B. Damage and Touch Up: Repair marred and damaged factory -painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. 3.5 CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete equipment bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger than supported unit in both directions. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's setting templates for anchor bolt and tie locations. Refer to structural details and specifications for concrete pad information. 3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS DL1 "Structural Welding Code --Steel." 03878709 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 9 09/10 3.7 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS ANDANCHORAGE A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members. C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. 3.8 DEMOLITION A. Disconnect, demolish, and remove work specified under Division 15 and as indicated. B. Where pipe, ductwork, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged or disturbed, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity and quality. C. Accessible Work: Remove indicated exposed pipe and ductwork in its entirety. D. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried pipe abandoned in place, 2 inches beyond the face of adjacent construction. Cap and patch surface to match existing finish. ' E. Removal: Remove indicated equipment from the Project site. F. Temporary Disconnection: Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational equipment indicated for relocation. 3.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of the trades involved. B. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. 3.10 GROUTING A. Install nonmetallic nonshrink grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump g and other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's printed__y - instructions. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C. Provide forms for placement of grout, as required. D. Avoid air entrapment when placing grout. E. Place grout to completely fill equipment bases. F. Place grout on concrete bases to provide a smooth bearing surface for equipment. G. Place grout around anchors. H. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's printed instructions. END OF SECTION 03878709 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 10 09/10 i SECTION 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe hangers and supports. B. Hanger rods. C. Equipment curbs. D. Formed steel channel. E. Equipment bases and supports. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping. 2. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping. 3. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM El 19 - Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 3. ASTM E814 - Test Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops. 4. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers. C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS DLL - Structural Welding Code - Steel. D. FM Global: 1. FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials & Services Approved By Factory Mutual Research For Property Conservation. E. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer. 2. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. 3. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Division 1 and Section 15000 - Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location including critical dimensions, sizes, and pipe hanger and support locations and detail of trapeze hangers. C. Product Data: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. D. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. 03878709 09/ 10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060 - 1 E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with State and local standards. B. Perform Work in accordance with AWS Dl.l for welding hanger and support attachments to building structure. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 3 years experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ' A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. B. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging. 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Section 15000 - Product warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Plumbing Piping — DWV: l . Conform to ASME 1331.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, or MSS SP89. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1 /2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron or carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hooks. 6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 8. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 9. Copper Pipe Support: Copper -plated, carbon -steel adjustable, ring. H 03878709 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS l 5060 - 2 09/10 11 B. Plumbing Piping — Water and Gas: 1. Conform to ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, or MSS SP89. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 'h to 1-12/ inch: Malleable iron or carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 5. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. _ 6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hook. 7. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 8. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 9. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 10. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Smaller: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 11. Copper Pipe Support: Copper -plated, Carbon -steel ring. E C. Hydronic Piping: 1.. Conform to ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, or MSS SP89. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron or carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 5. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, ._ double hanger. 6. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 7. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll. 8. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hooks. 9. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 10. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll. 11. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 12. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 13. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Smaller: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 14. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support. 15. Copper Pipe Support: Copper -plated, carbon steel ring. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded on one end, or continuous threaded. 2.3 EQUIPMENT CURBS A. Fabrication: Unless otherwise noted, shall be welded 18 gage galvanized steel shell and base, mitered 3 inch cant, variable step to match roof insulation, 1-1/2 inch thick insulation, factory installed wood nailer. Provide tapered curb as required to match roof slope. 03878709 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060 - 3 09/10 V __ 2.4 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL A. Manufacturers: E 1. B-Line Systems. 2. Unistrut Corp. 3. Substitutions: See Section 15000. B. Product Description: Galvanized (12 gage) thick steel. With holes 1-1/2 inches on center. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify the existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves. 3.2 PREPARATIONM1 A. Obtain permission from Architect before using powder -actuated anchors. B. Do not drill or cut structural members without obtaining permission from Architect/Engineer. 1 3.3 INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Install in accordance with ASME 1331.1, ASME 1331.5, ASME 31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, or MSS SP 89. B. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. C. Install hangers with minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. D. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. E. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. F. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. G. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. H. Where piping is installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe or trapeze hangers. 1. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. J. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. K. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. L. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Division 9. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. M. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation. Refer to Section 15080. 3.4 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 4 inches thick and extending 6 inches beyond supported equipment. Refer to Division 3. B. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. 1 03878709 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060 - 4 09/ 10 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 C. Construct supports of steel members, formed steel channel, or steel pipe and fittings. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed. INSTALLATION - FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal Counterflashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs. B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3 inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked 1 inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counter -flash, and seal. C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device. D. Seal floor drains watertight to adjacent materials. E. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 8 inches minimum high above roofing surface. Flash and counter -flash with sheet metal; seal watertight. Attach Counterflashing mechanical equipment and lap base flashing on roof curbs. Flatten and solder joints. F. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; caulk around top edge. Use storm collars above roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule. CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. SCHEDULES A. PIPE HANGER SPACING HANGER ROD PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACING DIAMETER Inches Feet Inches 1/2 to 1-1/4 6.5 3/8 1-1/2 to 2 10 3/8 2-1/2 to 3 10 1 /2 4 to 6 10 5/8 8 to 12 14 7/8 03878709 09/10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060 - 5 HANGER ROD PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACING DIAMETER 14 to 16 16 1 PVC (All Sizes) 6 3/8 C.I. Bell and Spigot (or No -Hub) and at Joints 5 5/8 END OF SECTION 03878709 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060 - 6 09/ 10 SECT_I.O.N 15074 VIBRATION ISOLATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Vibration isolation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Division 1 and Section 15000 - Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Locate vibration isolators, with static and dynamic load on each. C. Product Data: Provide schedule of vibration isolator type with location and load on each. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and setting dimensions. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that isolators are properly installed and adjusted to meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Division 1 and Section 15000 - Submittals. B. Record actual locations of hangers including attachment points. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Submit to Engineer for approval. 2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Open Spring Isolators: 03878709 09/10 1. Spring Isolators: a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Provide hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity. 2. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. 3. Spring Mounts: Provide with leveling devices, minimum 0.25 inch thick neoprene sound pads, and zinc chromate plated hardware. VIBRATION ISOLATION 15074-1 4. Sound Pads: Size for minimum deflection of 0.05 inch; meet requirements for neoprene pad isolators. B. Restrained Spring Isolators: 1. Spring Isolators: a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Provide hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity. 2. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. 3. Spring Mounts: Provide with leveling devices, minimum 0.25 inch thick neoprene sound pads, and zinc chromate plated hardware. 4. Sound Pads: Size for minimum deflection of 0.05 inch; meet requirements for neoprene pad isolators. 5. Restraint: Provide heavy mounting frame and limit stops. C. Closed Spring Isolators: 1. Spring Isolators: a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Provide hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity. 2. Type: Closed spring mount with top and bottom housing separated with neoprene rubber stabilizers. 3. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. 4. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad isolators, and neoprene side stabilizers with minimum 0.25 inch clearance. D. Restrained Closed Spring Isolators: 1. Spring Isolators: a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Provide hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity. 2. Type: Closed spring mount with top and bottom housing separated with neoprene rubber stabilizers. 3. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. 4. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad isolators, and neoprene side stabilizers with minimum 0.25 inch clearance and limit stops. E. Spring Hanger: 1. Spring Isolators: a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Provide hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity. 2. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. 3. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad isolators. 4. Misalignment: Capable of 20 degree hanger rod misalignment. u 03878709 VIBRATION ISOLATION 15074-2 09/ 10 F. Spring Hanger with Vertical -Limit Stop: 1. Spring Isolators: a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Provide hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity. 2. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. 3. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad isolators. 4. Misalignment: Capable of a maximum 20 degree hanger rod misalignment. 5. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up -stop" on lower threaded rod. G. Neoprene Pad Isolators: 1. Rubber or neoprene waffle pads. a. 30 durometer. b. Minimum 1 /2 inch thick. C. Maximum loading 40 psi. d. Height of ribs shall not exceed 0.7 times width. 2. Configuration: Single layer. H. Rubber Mount or Hanger: Molded rubber designed for 0.5 inches deflection with threaded insert. I. Glass Fiber Pads: Neoprene jacketed pre -compressed molded glass fiber. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install spring hangers without binding. C. On closed spring isolators, adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal operating conditions. D. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially different from installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height. When full load is applied, adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal. E. Support piping connections to isolated equipment resiliently as follows: 1. Up to 4 Inch Diameter: First three points of support. 2. 5 to 8 Inch Diameter: First four points of support. 3. 10 to 12 Inch Diameter: First five points of support. 4. 14 to 16 Inch Diameter: First six points of support. 5. Select three hangers closest to vibration source for minimum 1.0 inch static deflection or static deflection of isolated equipment. Select remaining isolators for minimum 1.0 inch static deflection or 1/2 static deflection of isolated equipment. F. Connect wiring to isolated equipment with flexible hanging loop. 03878709 09/10 VIBRATION ISOLATION 15074-3 3.2 PIPE ISOLATION SCHEDULE Pipe Size Isolated Distance from Equipment Inch 1 120 diameters 2 90 diameters 3 80 diameters 4 75 diameters 6 60 diameters 8 60 diameters 10 60 diameters 12 50 diameters 14 42 diameters 16 38 diameters END OF SECTION 03878709 VIBRATION ISOLATION 15074-4 09/10 s SECTION 15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates. B. Tags. C. Stencils. D. Pipe markers. E. Labels. F. Lockout devices. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Division 1 and Section 15000 - Submittals. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. C. Shop Drawings: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification and valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag numbers. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to ASME A13.1 for color scheme for identification of piping systems and accessories. 03878709 09/10 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15075 - 1 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS i A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Seton Identification Products. 2. Substitutions: Section 15000 - Substitutions. 2.2 NAMEPLATES A. Product Description: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. 2.3 TAGS A. Plastic Tags: 1. Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter or square. , B. Metal Tags: 1. Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter or square with finished edges. - C. Information Tags: 1. Clear plastic with printed "Danger," "Caution," or "Warning" and message; size 3-1/4 x 5-5/8 inches with grommet and self-locking nylon ties. D. Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list of applied tags and location in anodized aluminum frame. 2.4 STENCILS A. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size: 1. Up to 2 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1/2 inch high letters. 2. 2-1/2 to 6 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: I -inch high letters. 3. Over 6 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1-3/4 inches high letters. (._. 4. Ductwork and Equipment: 1-3/4 inches high letters. B. Stencil Paint: As specified in Division 9, semi -gloss enamel, colors and lettering size conforming to ASME A] 3. 1. 03878709 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15075 - 2 09/10 2.5 PIPE MARKERS A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1. B. Plastic Pipe Markers: 1. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi -rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener. C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: „ 1. Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. D. Plastic Underground Pipe Markers: 1. Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. Markers used on nonmetallic pipe shall contain a tracer wire. 2.6 LABELS A. Description: Aluminum, polyester, or laminated Mylar, size 1.9 x 0.75 inches, adhesive .' backed with printed identification. 2.7 LOCKOUT DEVICES A. Lockout Hasps: 1. Anodized aluminum or reinforced nylon hasp with erasable label surface; size minimum 7-1/4 x 3 inches. B. Valve Lockout Devices: 1. Steel device preventing access to valve operator, accepting lock shackle. PART 3 - EXECUTION y 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Division 9 for stencil painting. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Division 9. B. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting. C. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive -resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. D. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and sea] with clear lacquer. For unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels. E. Install tags using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location. F. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe. G. Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices with plastic nameplates. Identify in -line pumps and other small devices with tags. H. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. I. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. J. Identify air terminal units and radiator valves with numbered tags. K. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic. 03878709 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15075 -3 09/ 10 L. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers,_ plastic tape pipe markers, or stenciled painting. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. END OF SECTION 03878709 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15075 - 4 09/10 SECTION 15940 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15900 — "Direct Digital Controls" for control equipment and devices and for submittal requirements. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. DDC: Direct digital control. 1.5 HEATING WATER SYSTEM OPERATION A. The heating water system will be energized when the outside air temperature is 60 deg. F. or below (adj.) B. Variable primary pumps: Pumps HWP-1 and HWP-2 will be selectable as the primary/backup heating water pumps through the EMS by the central plant operator. When the system is enabled, the primary pump will be energized and the lead boiler and associated circulation pump will be energized. If the primary pump fails to start or fails during operation, an alarm will be initiated on the EMS, and the backup pump will be energized. The heating water pumps will modulate their speed via a variable frequency drive in order to maintain the set point differential pressure at the remote pressure sensors. The system shall alarm if either of the pressure sensors are out of the set point pressure differential for longer than a prescribed amount of time (adj). Diminishing heating water demand will cause the above to reverse. C. Boilers: Boilers will be selectable with their respective boiler pump as the lead boiler engages through the EMS. The boilers will be enabled in a rotating group of four sets of four boilers each. The groupings are 13-1 through B-4, B-5 through B-8, B-9 through 13-12 and 13-13 through 13-16; refer to the Boiler Control Schematic. When the lead group of boilers have been chosen, the associated control valves for that group shall open to the main heating water line. Once the first set of grouped boilers are running at full capacity, then the next group may be initiated, their control valves may be opened; if the return heating water temperature has not increased sufficiently. Time and range of temperature increase may be owner adjustable. When a boiler is energized, its associated isolation valve will be opened and its associated circulating_ pump will be started. When a boiler has been de -energized, the reverse process shall occur. If the circulating pump fails to start or fails during operation, an alarm will be initiated on the EMS, the associated boiler and 03878709 09/10 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15940 - 1 f__, circulation pump will be de -energized and the next available boiler will be energized. The heating water set point will be reset based on a straight line reset schedule (adj) as follows: Outside Air Temperature Heating Water Supply Temperature 30 Deg.F. or lower 180 Deg.F. 60 Deg.F. or higher 150 Deg.F. 1.6 CHILLED / CONDENSING WATER SYSTEM OPERATIONS A. The new chilled water system shall be enabled when the ambient temperature goes above 50 Deg.F (adj). When the chilled water system is enabled, the lead chiller (CH-3) shall be enabled to operate according to factory provided controls and within manufacturer established parameters. Chiller (CH-1) and (CH-2) shall be enabled as described in lag chiller operations. B. Under normal conditions, the control valves to the existing plate frame heat exchanger shall be closed and the heat exchanger shall not receive cooling tower water. When ambient temperatures drop below 50 Deg.F (adj) and cooling is still required, the operating chiller shall be disabled, it's associated control valve shall close and the heat exchangers control valves shall open to allow for "free cooling" operation. C. The primary condenser water pump (selectable) shall be enabled when the chilled water system is enabled and shall have constant flow. Establish water flow via pressure differential sensors in the condensing water system. The cooling tower by-pass valve shall be controlled to maintain condensing water supply temperature. The lead cooling tower (CT-3) isolation valves shall open 100% when the lead tower is enabled. The lag cooling towers (CT-1 and CT-2) isolation valves shall open as each cooling tower is enabled. Valves shall shut as each cooling tower is disabled. There shall be a water filtration device to maintain the cooling tower sump free of sand and other foreign material. Each sand filter system (a total of 3) shall backwash according to manufacturer's direction. DDC system shall monitor the filter and shall record the frequency of backwash operations. DDC system shall engage the sand filter system associated with each cooling tower as that cooling tower is engaged. When ambient temperature falls below 40 Deg.F. for more than 30 minutes, the DDC system shall engage the heat trace systems in all three of the sand filter systems and shall engage the basin heaters in each of the three cooling towers. D. The cooling towers shall have one fan each, each with a variable speed motor. Motor speed shall be controlled to maintain cooling tower water supply temperature in range of 50 Deg. F. To 100 Deg.F. E. Civic Center / Mahon Library Loop: The Civic Center and Mahon Library Loops shall have a single chilled water distribution loop to serve both buildings; one primary chilled water pump will circulate water from the central plant to both of the buildings. Provide pressure differential sensors in the chilled water systems at each building to allow for the speed of the pump to be modulated via the variable frequency drives for each pump. Diminishing demand will reverse the process. F. Chiller Control 1. Chiller CH-3 shall be the lead chiller, with CH-1 and CH-2 in the lag position. The lead chiller will the first chiller on and shall operate until the cooling load becomes too great, then either CH-1 or CH-2 will engage. As the lag chiller begins to maintain the loop temperature, the lead chiller (CH-3) may begin backing off, as long as the loop temperature is maintained, until it can drop off and disengage. While the lag chiller is operating alone, if the loop temperature begins to rise, the next lag chiller shall be engaged and increased until loop temperature is maintain. if both lag chillers are operating and the loop temperature increases, the lead chiller 03878709 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15940 - 2 09/ 10 shall be brought back _online and shall increase until loop temperature in maintained. The reverse process shall occur as the load demand lessens. Lead chiller (CH-3): On a call for chilled water, the lead chiller's isolation valves will be opened from 0% to 100%. The primary chilled water pump will be started and will ramp up to the speed required for CH-3. When proof of flow, as sensed by the differential pressure sensor across the chiller has been established, the lead chiller (CH-3) will be enabled. The chiller internal controls will slowly load the chiller over a 5 minute period (adj) until the set point temperature of 45 Deg. F. (adj) is reached. Lag chillers (CH-1 and CH-2): As the load of the lead chiller rises above 90% for 15 minutes and has been on for at least one hour, the lead chiller will be unloaded to minimum capacity. After a one minute delay the lag chiller scheduled to be "next on" will opening its isolation valves from 0% to 100%. The primary chilled water pump will ramp up to the speed required for full lag chiller operation and minimum lead chiller operation. When proof of flow, as sensed by the differential pressure sensors across the chiller has been established, the lag chiller will be enabled. The chillers internal controls will slowly load the chiller over a 5 minute period until the set point temperature of 45 Deg.F. (adj) is reached. Once set point temperature has been reached, the lead chiller shall decrease slowly while the lag chiller increases slowly to the point where the lag chiller is fully carrying the load. The lead chiller will disengage according to manufacturer internal controls, the primary pump will maintain the speed required for the lag chiller, and the lead chiller control valves shall close from 100% to 0%. As the load of the lag chiller rises above 90% for 15 minutes and has been on for at least one hour, the operating lag chiller will unload to 50% capacity. After a one minute delay the other lag chiller will open its isolation valves from 0% to 100%. The primary chilled water pump will ramp up to the speed required for both lag chillers to operate at 50%, when proof of flow, as sensed by the differential pressure sensors across the chillers has been established; the last lag chiller will be enabled. Both of the lag chillers internal controls will slowly load each chiller equally over a 5 minute period until the set point temperature of 45 Deg.F. (adj) is reached. As the load on both lag chillers rise above 90% capacity for more than 15 minutes and has been in operation for at least one hour, the lead chillers isolation valves shall open, the primary pump shall ramp up to a speed for the two lag chillers to operate at 90% and the lead chiller to operate at 50%, when proof of flow, as sensed by the differential pressure sensors across the chillers has been established, the lead chiller will be engaged. The all of the chillers internal controls shall ramp up each system as required maintaining a min. 45 Deg.F. and the primary pump shall ramp up as required to maintain the required water flow through each of the chillers. As cooling load diminishes, reverse the previous process to ramp down and eventually shut down the chilled water system. 1.7 REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM A. Comply with ASHRAE 15. B. When refrigerant leak is detected, alarm is reported to DDC system. C. Refer to Section 15635 "Refrigerant Detection and Alarm", Paragraph 2.2 for monitor alarm sequence. D. See Sequence of Operation on Drawings. 03878709 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15940 - 3 09/10 PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION 03878709 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15940 - 4 09/10 SECTION_15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Insulation jackets. B. Piping system insulation. C. Insulation accessories including vapor retarders, jackets, and accessories. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 2. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. 3. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded -Hot -Plate Apparatus. 4. ASTM C 195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement. 5. ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic -Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement. 6. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 7. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. 8. ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form. 9. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. 10. ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation. 11. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications. 12. ASTM C591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation. 13. ASTM C592 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket -Type Pipe Insulation (Metal -Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type). 14. ASTM C610 - Standard Specification for Molded Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. 15. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. 16. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel. 03878709 09/ 10 MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 1 17. ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation. 18. ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Glass I Fiber, Duct Lining Material). 19. ASTM C1126 - Standard Specification for Faced or Unfaced Rigid Cellular Phenolic Thermal Insulation. 20. ASTM CI136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapory Retarders for Thermal Insulation. 21. ASTM C1290 - Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts. 22. ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 23. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. - 24. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 25. ASTM E162 - Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. 26. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi. B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors: 1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Division 1 and Section 15000 - Submittals. B. Product Data: Submit product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials and thickness for each service, and location. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturers published literature indicating proper installation procedures. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS r; A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section t t with minimum three years experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience approved by manufacturer. - 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and I mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping. LJ 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within range recommended by manufacturer. B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours. 03878709 MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 2 09/ 10 E_ 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. .. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Section 15000 - Product warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MAN MADE MINERAL FIBER A. Manufacturers: 1. Knauf. 2. Johns Manville. 3. Owens Corning. 4. Or approved equal for substitutions: See Section 15000 - Substitutions. B. Insulation: ASTM C547 Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation, Type I, 850 degrees F. C. mt Vapor Retarder Jacket: 1. ASTM C921, White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm -inches. D. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers. E. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: 1. Compatible with insulation. F. Insulating Cement/Mastic: 1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool. G. Glass Fiber Fabric: 1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight. 2. Blanket: 1.0 lb/cu ft density. 3. Weave: 10 x 10. H. Indoor Vapor Retarder Finish: - _ 1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd. weight. 2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation white color. I. Insulating Cement: 1. ASTM C449/C449M. 2.2 PIPE INSULATION AND EQUIPMENT JACKETS A. PVC Plastic Pipe Jacket (For Use Inside Plant): 1. Manufacturers: a. Knauf. b. Johns Manville. C. Owens Corning. d. Substitutions: Section 15000 - Substitutions. 2. Product Description: ASTM D1784, one piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color. 3. Thickness: 15 mil. -, 4. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. 03878709 MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 3 09/ 10 B. PVC Plastic Equipment Jacket (For Use Inside Plant): 1. Manufacturers: a. Knauf. b. Johns Manville. C. Owens Corning. d. Substitutions: Section 15000 - Substitutions. 2. Product Description: Sheet material, off-white color. 3. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F. 4. 5. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.002 perm -inches. 6. Thickness: 15 mil. a 7. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. C. Aluminum Pipe Jacket (For Use Outside): 1. ASTM B 209. i 2. Thickness: 0.020 inch thick. 3. Finish: Stucco embossed. NN 4. Jointing: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps. d _1 5. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protection liner. 6. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum. 2.3 GLASS FIBER, RIGID A. Manufacturers: ' 1. Knauf. 2. Johns Manville. 3. Owens Corning. 1 4. Substitutions: Section 15000 - Substitutions. B. Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible. 1. "K" factor: ASTM C177 or ASTM C518, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F. 3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.1 percent by volume. '" ) 4. Density: 3.0 lb/cu ft. 1 C. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASTM C1136 flexible, low permeance vapor retarders for thermal insulation, Type II. D. Facing: 1 inch galvanized steel hexagonal wire mesh stitched on one face of insulation. I E. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: l . Compatible with insulation. F. Insulating Cement/Mastic: 1. ASTM C 195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool. 2.4 ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR FOAM A. Manufacturers: I. Armaflex. 2. Substitutions: Section 15000 — Substitutions. B. Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form: ASTM C534; Type I, Tubular form. j - 1 03878709 MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 4 09/10 11 C. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: l . Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation. 2.5 POLYISOCYANURATE A. Manufacturers: 1. Dow Chemical Company; Trymer 2000 2. Or approved equal for substitutions: See Section 15000 — Substitutions. B. Insulation: Unfaced, preformed, rigid cellular polyisocyanurate material intended for use as thermal insulation. 1. Comply with ASTM C591, Type I or Type IV, except thermal conductivity (k-value) shall not exceed 0.19 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F after 180 days of aging. 2. Flame -spread index shall be 25 or less and smoke -developed index shall be 50 or less for thickness up to 1-1/2 inches as tested by ASTM E 84. 3. Fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. 4. Vapor Retarder Jacket: a. Pipe Applications: PVDC or PVDC-SSL. b. Equipment Applications: PVDC or PVDC-SSL. C. Vapor Retarder Tape: 1) PVDC coated with pressure sensitive acrylic adhesive. Permeance rating of 0.03 perms. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify piping and equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. B. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints. C. Man made mineral fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1. Furnish factory -applied or field -applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure factory -applied jackets with pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Secure field -applied jackets with outward clinch expanding staples and seal staple penetrations with vapor retarder mastic. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor retarder adhesive or PVC fitting covers. D. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions at equipment. 03878709 09/10 MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 5 E. Man made mineral fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperzture: 1. Furnish factory -applied or field -applied standard jackets. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples or pressure sensitive adhesive system on standard factory -applied jacket and butt strips or both. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. F. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Piping or Equipment 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3. Insert Location: Between support shield and piping and under finish jacket. 4. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of thickness and contour matching - adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 5. Insert Material: Compression resistant insulating material suitable for planned temperature range and service. I_ G. Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies, having fire resistance rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when continuing insulation through assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. Refer to Division 7 or Section 15000 for penetrations of assemblies with fire resistance rating greater than one hour. H. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate. I. Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. J. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Fasten insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands. K. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold equipment, use vapor retarder cement. L. Insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system. M. Mineral fiber insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Provide vapor retarder jackets, factory -applied or field -applied. Finish with glass -cloth and vapor barrier adhesive. N. For hot equipment containing fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions with i removable sections and jackets. O. Mineral fiber insulated equipment containing fluids above ambient temperature: Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor retarder, factory -applied or field -applied. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive. P. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. 3 Q. Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not insulate over. R. Equipment Requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair, or Cleaning: Install insulation for easy removal and replacement without damage. S. For hot equipment containing fluids over 140' F, insulate flanges and unions with removable sections and jackets. T. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor retarder jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor retarder cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located at 3 or 9 o'clock position on side of horizontal piping with overlap facing down to shed water. U. Polyisocyanurate Insulation Installation: 1. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:_- a. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with tape or bands and tighten without deforming insulation materials. Orient longitudinal joints between half sections in 3 and 9 o'clock positions on the pipe. i__ t_ i 03878709 MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 6 09/10 it b. For insulation with factory -applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive or tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor -barrier mastic. C. All insulation shall be tightly butted and free of voids and gaps at all joints. Vapor barrier must be continuous. Before installing jacket material, install vapor -barrier system. 2. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: a. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. b. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, same thickness of adjacent pipe insulation, not to exceed ]-I /2-inch thickness. C. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polyisocyanurate block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 3. Insulation Installation on Fittings and Elbows: a. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: a. Install preformed sections of poly isocyanurate insulation to valve body. b. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. C. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. Plumbing Systems: 1. Domestic Cold Water: a. Man -Made Mineral Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes. 2) Thickness: '/2 inch. B. Heating Systems: ]. Heating Water Supply and Return: a. Man -Made Mineral Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: 1.5 inch and less. (a) Thickness: 1 inch. 2) Pipe Size Range: Greater than 1.5 inch. (a) Thickness: 2 inch. C. Cooling Systems: 1. Chilled Water Piping: a. Man -Made Mineral Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: 1.5 inch and less. (a) Thickness: ] inch. 2) Pipe Size Range: Greater than 1.5 inch. (a) Thickness: 1.5 inch. 2. Interior Condensate Drains and Refrigerant Suction Piping: a. Elastomeric Cellular Foam: 1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes. (a) Thickness:'/4 inch. 03878709 09/] 0 MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 7 D. Exterior Piping Systems: 1. Chilled, Condensing Water, Heating Water, Backwash Filter and Domestic Cold Water Piping: a. Polyisocyanurate Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes. (a) Thickness: 1.5 inch b. Aluminum Jackets 1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes. E. Other Systems: 1. Heating Systems: a. Pump Bodies: 1) Glass Fiber Rigid and/or Semi -Rigid Man -Made Mineral Fiber: (a) Thickness: 2 inch. b. Expansion Tanks: 1) Glass Fiber Rigid and/or Semi -Rigid Man -Made Mineral Fiber: (a) Thickness: 2 inch. 2. Cooling Systems: a. Pump Bodies: 1) Glass Fiber Rigid and/or Semi -Rigid Man -Made Mineral Fiber: (a) Thickness: 1.5 inch. b. Expansion Tanks: 1) Glass Fiber Rigid and/or Semi -Rigid Man -Made Mineral Fiber: (a) Thickness: 1.5 inch. END OF SECTION 03878709 MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 8 09/ 10 f+ h SECTION 1512.0 PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and -Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pressure gages. B. Pressure gage taps. C. Thermometers. D. Thermometer supports. E. Liquid Flow Meters F. Test plugs. G. Flexible connectors. H. Air vents. I. Strainers. J. Flow controls. K. Relief valves. L. Diaphragm -type expansion tanks. M. Air eliminator and dirt separator. N. Dirt separator. O. Sand Filters. P. City water makeup meters. Q. Self regulating heating cable. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B40.1 - Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element. 2. ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels. 3. ASME MFC — 3M — Measurement of Fluid Flow in APES using orifice, nozzle and venturi. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A105/A105M - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications. 2. ASTM A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. 3. ASTM A216/A216M - Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High -Temperature Service. 4. ASTM A395/A395M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure -Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures. 5. ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers. 6. ASTM E77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers. 03878709 09/10 PIPING SPECIALTIES 15120 - 1 l i C. American Water Works Association: lg 1. AWWA C700 - Cold -Water Meters - Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case. 2. AWWA C701 - Cold -Water Meters - Turbine Type, for Customer Service. 3. AWWA C702 - Cold -Water Meters - Compound Type. 4. AWWA C706 - Direct -Reading, Remote -Registration Systems for Cold -Water Meters. 5. AWWA M6 - Water Meters - Selection, Installation, Testing, and Maintenance. D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 393 - Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire -Protection Service. 2. UL 404 - Gauges, Indicating Pressure, for Compressed Gas Service. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Division 1 and Section 15000 - Submittals. B. Product Data: Submit for manufactured products and assemblies used in this Project. 1. Manufacturer's data and list indicating use, operating range, total range, accuracy, and location for manufactured components. 2. Submit product description, model, dimensions, component sizes, rough -in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. 3. Submit schedule indicating manufacturer, model number, size, location, rated capacity, load served, and features for each piping specialty. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit hanging and support methods, joining procedures, application, selection, and hookup configuration. Include pipe and accessory elevations. _ J D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS (, A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of actual locations of components and. instrumentation. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for calibrating instruments, installation instructions, assembly views, servicing requirements, lubrication instruction, and replacement parts list. ti 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept piping specialties on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. C. Protect systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, caps and closures, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system until installation. 03878709 PIPING SPECIALTIES 15120 - 2 09/ 10 : i 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install instruments when areas are under construction, except rough in, taps, supports and test plugs. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements before fabrication. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Section 15000: Product warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRESSURE GAGES s A. Manufacturers: 1. Trerice. 2. Substitutions: Section 15000 - Substitutions. B. Gage: ASME B40.1, UL 404 with bourdon tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, front calibration adjustment, black scale on white background. 1. Case: Cast aluminum. .: 2. Bourdon Tube: Phosphor bronze. 3. Dial Size: 4-1/2 inch diameter. 4. Mid -Scale Accuracy: One percent. 5. Scale: Psi. 2.2 PRESSURE GAGE TAPS A. Manufacturers: f 1. Trerice. 2. Substitutions: Section 15000 - Substitutions. B. Ball Valve: Brass, 1/4 inch NPT for 250 psi. 2.3 STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Trerice. 2. Substitutions: Section 15000 - Substitutions. B. Thermometer: ASTM E1, red appearing mercury, lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish. 1. Size: 9 inch scale. 2. Window: Clear Lexan. 3. Stem: Brass, 3/4 inch NPT, 3-1/2 inch long. 4. Accuracy: 2 percent. 5. Calibration: Degrees F. } 03878709 PIPING SPECIALTIES 15120 - 3 09/10 2.4 THERMOMETER SUPPORTS A. Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensions. Furnish 2 1 /2" extensions where installed in insulated pipe. 2.5 LIQUID FLOW METERS A. Manufacturers: Engineering Measurements Company (EMCO) or approved equal. t- B. Description: Fixed insertion vortex flow meter for installation into a carbon steel thread-olet fitting welded into pipe and measuring flow directly in gallons per minute. C. Construction: Stainless -steel body; with integral transmitter and direct -reading scale. D. Pressure Rating: 400 psig minimum. E. Temperature Rating: 200 deg. F minimum. F. Display: LCD display indicating visual instantaneous rate of flow with 8-digit register to indicate total flow in gallons. G. Integral Transformer: For low -voltage power operation. H. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent full-scale; 30:1 turndown. I. Straight -Pipe Requirements: 10 Diameters upstream and five downstream. J. Output Signal Requirements: Analog output, 4-20 mA analog current loop, current proportional to flow rate. 2.6 TEST PLUGS A. l /4 inch NPT or 1/2 inch NPT brass fitting and cap for receiving l /8 inch outside diameter pressure or temperature probe with: 1. Neoprene core for temperatures up to 200 degrees F. 2. Nordel core for temperatures up to 350 degrees F. B. Test Kit: 1. Carrying case, internally padded and fitted containing: a. One 2-1/2 inch diameter pressure gages. l) Scale range: 0 to 100 psi. b. One gage adapters with 1 /8 inch probe. C. Two 1-1/2 inch dial thermometers. 1) Scale range: 0 to 220 degrees F. 2) Scale range: 25 to 125 degrees F. 2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Corrugated stainless steel or bronze hose with single layer of stainless steel exterior braiding, minimum 9 inches long with copper tube ends; for maximum working pressure 350 psig. 2.8 AIR VENTS A. Manual Type: Short vertical sections of 2 inch diameter pipe to form air chamber, with 1 /8 inch brass needle valve at top of chamber. B. Float Type: 1. Brass or semi -steel body, copper, polypropylene, or solid non-metallic float, stainless steel valve and valve seat; suitable for system operating temperature and f pressure; with isolating valve. 2. Cast iron body and cover, float, bronze pilot valve mechanism suitable for system operating temperature and pressure; with isolating valve. 03878709 PIPING SPECIALTIES 15120 - 4 09/10 C. Washer Type: 1. Brass with hydroscopic fiber discs, vent ports, adjustable cap for manual shut-off, and integral spring loaded ball check valve. 2.9 STRAINERS A. Size 2 inch and Smaller: 1. Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. B. Size 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch: 1. Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 3/64 inch stainless steel perforated screen. C. Size 5 inch and Larger: 1. Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, basket pattern with 1/8 inch stainless steel perforated screen. D. All strainers shall include a 3/4" ball valve and standard male garden hose fitting. 2.10 FLOW CONTROLS A. Manufacturers: 1. Flow Control. 2. Substitutions: Section 15000 - Substitutions. B. Construction: Brass or bronze body with union on inlet, temperature and pressure test plug on inlet and outlet and combination blow -down and back -flush drain. C. Calibration: Control within 5 percent of design flow over entire operating pressure. D. Control Mechanism: Stainless steel or nickel plated brass piston or regulator cup, operating against stainless steel helical or wave formed spring. E. Accessories: In -line strainer on inlet and ball valve on outlet. 2.11 RELIEF VALVES A. Bronze body, Teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated capacities ASME certified and labeled. 2.12 DIAPHRAGM -TYPE EXPANSION TANKS A. Manufacturers 1. Amtrol, Inc. 2. Substitutions: Section 15000 — Substitutions. B. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME Section VII; supplied with National Board Form U-1, rated for working pressure of 150 psig, with flexible butyl diaphragm sealed into tank, and steel support. C. Accessories: Pressure gage and air -charging fitting, tank drain; pre -charge to 12 psig. D. Automatic Cold Water Fill Assembly: Pressure reducing valve, reduced pressure double check backflow prevention device, test cocks, strainer, vacuum breaker, and bypass valves. 03878709 09/ 10 PIPING SPECIALTIES 15120 - 5 2.13 AIR ELIMINATOR AND DIRT SEPARATOR A. Manufacturer: Spirotherm, Inc. B. Model: SPIROVENT Air Eliminator and Dirt Separator, or approved equal. C. Description: Coalescing type; internal bundle consisting of a copper core tube with continuous would copper medium permanently affixed to a core. Separate copper medium wound completely around and permanently affixed to the internal element. D. Construction: Fabricated steel separator housing rated for 150-psig working pressure and capable of handling entering fluid velocities up to 10 feet per second. Construction must comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. E. Venting: Eliminator shall have a separate venting chamber to prevent system contaminants from harming the float and venting valve operation. At the top of the venting chamber shall be an integral full port float actuated brass venting mechanism. Units shall include a valved side tap to flush floating dirt or liquids and for quick bleeding of large amounts of air l__f during system fill or refill. F. Purge: Located on the bottom of the collection chamber with a drain valve attached to flush out collected dirt. Drain valve actuation shall be capable of automatic or manual operation. Automatic operation shall be based upon a timed cycle (adjustable). Route drain line to nearest floor drain. G. Pipe Connections: 4" and Larger: Steel, Class 150 flanges according to ASME B 16.5. H. "High Velocity" type separator is the design standard. 2.14 SAND FILTERS A. Manufacturer: 1. Puroflux. 2. Process Efficiency Products, Inc. 3. Lakos. 4. Substitutions: Section 15000 — Substitutions. B. Contractor shall furnish and install a high efficiency media filtration system. C. Filter system shall operate continuously to remove airborne contaminates from the cooling , water until either a pressure drop across the filter is reached or 24 hours has elapsed. At t either point filter will automatically backwash and returns to original filtration mode. D. Provide a complete system, filler, pump, valves and media as manufactured by Puroflux _J Corporation, Model PF-3042 or approved equal. Refer to schedule for further detail. E. Filter shall be capable of removing 90% of all particles 10-micron and larger with each t pass through the media. F. Unit to be a vessel with media, system matched pump with prefilter with removable basket, and valves for flow control. Total system shall be skid mounted on a epoxy coated steel frame, tested and adjusted at the manufacturers plant prior to shipping. Backwash shall use l city water supply and shall be automatic with a manual override. 1. Filter Vessel to be manufactured of ASMT-A7-carbon-steet, all welded construction, with flanged inlet, outlet, threaded drain, city water connection and air release connections. Tank shall be rated for 100 psig operating pressure. 2. Tank shall be cleaned of all rust and corrosion and provided with an epoxy interior I lining and two coats of enamel paint on the exterior. i 3. Vessel to be equipped with automatic air vent, manual air vent and pressure gauge mounted on tank for accurate reading. i 4. Filter shall be provided with internal under -drain and over -drain piping assembly i designed to equally distribute the water over the filter media evenly. Internal distribution piping shall be 304 stainless steel. 03878709 PIPING SPECIALTIES 15120 - 6 09/ 10 f f 5. System shall be designed / sized for a maximum flow rate at 20 gallons per square foot of filter media surface area. 6. Vessel to have an 11 x 15 top and 4 x 6 side manhole with bolted covers. G. Media to be permanent media, rechargeable by a backwash, at a minimum flow rate of 15 GPM per square foot of surface area. Filter manufacturer shall furnish filter media. 1. Media to be capable of removing particles of 10 micron and larger. H. Filter pump shall be closed coupled centrifugal type with open faced impeller and mechanical seal. Pump shall be provided with a basket strainer with removable basket. Pump to be 190 GPM at 50 TDH. Pump motors to be 3 Hp TEFC type. I. Face piping between filter unit components shall be Schedule 80 PVC. Piping to be provided with service union on connection of tank. J. Valve system shall be designed to control flow through the filter. Valves shall be automatically actuated to provide for filter backwash. Electric actuator with linkage shall be provided to control bronze three-way valves. The differential pressure switch shall control actuator and a 24-hour time clock located in the control panel. K. Filter unit shall be provided with a complete control system. All controls shall be r mounted in a NEMA 4X panel. Panel to contain the following: 1. Filter systems electrical disconnect on door of panel 2. Step down transformer to convert main line power 3 phase to I I0-volt control power. 3. Program timer to control backwash duration cycle. A 24 hour back wash timer, pressure differential switch or manual override push button shall engage 4. A pressure differential switch, factory set to backwash filler. - 5. Overload and short circuit protection. 6. Panel shall have single point connection. Panel to be neatly wired and arranged to ` meet National Electric Code. 2.15 CITY WATER MAKEUP METERS A. Manufacturers: Hersey or approved equal. B. Description: Magnetic drive vertical turbine meter, translator encoder register, and g_ {y 4-20Ma FLO unit and frequency transmitter for direct or transmission of water flow rate information to the Owner's building management system (BMS). C. Meter Construction: Bronze body UNSC84400; with thermoplastic rotor assembly and integral strainer. Stainless steel casing bolts ANSI B18. D. Register Construction: Grilamid lens, copper bottom, self-lubricating thermoplastic gears, ceramic magnet, stainless -steel shafts. Straight reading type, permanently sealed. Register shall comply with AWWA Standard C707. E. FLO unit and Frequency Transmitter Construction: FLO unit shall be factory potted and programmed with an ABS plastic enclosure. Frequency transmitters shall be comprised of solid state, hall effect sensors potted within an aluminum disc or contained inside the register. F. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. G. Temperature Rating: 130 degree F. H. Meter Register Increments: Capable of reading in increments of 100 gallons. I. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent full-scale. J. Output signal requirements: Analog output, 4-20mA analog current loop, current proportional to flow rate. Owner's BMS shall totalize flow reading. 03878709 PIPING SPECIALTIES 15120 - 7 09/ 10 2.16 SELF REGULATING HEATING CABLE { A. Application: Freeze Protection 1. Self-regulating heating cables to provide freeze protection and temperature maintenance to metallic and nonmetallic pipes, tanks and equipment. Heating cables to be rated for heat outputs of 10 watts/foot at 50T when powered at 120 Vac. B. Self-regulating cables are protected by a tinned copper braid and a polyolefin outer jacket to provide grounding and additional mechanical protection for the cable. Install directly on metallic or nonmetallic piping under conventional thermal insulation. Provide kits for power connection, end termination and splicing, plus other accessories, for 1--g quick installation. C. Characteristics 1. 16 AWG Nickel -Plated Copper Bus Wire. 2. Radiation Cross -Linked Polyolefin Heating Core. , 3. Radiation Cross -Linked Polyolefin Primary Dielectric Insulation. 4. 14 AWG (equivalent size) Tinned Copper Metallic Braid. 5. Polyolefin Outer Jacket. 6. Ratings: a. 0.38" @ 5°F, 1.25" @ - 76T Minimum Bend Radius. j b. 30 mA Ground -Fault Protection Required. C. 120 Vac Supply Voltage. d. Maximum Continuous Exposure Temperature: 1) Power On — 150T. 2) Power Off— 185T. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - THERMOMETERS AND GAGES .j A. Install one pressure gage for each pump, locate taps before strainers and on suction and discharge of pump; pipe to gage. B. Install gage taps in piping. - C. Install pressure gages with pulsation dampers. Provide ball valve to isolate each gage. Extend nipples to allow clearance from insulation. D. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller than 2-1/2 inches for installation of thermometer sockets. Allow clearance from insulation. E. Install thermometers in air duct systems on flanges. ) F. Install thermometer sockets adjacent to controls systems thermostat, transmitter, or sensor sockets. G. Coil and conceal excess capillary_ on remote element instruments. H. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate scale. I. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical. J. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero. K. Installation: Install according to manufacturer's instructions. 03878709 PIPING SPECIALTIES 15120 - 8 09/ 10 H 1 F 3.2 INSTALLATION - HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Locate test plugs adjacent to thermometers and thermometer sockets, adjacent to pressure gages and pressure gage taps, adjacent to control device sockets, and as indicated on Drawings. B. Where large air quantities accumulate, provide enlarged air collection standpipes. C. Install manual air vents at system high points. D. For automatic air vents in ceiling spaces or other concealed locations and in mechanical rooms, install vent tubing to nearest drain. E. Provide drain and hose connection with valve on strainer blow down connection. F. Select system relief valve capacity greater than make-up pressure reducing valve capacity. Select equipment relief valve capacity to exceed rating of connected equipment. G. Pipe relief valve outlet to nearest floor drain. H. Where one line vents several relief valves, make cross sectional area equal to sum of individual vent areas. I. Provide combination pump discharge valve on discharge side of base mounted centrifugal pumps. J. Support pump fittings with floor mounted pipe and flange supports. 3.3 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Do not install hydronic pressure gauges until after systems are pressure tested. END OF SECTION 03878709 PIPING SPECIALTIES 15120 - 9 09/10 SECTION 15130 PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. t_ 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Base mounted pumps. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Societyof Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels. B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: l . UL 778 - Motor Operated Water Pumps. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide pumps to operate at system fluid temperatures indicated on Drawings without vapor binding and cavitation, are non -overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. 1.5 SUBMITTALS --- A. Submit the following in accordance with the General and Special Conditions and Section 15000 - Submittals. B. Product Data: Submit certified pump curves showing performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Submit also, manufacturer model number, dimensions, service sizes, and finishes. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application, selection, and hookup configuration with pipe and accessory elevations. Submit hanging and support requirements and recommendations. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit installation instructions, servicing requirements, assembly views, lubrication instructions, and replacement parts list. A 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience. 03878709 PUMPS 15130 - l 09/ 10 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Fi" A. Protect systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Section 15000 - Product warranties. L I l EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish one set of mechanical seals for each pump. _3 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 BASE MOUNTED PUMPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Weinman. 2. Taco. _ 3. Paco. 4. Grundfos. 5. Or approved equal for substitutions: See Section 15000 — Submittals. B. Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, direct connected, radial or horizontal split casing, for 175 psig maximum working pressure or end -suction type. Refer to schedule for more detail. C. Casing: Cast iron, with suction and discharge gage ports, renewable bronze casing wearing ..j rings, seal flush connection, drain plug, flanged suction and discharge. D. Impeller: Bronze, fully enclosed, keyed to shaft. E. Bearings: Grease lubricated roller or ball bearings. F. Shaft: Alloy steel with copper, bronze, or stainless steel shaft sleeve. G. Seal: Carbon rotating against stationary ceramic seat, 225 degrees F maximum continuous , operating temperature. H. Drive: Flexible coupling with coupling guard. I. Baseplate: Cast iron or fabricated steel with integral drain rim. J. Electrical Characteristics and Components: 1. Electrical Characteristics: In accordance with Division 16. 2. Motors: 1750 rpm unless specified otherwise. 3. Wiring Terminations: Furnish terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor_„ quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70. t [ 03878709 PUMPS 15130 - 2 09/ 10 t' PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION I]. A. Provide pumps to operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non -overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. B. Install long radius reducing elbows or reducers between pump and piping. Support piping adjacent to pump so no weight is carried on pump casings. For close coupled or base mounted pumps, install supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches and over. C. Install pumps on vibration isolators. D. Install flexible connectors at or near pumps where piping configuration does not absorb vibration. E. Provide line sized shut-off valve and pump suction fitting on pump suction, and line sized soft seat check valve, balancing valve, and shut-off valve or combination pump discharge valve on pump discharge. F. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent to pump so no weight is carried on pump casings. Provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches and larger. G. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings. H. Provide drains for bases and seals. Pipe to nearest floor drain. I. Check, align, and certify alignment of base mounted pumps prior to start-up. J. Install pumps on concrete housekeeping base, with anchor bolts, set and level, and grout in place. K. Lubricate pumps before start-up. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect for alignment of base mounted pumps. 03878709 09/l 0 END OF SECTION PUMPS 15130 - 3 SECTION 15180 HYDRONIC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Heating water piping, above ground. B. Chilled water piping, above ground. C. Condenser water piping. D. Equipment drains and overflows. E. Unions and flanges. F. Valves. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. 2. ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings. 3. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 4. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 5. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping. 6. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. 7. ASME Section IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Welding and Brazing Qualifications. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless. 2. A216/A216M - Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High- Temperature Service. 3. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. 4. ASTM A395/A395M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure -Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures. 5. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 6. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal. 7. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 8. ASTM B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. 03878709 HYDRONIC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 15180 - 1 09/10 9. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers. r 10. ASTM F1476 - Standard Specification for Performance of Gasketed Mechanical Couplings for Use in Piping Applications. C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding. 2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. D. American Water Works Association: 1. AWWA C105 - American National Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile -Iron Pipe Systems. 2. AWWA C110 - American National Standard for Ductile -Iron and Grey -Iron Fittings, 3 in. through 48 in., for Water and Other Liquids. 3. AWWA C111 - American National Standard for Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 4. AWWA C151 - American National Standard for Ductile -Iron Pipe, Centrifugally - Cast, for Water. E. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1..,.,. 1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer..s 2. MSS SP 67 - Butterfly Valves. 3. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. 4. MSS SP 70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 5. MSS SP 71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 6. MSS SP 78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 7. MSS SP 80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. l 8. MSS SP 85 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded. 9. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices. 10. MSS SP 110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket -Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION t_..1 A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, ensure system components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Provide ...... '" necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided. B. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners in accessible locations. C. Use unions, flanges, and couplings downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves, equipment or other apparatus. j D. Use non -conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals in open systems. [[ E. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASTM V31.9, MSS SP69 unless indicated otherwise. Refer Section I5060. F. Use ball and butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems or vertical risers. G. Use ball or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. j H. Use spring loaded check valves on discharge of condenser water and cooling tower water pumps. I. Use plug cocks for throttling service. Use non -lubricated plug cocks only when shut-off or ! isolating valves are also provided. r J. Use only butterfly valves in chilled water, and condenser water systems for throttling and isolation service. 03878709 HYDRONIC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 15180 - 2 09/10 K. Use lug end butterfly valves to isolate equipment. L. Use 3/4 inch ball valves with cap for drains at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment. Pipe to nearest floor drain. M. Flexible Connectors: Use at or near pumps where piping configuration does not absorb vibration. 1. Flexible type grooved joint mechanical couplings equal to Victaulic Style 77, may be used in lieu of flexible connectors for vibration isolation at equipment connections. Three (3) couplings shall be placed in close proximity to the vibration source. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Division 1 and Section 15000 - Submittals. B. Product Data: 1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit manufacturers catalog information. 2. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for each service. C. Test Reports: Indicate results of piping system pressure test. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit hanging and support methods, joining procedures and isolation. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. ' F. Welders' Certificate: Include welders' certification of compliance with ASME Section IX. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves, equipment and accessories. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for installation and changing components, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE { E A. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.1 or ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping systems and ASME Section IX for welding materials and procedures. B. Perform Work in accordance with AWS DLL for welding hanger and support attachments f to building structure. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Fabricator or Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. B. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. C. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system. 03878709 HYDRONIC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 15180 - 3 09/10 1.1.0 FIELD .MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Section 15000: Product warranties. 1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish two packing kits for each size and valve type. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HEATING WATER PIPING, ABOVE GROUND A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, black (all piping 4 inches and larger). 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A234/A234M, forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: Grooved for mechanical couplings or welded. P B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn (all piping less than 4 inches). 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper. 2. Tee Connections: Mechanically extracted collars with notched and dimpled branch t tube. 3. Joints: a. Grooved for mechanical couplings. b. Solder, lead free, ASTM 1332, 95-5 tin -antimony, or tin and silver, with fi melting range 430 to 535 degrees F or braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy with melting range 1190 to 1480 degrees F. 2.2 CHILLED WATER PIPING, ABOVE GROUND A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, black (all piping 4 inches and larger). 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A234/A234M, forged steel welding _1 type. 2. Joints: Grooved for mechanical couplings or welded._. B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn (all piping less than 4 inches). I. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper. 2. Tee Connections: Mechanically extracted collars with notched and dimpled branch tube. ...� 3. Joints: a. Grooved for mechanical couplings. b. Solder, lead free, ASTM B32, 95-5 tin -antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range 430 to 535 degrees F or braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy with melting range 1190 to 1480 degrees F. u 03878709 HYDRONIC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 15180 - 4 09/ 10 2.3 CONDENSER WATER PIPING, ABOVE GROUND A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, black (all piping 4 inches and larger). 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A234/A234M, forged steel i welding type. 2. Joints: Grooved for mechanical couplings or welded. B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn (all piping less than 4 inches). 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper. 2. Tee Connections: Mechanically extracted collars with notched and dimpled branch tube. 3. Joints: a. Grooved for mechanical couplings b. Solder, lead free, ASTM B32, 95-5 tin -antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range 430 to 535 degrees F or braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy with melting range 1190 to 1480 degrees F. 2.4 CONDENSER WATER PIPING, ABOVE GROUND A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, black (all piping 4 inches and larger). 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A234/A234M, forged steel welding a type. 2. Joints: Grooved for mechanical couplings or welded. B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn (all piping less than 4 inches). r r 1. Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast brass, or ASME B 16.22 solder wrought copper. 2. Tee Connections: Mechanically extracted collars with notched and dimpled branch tube. 3. Joints: a. Grooved for mechanical couplings. b. Solder, lead free, ASTM B32, 95-5 tin -antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range 430 to 535 degrees F or braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy with melting range 1190 to 1480 degrees F. zr 2.5 EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper. 2. Joints: Solder, lead free, ASTM B32, 95-5 tin -antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range 430 to 535 degrees F. 2.6 UNIONS AND FLANGES A. Unions for Pipe 2 Inches and Under: 1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, malleable iron, threaded. 2. Copper Pipe: Bronze, soldered joints. B. Flanges for Pipe Over 2 Inches: 1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig forged steel, slip-on. 2. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene. 03878709 HYDRONIC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 15180 - 5 09/ 10 2.13 GROOVED MECHANICAL COUPLINGS A. At Contractor's option, roll or cut -grooved pipe and cut -grooved couplings and fittings may be used in lieu of welded and screwed joints for the following systems having a design working pressure rating at or below 300-psig. ' 1. Chilled Water (Above Grade). 2. Condenser Water (Above Grade). 3. Heating Water (Above Grade). B. Manufacturers: Victaulic, or approved equal. C. Couplings: Ductile -iron housing and synthetic EDPM rubber gasket suitable for , 230 degree F continuous service. Gasket shall be of central cavity pressure -responsive -} design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings. Manufacturer gasket lubricant shall be used on all gaskets prior to assembly. D. Sizes and Characteristics: Victaulic models are listed for basis of design. 3 1. For sizes 2-1/2" through 12", the first three couplings adjoining mechanical equipment shall be Victaulic Style 77 in lieu of flexible connectors. Other couplings shall be Style 07. I a a. Flange adapters shall be Victaulic Style 741 or Style 743. 2. For sizes 14" through 24", Victaulic AGS series couplings shall be used. Couplings �- shall consist of two ductile iron housings with lead-in chamfer on housing key and wide -width gasket. a. Rigid Type: Housing key designed to fill the wedge shaped AGS groove and provide rigidity and system support and hanging in accordance with ANSI B31.1 and B31.9 Victaulic Style W07. b. Flexible Type: Housing key designed to fit into the wedge shaped AGS groove and allow for linear and angular movement. Victaulic Style W77. it E. Quality Assurance: 1. Installation of all piping systems utilizing this option shall be in accordance with system manufacturer's published recommendations. q 2. The grooved coupling manufacturer's factory trained representative shall provide on -site training for contractor's field personnel in the use of grooving tools, application of groove, and installation of grooved joint products. The manufacturer's representative shall periodically visit the jobsite and review installation. Contractor shall remove and replace any joints deemed improperly I installed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps. E. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems. Treatment of the system shall be in accordance with the existing water treatment system. Clarify the exact requirements with the Owner's representative. 03878709 HYDRONIC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 15180 - 8 09/10 3.2 INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Refer to Section 15060. 3.3 INSTALLATION — VIBRATION ISOLATION A. Refer to Section 15074. 3.4 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install heating water, chilled water, condenser water, cooling tower water, and piping in accordance with ASME B31.1 or ASME B31.9. B. Route piping parallel to building structure and maintain gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space. D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. E. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. Refer to Section 15060. F. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves and piping. Refer to Division 7. G. Install pipe identification in accordance with Section 15075. H. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. 1. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access doors. Y J. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level. K. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds. L. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories, ready for finish painting. Refer to Division 9. M. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. N. Insulate piping; refer to Section 15080. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test chilled water, heating water, condenser water, and cooling tower piping systems in accordance with Section 15000. B. Flush and clean chilled water, heating water, condenser water, and cooling tower piping systems in accordance with Section 15000. Flush these hydronic systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens and/or filters after Section 15000 procedures. END OF SECTION 03878709 1 YDRONIC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 15180 - 9 09/10 SECTION 15195 GAS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Natural gas piping above grade. B. Unions and flanges. C. Valves. D. Pipe hangers and supports. E. Natural gas pressure regulators. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. 2. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes. 3. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. 4. ASME Section IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Welding and Brazing Qualifications. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless. 2. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. 3. ASTM B68 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube, Bright Annealed. 4. ASTM B75 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube. 5. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 6. ASTM B280 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service. 7. ASTM B749 - Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products. 8. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers. C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. D. American Water Works Association: 1. AWWA C105 - American National Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile -Iron Pipe Systems. E. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer. 2. MSS SP 67 - Butterfly Valves. 3. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. 4. MSS SP 78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 03878709 GAS PIPING 15195 - 1 09/ 10 $, 5. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices. 6. MSS SP I10 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket -Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends. F. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code. 2. NFPA 58 - Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code. 7 G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 842 - Valves for Flammable Fluids. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide compatible system components and joints. Use non -conducting dielectric connections when joining dissimilar metals in systems. F11 B. Provide flanges, unions, or couplings at locations requiring servicing. Use unions, flanges, or couplings downstream of valves and at equipment connections. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves, equipment. ci I C. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, or MSS SP 89. V1 D. Use plug valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Division 1 and Section 15000: Submittals. B. Product Data: 1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit manufacturers catalog information. 2. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for each service. 3. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog information including load capacity. 4. Piping Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information including capacity, rough -in requirements, and service sizes for the following: a. Natural gas pressure regulators. C. Test Reports: Indicate results of gas piping system pressure test. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within previous 12 months. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves, piping system, and system components. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit for valves and gas pressure regulators installation instructions, spare parts lists, and exploded assembly views. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform natural gas Work in accordance with NFPA 54. B. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping systems and ASME Section IX for welding materials and procedures. 03878709 GAS PIPING 15195 -2 09/ 10 C. Perform Work in accordance with AWS D1.1 for welding hanger and support attachments to building structure. D. Perform Work in accordance with State and local standards. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. B. Protect piping and fittings from soil and debris with temporary end caps and closures. Maintain in place until installation. Furnish temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Section 15000: Product warranties. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED A. Polyethylene Pipe: ASTM D2513, SDR 1 l . 1. Fittings: ASTM D2683 or ASTM D2513 socket type. 2. Joints: Fusion welded. 2.2 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: Threaded for pipe 1-1/2 inches and smaller; welded for pipe 2 inches and larger. 2.3 UNIONS AND FLANGES A. Unions for Pipe 2 inches and Smaller: 1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, malleable iron, threaded. 2. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. B. Flanges for Pipe 2-1/2 inches and Larger: 1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, forged steel, slip-on flanges. 2. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene gaskets. 03878709 GAS PIPING 15195 - 3 09/ 10 l� t 2.4 PLUG VALVES A. Manufacturers: I . DeZURIK, Unit of SPX Corp. ; 2. Flow Control Equipment, Inc. 3. Homestead Valve Model. 4. Substitutions: Section 15000. B. 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 78, Class 150, semi -steel construction, rectangular port, regular opening, pressure lubricated, teflon packing, threaded ends. Furnish one plug valve wrench for every ten plug -valves with minimum of one wrench. C. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 78, Class 150, semi -steel construction, rectangular port, - regular opening, pressure lubricated, teflon packing, flanged ends. Furnish wrench -operated. 2.5 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Conform to NFPA 54, ASME 31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, and MSS SP 89. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to ]-]/2 inch: Malleable iron or Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. D. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. E. Wall Support for Pipe 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hook. t F. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp or Angle ring. G. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 2.6 NATURAL GAS PRESSURE REGULATORS A. Product Description: Spring loaded, general purpose, self-operating service regulator including internal relief type diaphragm assembly and vent valve. Diaphragm case can be rotated 360 degrees in relation to body. 1. Temperatures: minus 20 degrees F to 150 degrees F. 2. Body: Cast iron or Steel. 3. Spring case, lower diaphragm casing, union ring, seat ring and disk holder: Aluminum. 4. Disk, diaphragm, and O-ring: Nitrite..._ 5. Maximum inlet pressure: 150 psig 6. Furnish sizes 2 inches and smaller with threaded ends. Furnish sizes 2-1/2 inches f and larger with flanged ends. j f 7. Provide 2'' vent from regulator through roof, as recommended by the manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION_ 3.1 PREPARATION IIt �S A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 03878709 GAS PIPING 15195 - 4 09/10 11-] 3.2 INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Install hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.9, ASTM F708 and MSS SP 89. B. Support and spacing of horizontal piping hangers shall be in accordance with local code. C. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. ti D. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. E. Install hangers to allow 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. G. Where installing several pipes in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe hangers or trapeze hangers. H. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports in accordance with Division 9. Finish paint exposed steel hangers and supports in accordance with Division 9. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. 1. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. J. Refer to Section 15000 for Roof mounted piping supports. 3.3 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54. B. Verify connection to existing piping system size and location is as indicated on Drawings. C. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than 2 feet of cover. D. Establish minimum separation of gas piping from other services piping in accordance with local code. E. Remove scale and dirt on inside of piping before assembly. F. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Section 15000. G. Route pipe in straight line. H. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints. 1. Nonmetallic Pipe: Install plastic ribbon tape with trace wire continuous buried 12 inches below finish grade, above pipe line. Coordinate with Sections 15000 and 15075. J. Pipe Cover and Backfilling: 1. Backfill trench in accordance with Section 15000. 2. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill material to attain required compaction density. 3. After hydrostatic test, evenly backfill in accordance with Section 15000. 4. Do not use wheeled or tracked vehicles for tamping. 3.4 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54. B. Provide non -conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. D. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space. E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. 03878709 09/ 10 GAS PIPING 15195 - 5 G. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. Refer to Section 15050. i...) H. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves and piping. Refer to Division 7. I. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. J. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. K. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, weld, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer. L. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility company. M. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not pre -finished, ready for finish painting. Refer to Division 9. N. Install identification on piping systems. Refer to Section 15075. O. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. P. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system. Q. All natural gas piping within 18" of finished grade shall be welded and wrapped. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Pressure test natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54. END OF SECTION CI� I'l 03878709 GAS PIPING 15195 - 6 09/ 10 SECTION 15471 HVAC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes the following HVAC water -treatment systems: 1. Water filtration units for HVAC makeup water. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for the following products: 1. Water filtration units. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water filtration units, and controllers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. L4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FILTRATION EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturers: 1. Coordinate with Owner for current water treatment provider under maintenance contract. B. Closed Loop Chilled Water System 1. Contractor shall furnish and install a high efficiency media filtration system. Filter system shall operate continuously to remove contaminates from the chilled water closed -loop system until either a pressure drop across the filter is reached or 24 hours has elapsed. At either point filter will automatically backwash and return to original filtration mode. 2. Provide a complete system, filter, pump, valves and media. 3. Filter shall be capable of removing 90% of all particles 5-micron and large with each pass through the media. 03878709 HVAC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT 15471 - 1 09/ 10 4.. Unit to be..a_vessel with media, system matched pump, and valves for flow control. Total system shall be assembled, tested and adjusted at the manufacturer's plant prior to shipping. Backwash shall be automatic with a manual override using city water supply. a. Filter Vessel to be manufactured of ASMT-A7-carbon-steet, all welded construction, with inlet, outlet, drain, city water and air release connections. Tank shall be rated for 150 psig operating pressure. b. Tank shall be cleaned of all rust and corrosion and provided with an epoxy interior lining and two coats of enamel paint on the exterior. C. Vessel to be equipped with manual air vent and pressure gauge mounted on tank for accurate reading. d. Filter shall be provided with internal under and over drain piping assemblies designed to equally distribute the water over through the filter media evenly. Under -drain and over -drain shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel components. e. System shall be designed/sized for a maximum flow rate of 20 gallons per square foot of filter media surface area. f. Vessel to have a 4 x 6 manhole with bolted cover on top of vessel. 5. Media to be permanent media, rechargeable by a backwash, at a minimum flow rate of 15 GPM per square foot of surface area. The media shall be AVVWA approved or NSF. a. Media to be capable of removing particles 5-micron or larger from the closed loop. 6. Filter pump shall be closed coupled, centrifugal type with open face impeller and mechanical seal rated for system PSI. Pump to be 35 GPM at 50 TDH. Pump motors shall be TEFC, minimum 1 HP. A basket pre -strainer with removable strainer shall be provided. 7. Face piping between filter unit components to be provided with service union on connection to tank. 8. Valve system shall be designed to control flow through the filter. Valves shall be automatically actuated to provide for filter backwash using city water supply. Four (4) two-way bronze ball valves shall be provided. Actuators to be electrical operated with linkage to control valve movement. 9. Filter unit shall be provided with a complete control system. All control shall be mounted in a NEMA 4X rated watertight FRP enclosure. Panel to contain the following: a. Electrical disconnect on door of panel. b. Step down transformer to convert main line power 3 phase, to 110-volt control power. C. Program timer to control backwash duration cycle. A 24 hour back wash timer, manual override push button shall engage back wash. d. Overload and short circuit protection. e. Panel shall have single point connection to panel and shall be neatly wired and arranged to meet National Electric Code and be UL or E & L Stamped. 10. Total system to be mounted on a 304 stainless steel channel base skid for ease of installation. C. Closed Loop Hot Water System 1. Contractor shall furnish and install a high efficiency media filtration system. Filter system shall operate continuously to remove contaminates from the hot water system until either a pressure drop across the filter is reached or 24 hours has elapsed. At either pint filter will automatically backwash and return to original filtration mode. 03878709 HVAC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT 15471 - 2 09/10 i_� 2. Provide a complete system, filter, pump, valves and media. 3. Filter shall be capable of removing 90% of all particles 5-micron and large with each pass through the media. 4. Unit to be a vessel with media, system matched pump, and valves for flow control. Total system shall be assembled, tested and adjusted at the manufacturer's plant prior to shipping. Backwash shall be automatic using city water supply with a manual override. a. Filter Vessel to be manufactured of 304 stainless steel, with inlet, outlet, drain, city water and air release connections. Tank shall be rated for 150 psig operating pressure. b. All filter components shall be suitable for 300' F water. C. Vessel to be equipped with manual air vent and liquid filled inlet and outlet jl pressure gauges stainless steel case for accurate reading. d. Filter shall be provided with internal under and over drain piping assemblies designed to equally distribute the water over through the filter media evenly. Under -drain and over -drain shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel components. e. System shall be designed / sized for a maximum flow rate of 20 gallons per square foot of filter media surface area. f. Vessel to have a 4 x 6 manhole with bolted cover on top of vessel. 5. Media to be permanent media, rechargeable by a backwash, at a minimum flow rate of 15 GPM per square foot of surface area. The media shall be AVVWA approved or NSF. -z a. Media to be capable of removing particles 5-micron or larger from the closed loop. 6. Filter pump shall be closed coupled, centrifugal type with open face impeller and mechanical seal rated for system PSI. Pump to be 35 GPM at 50 TDH. Pump motors shall be TEFL, minimum 1 HP. A basket pre -strainer with removable strainer shall be provided. 7. Face piping between filter unit components to be provided with service union on connection to tank. 8. Valve system shall be designed to control flow through the filter. Valves shall be automatically actuated to provide for filter backwash using city water supply. Four (4) high temperature two-way bronze ball valves shall be provided for 300' F water. 9. Actuators to be electrical operated with linkage to control valve movement. Filter unit shall be provided with a complete control system. All control shall be mounted in a NEMA 4X rated watertight FRP enclosure. Panel to contain the following: a. Electrical disconnect on door of panel. b. Step down transformer to convert main line power 3 phase, to II0-volt control power. C. Program timer to control backwash duration cycle. A 24 hour back wash timer, manual override push button shall engage back wash. d. Overload and short circuit protection. e. Panel shall have single point connection to panel and shall be neatly wired and arranged to meet National Electric Code and be UL or E & L Stamped. 10. Total system to be mounted on a 304 stainless steel channel base skid for ease of installation. ' 03878709 HVAC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT 15471 -3 09/ 10 _s D. Cooling Tower Water Filter 1. Contractor shall furnish and install a high efficiency media filtration system. 2. Filter system shall operate continuously to remove airborne contaminates from the cooling water until either a pressure drop across the filter is reached or 24 hours has elapsed. At either point filter will automatically backwash and returns to original filtration mode. 3. Provide a complete system, filler, pump, valves and media. 4. Filter shall be capable or removing 90% of all particles five -micron and larger with each pass through the media. 5. Unit to be a vessel with media, system matched pump with prefilter with removable basket, and valves for flow control. Total system shall be skid mounted on a stainless steel frame, tested and adjusted at the manufacturer's plant prior to shipping. Backwash shall use city water supply and shall be automatic with a manual override. a. Filter Vessel to be manufactured of ASMT-A7-carbon-steet, all welded construction, with flanged inlet, outlet, threaded drain, city water connection and aiT__release connections. Tank shall be rated for 100 psig operating pressure. b. Tank shall be cleaned of all rust and corrosion and provided with an epoxy interior lining and two coats of enamel paint on the exterior. C. Vessel to be equipped with automatic air vent, manual air vent and pressure gauge mounted on tank for accurate reading. d. Filter shall be provided with internal under -drain and over -drain piping assembly designed to equally distribute the water over the filter media evenly. Internal distribution piping shall be 304 stainless steel. e. System shall be designed / sized for maximum flow rate at 20 gallons per square foot of filter media surface area. f. Vessel to have an 1 1 x 15 top and 4 x 6 side manhole with bolted covers. 6. Media to be permanent media, rechargeable by a backwash, at a minimum flow rate of 15 GPM per square foot of surface area. Filter manufacturer shall furnish filter media. Media to be AWWA approved or NSF. a. Media to be capable of removing particles of 5 micron and larger. 7. Filter pump shall be closed coupled centrifugal type with open faced impeller and mechanical seal. Pump shall be provided with a basket strainer with removable basket. Pump to be 142 GPM at 50 TDH. Pump motors to be 3 Hp TEFC type. 8. Face piping between filter unit components shall be Schedule 40 steel. Piping to be provided with service union on connection of tank. 9. Valve system shall be designed to control flow through the filter. Valves shall be automatically actuated to provide for filter backwash. Electric actuator with linkage shall be provided to control bronze three-way valves. The differential pressure switch shall control actuator and a 24-hour time clock located in the control panel. 10. Filter unit shall be provided with a complete control system. All controls shall be mounted in a NEMA 4 X rated FRP panel. Panel to contain the following: a. Filter systems electrical disconnect on door of panel. b. Step down transformer to convert main line power 3 phase to I I0-volt control power. C. Program timer to control backwash duration cycle. A 24 hour back wash timer, pressure differential switch or manual override push button shall engage. d. A pressure differential switch, factory set to backwash filler. 03878709 HVAC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT 09/ 10 15471 -4 e. Overload and short circuit protection. Panel shall have single point connection. Panel to be neatly wired and arranged to meet National Electric Code. f. Panel to be U.L. or E & L stamped. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Install unit on concrete bases, level and plumb. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible. B. Install interconnecting piping and controls furnished by equipment manufacturer but not factory installed. `. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. } C. Make piping connections between HVAC water -filtration equipment and dissimilar -metal piping with dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." D. Install shutoff valves on HVAC water -filtration equipment inlet and outlet. E. Confirm applicable electrical requirements in Division 16 Sections for connecting electrical equipment. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing. B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections. 2. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have been cleaned, flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before introducing chemicals for water -treatment system. 3. Place HVAC water -filtration system into operation and calibrate controls during the preliminary phase of HVAC systems' startup procedures. 4. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and satisfactory test results are achieved. 5. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. r 6. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced water piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved. _r 03878709 HVAC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT 15471 - 5 09/ 10 7. Ca _and_ e_ct. i to static water pressure of 50 si above operating pressure, P � PPS P P g P g without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects. 8. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until no leaks exist. D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC water -filtration systems and equipment. _ END OF SECTION 3 f t� 03878709 HVAC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT 15471 - 6 09/10 r I SECTION_15500 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) with By -Pass. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NEMA ICS 3.1 - Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation and Operation of Variable Frequency Drive Systems. B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). C. UL, and cUL Approved. D. IEEE Standard 444 (ANSI-C343). E. IEEE Standard 519. F. IEC: 146A. G. UL 508C (Power Conversion). H. CSA 22.2 No. 14-95 (Industrial Control Equipment). I. UL 1995 (Plenum rating). J. EN 50178 (LVD). K. EN 61800-3. L. IEC 529. M. FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Subpart B. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of the Division 1 and Section 15000 Specifications. B. Shop Drawings shall include: Wiring diagrams, electrical schematics, front and side views of enclosures, overall dimensions, conduit entrance locations and requirements, nameplate legends, physical layout and enclosure details. C. Product Data: Provide data sheets showing; voltage, ratings of customer use switching and over -current protective devices, short circuit ratings, and weights. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions and Technical Manuals: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under regulatory requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of adjustable speed drive. Document the sequence of operation, cautions and warnings, trouble shooting procedures, spare parts lists and programming guidance. 03878709 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 15500 - 1 09/10 1_.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. VFD shall have a minimum MTBF (mean time between failure) rating of 28 years (245,280 Hours). 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer must have a minimum of 25 years of documented experience, specializing in variable frequency drives. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide VFD warranty, for one year from date of startup, not to exceed 18 months from date of shipment. Warranty shall include parts, and labor allowance for repair hours. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide enclosed variable frequency drives suitable for operation at the current, voltage, and horsepower indicated on the schedule. Conform to requirements of NEMA ICS 3.1. 2.2 RATINGS A. VFD must operate, without fault or failure, when voltage varies plus 10% or minus 15% from rating, and frequency varies plus or minus 5% from rating. B. Refer to equipment schedules for voltage requirements. C. Displacement Power Factor: 0.98 over entire range of operating speed and load. D. Operating Ambient Temperature: 14 degrees F to 104 degrees F. E. Humidity: 0% to 95% non -condensing. F. Altitude: to 3,300 feet, higher altitudes achieved by derating. G. Minimum Efficiency: 96% at half speed; 98% at full speed. H. Starting Torque: 100% starting torque shall be available from 0.5 Hz. to 60 Hz. I. Overload capability: 110% of rated FLA (Full Load Amps) for 60 seconds; 150% of rated FLA, instantaneously. J. The VFD must meet the requirements for Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) above 7 MHz as specified by FCC regulations, part 15, subpart J, Class A devices. K. VFDs must have a minimum short circuit rating of 65K amps RMS (1 OOK amps RMS with a DC bus reactor) without additional input fusing. 2.3 DESIGN A. VFD shall employ microprocessor based inverter logic, isolated from all power circuits B. VFD shall include surface mount technology with protective coating. 03878709 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 15500 - 2 09/ 10 C_ VFD shall employ a PWM (Pulse Width Modulated) power electronic system, consisting of. 1. Input Section: a. VFD input power stage shall convert three-phase AC line power into a fixed DC voltage via a solid state full wave diode rectifier, with MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) surge protection. 2. Intermediate Section: a. DC bus as a supply to the VFD output Section shall maintain a fixed voltage with filtering and short circuit protection. b. DC bus shall be interfaced with the VFD diagnostic logic circuit, for continuous monitoring and protection of the power components. 3. Output Section: a. Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBTs) shall convert DC bus voltage to -- variable frequency and voltage. b. The VFD shall employ PWM sine coded output technology to power the motor. D. The VFD must be selected for operation at carrier frequencies at or above 5 kHz without derating to satisfy the conditions for current, voltage, and horsepower as indicated on the equipment schedule. Exception to this requirement is allowedonlyfor VFDs providing 506 amps or more. E. VFD shall have an adjustable carrier frequency: The carrier frequency shall have a minimum of six settings to allow adjustment in the field. F. VFD shall have a quick disconnect, removable control 1/0 terminal block to simplify control wiring procedures. G. VFD shall include two independent analog inputs. One shall be 0-10 VDC. The other shall be programmable for either 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA. Either input shall respond to a programmable bias and gain. H. VFD shall include a minimum of seven multi -function digital input terminals, capable of being programmed to determine the function on a change of state. These terminals shall - provide up to 30 functions, including, but not limited to: t 1. Remote/Local operation selection 2. Detection of external fault condition 3. Remote Reset 4. Multi -step speed commands 5. Run permissive 6. Floating control I. VFD shall include two 0-10 VDC analog output for monitoring, or "speed tracking" the VFD. The analog output signal will be proportional to output frequency, output current, output power, PID (Proportional, Integral, Derivative control) feedback or DC bus voltage. J. VFD shall provide terminals for remote input contact closure, to allow starting in the automatic mode. K. VFD shall include at least one external fault input, which shall be programmable for a normally open or normally closed contact. These terminals can be used for connection of firestats, freezestats, high pressure limits or similar safety devices. L. VFD shall include two form "A" contacts and one form "C" contact, capable of being programmed to determine conditions that must be met in order for them to change state. These output relay contacts shall be rated for at least lA at 250 VAC and shall provide up L J to 18 functions, including, but not limited to: 1. Speed agree detection. 2. Low and high frequency detection. 03878709 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 15500 - 3 09/ 10 (g l 3. Missing frequency reference detection. (_ 4. Overtorque/Undertorque detection. 5. Drive Running. 6. Drive Faulted. M. VFD shall include a power loss ride through of 2 seconds. N. VFD shall have DC injection braking capability, to prevent fan "wind milling" at start or stop, adjustable, current limited. O. VFD shall have a motor preheat function to prevent moisture accumulation in an idle motor. P. VFD shall have a digital operator with program copy and storage functions to simplify set up of multiple drives. The digital operator shall be interchangeable for all drive ratings. Q. VFD shall include a front mounted, sealed keypad operator, with an English language (or one of 6 additional international languages) illuminated LCD display. The operator will provide complete programming, program copying, operating, monitoring, and diagnostic capability. Keys provided shall include industry standard commands for Hand, Off, and Auto functions. R. VFD plain language display shall provide readouts of; output frequency in hertz, PID feedback in percent, output voltage in volts, output current in amps, output power in kilowatts, D.C. bus voltage in volts, interface terminal status, and fault codes. All displays shall be viewed in an easy -to -read illuminated LCD with International language selectability. S. VFD unit shall include the following meters to estimate use of energy: 1. Elapsed Time Meter. - z 2. Kilowatt Meter. 3. Kilowatt Hour Meter. T. VFD shall include PI control logic, to provide closed loop setpoint control capability, from a feedback signal, eliminating the need for closed loop output signals from a building automation system. The PI controller shall have a differential feedback capability for closed loop control of fans and pumps for pressure, flow or temperature regulation in response to dual feedback signals. U. An energy saving sleep function shall be available in both open loop (follower mode) and closed loop (PI) control, providing significant energy savings while minimizing operating hours on driven equipment. When the sleep function senses a minimal deviation of a feedback signal from setpoint, or low demand in open loop control, the system reacts by i F stopping the driven equipment. Upon receiving an increase in speed command signal deviation, the drive and equipment resume normal operation. V. VFD shall include loss of input signal protection, with a selectable response strategy a including speed default to a percent of the most recent speed. W. VFD shall include electronic thermal overload protection for both the drive and motor. IA The electronic thermal motor overload shall be approved by UL. If the electronic thermal motor overload is not approved by UL, a separate UL approved thermal overload relay shall be provided in the VFD enclosure. X. VFD shall include the following program functions: 1. Critical frequency rejection capability: 3 selectable, adjustable deadbands. 2. Auto restart capability: 0 to 10 attempts with adjustable delay between attempts. - 3. Ability to close fault contact after the completion of all fault restart attempts. 4. Stall prevention capability. j 5. "S" curve soft start capability. i 6. Bi-directional "Speed search" capability, in order to start a rotating load. 7. 14 preset and 1 custom volts per hertz pattern. 03878709 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 15500 - 4 09/ 10 8. Heatsink over temperature speed fold back capability. 9. Terminal status indication. 10. Program copy and storage in a removable digital operator. 11. Current limit adjustment capability, from 30% to 200% of rated full load current of the VFD. 12. Motor pre -heat capability. 13. Input signal or serial communication loss detection and response strategy. 14. Anti "wind -milling" function capability. 15. Automatic energy saving function. 16. Undertorque/Overtorque Detection. Y. VFD shall include factory settings for all parameters, and the capability for those settings to be reset. Z. VFD shall include the capability to adjust the following functions, while the VFD is running: 1. Speed command input. 2. Acceleration adjustment from 0 to 6000 seconds. 3. Deceleration adjustment from 0 to 6000 seconds. 4. Select from 5 preset speeds. 5. Analog monitor display. 6. Removal of digital operator. 2.4 MANUAL BYPASS A. VFD and bypass components shall be mounted inside a common NEMA l enclosure, fully pre -wired, and ready for installation as a single UL listed device. Bypass shall include the following: 1. Input, output, and bypass contactors, to disconnect power to the VFD, when the motor is running in the bypass mode. 2. 115 VAC control transformer, with fused primary. 3. Thermal overload relay, to protect the motor while operating in the bypass mode. 4. Circuit breaker/disconnect switch, with a pad -lockable through -the -door handle mechanism. 5. Control and safety circuit terminal strip. 6. Drive/Bypass selector switch, Hand/Off/Auto selector switch, Normal/Test selector switch 7. Switch selectable smoke purge, auto transfer to bypass and remote transfer functions. 8. Pilot lights (22 mm) for "Control Power ", "Drive Fault", "Drive Run", "Bypass Run", "OL/Safety Fault". 9. Normal/Test selector switch, shall allow testing and adjustment of the VFD, while the motor is running in the bypass mode. 10. Damper control circuit shall be provided. 11. Hand/Off/Auto selector switch shall provide the following operation: • Hand Position - The drive is given a start command, operation is via the local speed input (digital operator or speed pot.). If in bypass mode, the motor is running. 03878709 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 15500 - 5 09/ 10 • Off Position - The start command is removed, all speed inputs are ignored, power is still applied to the drive. If in bypass mode, the motor is stopped. • Auto Position - The drive is enabled to receive a start command and speed input from a building automation system. If in bypass mode, the motor start/stop is controlled by the building automation system 12. Annunciation contacts for drive_ run,_ drive fault, bypass run and motor OL/safety fault. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the manufacturer. 3.2 DEMOSTRATION A. Demonstration unit operation and maintenance. END OF SECTION 03878709 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 15500 - 6 09/ 10 SECTION 15514 FINNED WATER -TUBE BOILERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 — General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finned water -tube boilers. B. Boiler controls. C. Boiler trim. D. Natural gas fired burner. E. Circulator. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI Z21.13 - Gas -fired Low Pressure Steam and Hot Water Boilers. - B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME Section I - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Power Boilers. 2. ASME Section IV - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Heating Boilers. 3. ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels. C. Hydronics Institute: 1. HI - Testing and Rating Standard for Heating Boilers. D. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code. 2. NFPA 58 - Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Division 1 and Section 15000 - Submittals. B. Product Data: Submit capacities and accessories included with boiler. Include general layout, dimensions, size and location of water, fuel, electric and vent connections, electrical characteristics, weight and mounting loads. C. Test Reports: Indicate boilers meet or exceed specified performance and efficiency. Submit results of combustion test. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit assembly, support details, connection requirements, and include start-up instructions. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Manufacturers Field Reports: Indicate condition of equipment after start-up including control settings and performance chart of control system. 03878709 FINNED WATER -TUBE BOILERS 15514 - 1 _3 09/10 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS J i ' A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, cleaning procedures, replacement parts list, and maintenance and repair data. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to ANSI Z21.13 Code for construction of boilers. Provide boilers registered with National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors. The boilers shall bear the ASME "H" stamp for 160 psi working pressure. B. Gas Train and Safety Controls: Conform to requirements of Factory Mutual (FM). C. Unit Certification: AGA or UL certified. D. Conform to applicable code for internal wiring of factory wired equipment. E. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. F. Perform Work in accordance with State and local standards. -1 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept boilers and accessories on site in factory shipping packaging. Inspect for damage. B. Protect boilers from damage by leaving packing in place until installation. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Section 15000: Product warranties. 1.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS - A. Furnish wire brush and handle for fire tube boiler cleaning. 1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish one set of circulator pump seals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FINNED WATER -TUBE BOILER (2,000,000 BTUH INPUT) A. Manufacturers: 1. Lochinvar Corp. 2. RBI Boilers. 03878709 FINNED WATER -TUBE BOILERS 15514 - 2 09/ 10 rt ! 3. Cleaver -Brooks. 4. Riverside Hydronics s' 5. Substitutions: Section 15000 B. The water containing section shall consist of a heat exchanger constructed of a "Fin Tube" ' design, with straight copper tubes having extruded integral fins spaced seven (7) fins per inch. These tubes shall be "rolled" securely into glass -lined, cast iron headers. There shall be no bolts, gaskets or "O" rings in the head configuration. Removable access plugs shall be provided on the -heat exchanger headers for the purposes of inspection, cleaning or repair. Boiler drains shall be provided, having external access. The heat exchanger shall be mounted in a stress free jacket assembly in order to provide a "free floating design" able to withstand the effects of thermal shock. The boiler shall bear the ASME "H" stamp for 160 psi working pressure and shall be National Board listed. The complete heat exchanger "= assembly shall carry a ten (10) year limited warranty against failure caused by defective workmanship or material. C. The boiler's combustion chamber shall be constructed of stainless steel and sealed for combustion employing the Lochinvar power burner concept or its equivalent. The burner surface shall be constructed of heavy-duty ceramic material and fire in a vertical plane within the combustion chamber. The burner shall employ a special perforated flame injection tube extending the entire length of the heat exchanger. The burner shall fire in a full 360-degree pattern resulting in uniform heat transfer upon every inch of heating surface. A viewing port shall be provided, permitting visual observation of burner operation. 1. Power -Fin boilers with M9 Firing Controls must be capable of firing at a complete y blue flame with maximum gas and air input, as well as firing infrared when gas and air are reduced. Power -Fin M9 models must be capable of firing from 20 percent up to 100 percent of rated input when supplied with 4 inches water column of inlet gas pressure for a turndown ratio of 5:1. D. The boiler shall use a combustion air blower, utilizing pulse width modulation, to draw a precise mixture of fuel and air into the combustion chamber for maximum efficiency. The combustion air blower shall operate for a pre -purge period before burner ignition and a post -purge period after burner operation to clear the combustion chamber. The boiler shall be equipped with a replaceable combustion air filter to protect the blower and burner from y contaminants and debris. E. The boiler shall incorporate a gas train consisting of a pre -mix gas valve to supply gas and combustion air in exact proportions to allow burner input to vary based on load. The pre -mix gas valve shall perform the functions of safety shutoff, constant pressure regulation and air/gas ratio control. Full closing of the valve seat shall occur in less than 0.8 seconds when the valve is de -energized. F. The boiler shall be constructed with an 18 gauge pre -painted steel jacket assembly. The interior of the combustion chamber and flue collector shall be stainless steel. All inner jacket panels shall be fully gasketed and sealed. The jacket assembly shall be primed and pre -painted on both sides. All models shall be certified for installation on combustible floors without additional safety provisions. The boiler shall be suitable for installation with zero clearance from combustible material on the left and right side. G. The boiler's standard construction shall include an air pressure switch to prove combustion _ air flow, a flow switch to prove water flow, temperature -pressure gauge, downstream test valve and a factory installed ASME pressure relief valve. Standard controls shall include manual reset high limit, pump control for dedicated boiler pump and system pump. Standard construction shall include terminal strips for supply voltage connection, pump control connection, contacts for any failure, contacts for air louvers and run time contacts. 03878709 FINNED WATER -TUBE BOILERS 15514 - 3 ;, 09/10 The manufacturer shall verify proper operation of the burners, -all _controls and the heat exchanger by connection to gas, water and venting for a full factory fire test. H. The boiler shall be equipped with an Electronic Integrated Control Module with a microprocessor -based platform incorporating software customized for operation of the Lochinvar Power -Fin. All internal safety, operating and ignition controls shall be included in the electronic integrated control module. The electronic integrated control module shall provide on/off control of the gas supply to the burner, operation of the combustion air blower, ignition of the gas -air mixture, flame proving, control of water temperature set points, and monitoring of all safety functions. I. The boiler shall feature the "Smart System" control with a 2-line, 16 character LCD display, password security, outdoor reset, pump delay with freeze protection, pump exercise and PC port connection. The boiler shall allow 0-10 VDC input connection for BMS control and have built-in "Cascade" to sequence and rotate while maintaining modulation of up to eight boilers without utilization of an external controller. Supply voltage shall be 120 volt / 60 hertz / single phase. J. Local communication, programming and a display of operating and alarm status conditions shall be accessible through the Smart System control panel. The Smart System control panel shall contain an on/off main power switch, a digital display of a temperature functions, the operational status of the boiler, or an active alarm fault. Data points visible in the digital display include inlet water temperature, outlet water temperature, water temperature differential, percent firing rate, setpoint temperatures, setpoint differential, outdoor air temperature, minimum temperature, maximum temperature and maximum reset temperature. Operational status shall be displayed for Off, Standby, Pre -purge, Ignition, Space Heating, and Post -purge. Fault status shall be provided for high limit, gas pressure (optional), low water, blocked drain, louver proving, and air pressure switch status. K. The boiler standard control system shall include an electronically proven Hot Surface Ignition system with full flame monitoring capability and a built-in low gas pressure regulator. A 24 VAC control circuit and components shall be used. All components shall be easily accessed and serviceable from the front and top of the unit. Standard operating controls shall utilize a return water temperature sensor, an outlet water temperature sensor and a flue temperature sensor for the Smart System control module. An adjustable immersion type, manual reset safety high limit shall be provided to limit water temperature. L. The boiler shall be designed to allow installation of multiple venting options. All flue and air inlet pipe shall be provided by the installing contractor. The boiler shall be equipped with Vertical Category IV Positive Pressure Flue with combustion air from the equipment room. M. The boiler shall be certified and listed by C.S.A. International under the latest edition of the harmonized ANSI Z21.13 test standard for the U.S. and Canada. The boiler shall comply with the energy efficiency requirements of the latest edition of the ASHRAE 90.1 Standard. The boiler shall operate at up to 87% thermal efficiency. The boiler shall be certified for Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) of less than 30 ppm corrected to 3% 02 by an independent laboratory. N. The Firing Control System shall be M9 5:1 Modulating Firing with Hot Surface Ignition and Electronic Supervision (IV). 03878709 FINNED WATER -TUBE BOILERS 15514 - 4 09/ 10 2.2 CIRCULATOR AND LOW TEMPERATURE VALVES A. Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, direct connected, with resiliently mounted motor for }' in line mounting, oil lubricated, for 125 psig maximum working pressure. 1. Cast-iron casing. 2. Impeller: Cadmium plated steel, keyed to shaft. 3. Bearings: Oil lubricated bronze sleeves. 4. Shaft: Alloy steel with copper sleeve, integral thrust collar. 5. Seal: Carbon rotating against stationary ceramic seat, 225 degrees F maximum continuous operating temperature. 6. Drive: Flexible -coupling. 7. Low Temperature Valve: 2'/z" LTV. B. Performance (2,000,000 input boiler): " 1. Flow Capacity: 90 gal/min. 2. Head: 25 feet. 3. Electric: 480 v/3h. C. The boiler circulator shall be supplied with the boiler by the boiler manufacturer. The low temperature valves and gravity backdraft damper on combustion air inlet, need to be a., provided by the boiler manufacturer and installed by the Contractor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install boilers plumb and level, to plus or minus 1/16 inch over boiler base. B. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances around and over boilers. C. Install boiler on existing concrete housekeeping pad. D. Connect natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54. E. Connect hot water piping to supply and return boiler connections. F. Install discharge piping from relief valves and drain valves to nearest floor drain. G. Install boiler trim and accessories furnished loose for field mounting. H. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting. I. Install control wiring between boiler control panel and field mounted control devices. J. Connect flue to boiler outlet, full size of outlet. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform combustion test including boiler firing rate, over fire draft, gas flow rate, heat input, burner manifold gas pressure, percent carbon monoxide, percent oxygen, percent excess air, flue gas temperature at outlet, ambient temperature, net stack temperature, percent stack loss, percent combustion efficiency, and heat output. Perform test at minimum, mid -range, and high fire. B. Arrange with local authorities having jurisdiction for inspection of boiler, piping, and for certificate of operation. 3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Start-up boilers according to manufacturer's start-up instructions and in presence of boiler manufacturer's representative. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Adjust burner for maximum burning efficiency. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. 03878709 09/ 10 FINNED WATER -TUBE BOILERS 15514 - 5 3.4 CLEANING A. Flush and clean boilers upon completion of installation, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance procedures. B. Furnish services for manufacturer's technical representative for 8 hour day to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of boilers. Schedule training with Owner, provide at least 7 days notice to Architect/Engineer of training date. END OF SECTION } H 03878709 FINNED WATER -TUBE BOILERS 15514 - 6 09/ 10 SECTION 15550 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS PART I - GENERAL ] . ] RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Listed chimney liners. B. Listed double -wall chimneys. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: ] . Building -heating -appliance chimneys. B. Shop Drawings: For vents, breechings, chimneys, and stacks. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. ] . Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, methods of field assembly, components, hangers and seismic restraints, and location and size of each field connection. C. Welding certificates. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain listed system components through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AW S D ] . ] /D] . ] M, "Structural Welding Code --Steel," for hangers and supports and AWS D9.1/D9.]M, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for shop and field welding of joints and seams in vents, breechings, and stacks. C. Certified Sizing Calculations: Manufacturer shall certify venting system sizing calculations. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs,- equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." 1.6 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section ] 5000 — General Mechanical Requirements: Product Warranties. 03878709 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS ] 5550 - ] 09/10 PART 2 - PRODUCTS_ r 2.1 LISTED CHIMNEY LINERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Metal -Fab, Inc. , 2. Substitutions: Section 15000 — Substitutions. B. Description: Straight, single -wall chimney liner tested according to UL 1777 and rated for 1000 deg F (538 deg C) continuously, or 2100 deg F for 10 minutes; with negative or _ positive flue pressure complying with NFPA 211. C. Straight Liner Materials: ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless steel. } D. Accessories: 1. Fittings: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft -hood connectors, metal caps with bird barriers, adjustable roof flashings, storm collars, support assemblies, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners; fabricated from similar or compatible materials and , designs. 2. Sealant: Manufacturer's standard high -temperature sealant. 3. Insulating Fill: Manufacturer's standard high -temperature insulation fill material in annular space surrounding chimney liner including high -temperature, ceramic -fiber insulation required to seal chimney at top and bottom. 2.2 LISTED BUILDING -HEATING -APPLIANCE CHIMNEYS A. Manufacturers: 1. Metal -Fab, Inc. 2. Substitutions: Section 15000 — Substitutions. B. All chimney supports, roof penetrations, terminations, appliance adapters, drain fittings and expansion joints required to install the chimney shall be included. C. Roof penetration pieces shall be UL Listed products of the chimney manufacturer. Where roof is pitched (up to 12:12), roof penetration pieces shall be pitched type so that it is not necessary to provide a horizontal roof curb. 1. If roof pitch exceeds 12:12, a curb must be provided. D. Description: Double -wall metal vents tested according to UL 103 and UL 959 and rated for 1400 deg F (760 deg C) continuously, or 1800 deg F (982 deg C) for 10 minutes; with positive or negative flue pressure complying with NFPA 211. E. Construction: Inner shell and outer jacket separated by at least a 1-inch annular space filled with high -temperature, ceramic -fiber insulation. F. Inner Shell: ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless steel. G. Outer Jacket: Aluminized steel. H. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft -hood connectors; terminations, adjustable roof ' flashings, storm collars, support assemblies, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners; fabricated from similar materials and designs as vent -pipe straight sections; all listed for same assembly. 1. Termination: Stack cap designed to exclude minimum 90 percent of rainfall and extend three feet above the roof or as required by local codes. i i� 03878709 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS I 5550 - 2 09/ 10 i_ PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Listed Building -Heating -Appliance Chimneys: Dual -fuel boilers, oven vents, water heaters, and exhaust for engines. Fireplaces and other solid -fuel -burning appliances. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF LISTED VENTS AND CHIMNEYS A. Locate to comply with minimum clearances from combustibles and minimum termination heights according to product listing or NFPA 211, whichever is -most stringent. B. Installation shall conform to the manufacturer's installation instructions, UL Listing and State or local codes. C. Seal between sections of positive -pressure vents according to manufacturer's written installation instructions, using sealants recommended by manufacturer. D. Support vents at intervals recommended by manufacturer to support weight of vents and all accessories, without exceeding appliance loading. Support chimney from building structure using rigid structural shapes for attachment of fixed point supports. Anchor supports to structure by welding, bolting, steel expansion anchors, or concrete inserts. Size of structural shapes shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. Lap joints in direction of flow. 3.4 CLEANING A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes. B. Clean breechings internally, during and after installation, to remove dust and debris. Clean external surfaces to remove welding slag and mill film. Grind welds smooth and apply touchup finish to match factory or shop finish. C. Provide temporary closures at ends of breechings, chimneys, and stacks that are not completed or connected to equipment. END OF SECTION 03878709 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 09/10 15550 - 3 SECTION 15-622-A PACKAGE WATER CHILLERS — CENTRIFUGAL <<FOR REFERENCE ONLY>> PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes chiller package, _charge of refrigerant and oil, controls and control connections, chilled water connections, condenser water connections, auxiliary water connections, starters, and electrical power connections. B. The chillers will be purchased by the Owner, for contractor installation. Contractor will provide all valves, electrical connections, controls, etc. for chillers that are required for the equipment to operate properly, but are not provided with the equipment from the manufacturer. This specification section is provided now for the owners to be able to procure the water cooled centrifugal chillers required for this project. This specification will be include as part of the project where the chillers will be listed as "existing owner purchased chillers" which are to be installed by the mechanical contractor. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: 1. 1. ARI 550/590 - Water Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers: 1. 1. ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. 2. 2. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low -Rise Residential Buildings. C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. 1. ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels. D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: l . 1. UL 1995 - Heating and Cooling Equipment. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 15000 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate components, assembly, dimensions, weights and loads, required clearances, and location and size of field connections. Indicate equipment, piping and connections, valves, strainers, and thermostatic valves required for complete system. C. Product Data: Submit rated capacities, specialties and accessories, electrical requirements and wiring diagrams. D. Design Data: Indicate energy input versus cooling load output from 25 to 100 percent of full load at specified and minimum condenser water temperature. 03878709 PACKAGE WATER CHILLERS - CENTRIFUGAL 15622-A -1 09/ l 0 E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit assembly, support details, connection requirements, and include start-up instructions. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements including components not produced by manufacturer. G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit start-up report for each unit. Indicate results of leak test and refrigerant pressure test. e 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01700: Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit start-up instructions, maintenance data, parts -' lists, controls, and accessories. Include trouble - shooting guide. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE rl A. Perform Work in accordance with Municipality of Lubbock, Texas Public Work's standard. B. Construction and rating in accordance with ARI 550/590. C. Construct units with Energy Efficiency Ratings not less than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1. D. Conform to ASHRAE 15 code for construction and operation of chillers. E. E. Maintain one copy of each document on site 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.8 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Pre -installation meeting. *) B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting units. C. Protect units from physical damage. Leave factory covers in place until installation. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish warranty to include parts and labor for five years after start-up. 1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for maintenance service. ' B. Furnish service and maintenance of chillers for period of two years from Date of Substantial Completion, as determined by Architect. C. Examine unit components bi-monthly. Clean, adjust, and lubricate equipment. 03878709 PACKAGE WATER CHILLERS - CENTRIFUGAL 15622-A - 2 09/ 10 i D. Include systematic examination, adjustment,__and_lubrication of unit, and _controls checkout and adjustments. Repair or replace parts in accordance with manufacturer's operating and maintenance data. Use parts produced by manufacturer of original equipment. E. Perform work without removing units from service during building normal occupied hours. F. Provide emergency call back service at all hours for this maintenance period. G. Maintain locally, near Place of the Work, adequate stock of parts for replacement or emergency purposes. Have personnel available to ensure fulfillment of this maintenance - service, without unreasonable loss of time. H. Perform maintenance work using competent and qualified personnel under supervision and in direct employ of original installer. L Do not assign or transfer maintenance service to agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of Owner. 1.12 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. B. Furnish two containers of lubricating oil, per unit. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER CHILLERS — REFER TO SCHEDULE FOR DATA 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. General: 1. Factory assembled, single piece, liquid chiller shall consist of compressor, motor, variable frequency drive, lubrication system, cooler, condenser, initial oil and refrigerant operating charges, microprocessor control system, and documentation required prior to start-up. VFD shall be mounted on the chiller, wired, and tested by the chiller manufacturer. B. Compressor: 1. One centrifugal compressor of the high performance, single -stage type. 2. Compressor, motor, and transmission shall be hermetically sealed into a common assembly and arranged for easy field servicing. 3. Internal compressor parts must be accessible for servicing without removing the compressor base from the chiller. Connections to the compressor casing shall use 0- rings instead of gaskets to reduce the occurrence of refrigerant leakage. Connections to the compressor shall be flanged or bolted for easy disassembly. _ 4. All sensors shall have quick disconnects to allow replacement of the sensor without replacement of the entire sensor wire. Pressure transducers shall be capable of field calibration to ensure accurate readings and to avoid unnecessary transducer replacement. Transducers shall be serviceable without the need for refrigerant charge removal or isolation. 5. Transmission shall be single ratio, single helical, parallel shaft speed increaser. Gears shall conform to AGMA Standards, Quality II. 6. Journal bearings shall be of the steel backed babbitt lined type. Aluminum journal bearings are not acceptable. The thrust bearing shall be tilting pad or rolling element type. 03878709 PACKAGE WATER CHILLERS - CENTRIFUGAL 15622-A - 3 09/10 Centrifugal compressors shall use variable inlet guide vanes to provide capacity modulation while also providing pre -whirl of the refrigerant vapor entering the impeller for more efficient compression at all loads. Centrifugal compressors shall be provided with a factory -installed lubrication system to deliver oil under pressure to bearings and transmission. Included in the system shall be: a. Hermetic driven rotary vane oil pump with factory -installed motor contactor with overload protection. b. Refrigerant -cooled oil cooler. Water-cooled oil coolers are not acceptable. C. Oil pressure regulator. d. Oil filter with isolation valves to allow filter change without removal of refrigerant charge. e. Oil sump heater controlled from unit microprocessor. f. Oil reservoir temperature sensor with main control center digital readout. g. Factory -mounted compressor motor VFD provided and all wiring to oil pump, oil heater, and controls shall be prewired in the factory. h. Compressor shall be fully field serviceable. Compressors which must be removed and returned to the factory for service shall be unacceptable. C. Motor: 1. Compressor motor shall be of the semi -hermetic, liquid refrigerant cooled, squirrel cage, induction type suitable for voltage shown on the equipment schedule. 2. If an open drive motor is provided, a compressor shaft seal leakage containment system shall be provided: a. An oil reservoir shall collect oil and refrigerant that leaks past the seal. b. A float device shall be provided to open when the reservoir is full, directing the refrigerant/oil mixture back into the compressor housing. 3. Motors shall be suitable for operation in a refrigerant atmosphere and shall be cooled by atomized refrigerant in contact with the motor windings. 4. Motor stator shall be arranged for service or removal with only minor compressor disassembly and without removing main refrigerant piping connections. 5. Full load operation of the motor shall not exceed nameplate rating. 6. One motor winding temperature sensor (and one spare) shall be provided. 7. The additional piping, valves, air -handling equipment, insulation, wiring, switchgear changes, ductwork, and coordination with other trades shall be the responsibility of the mechanical contractor. Shop drawings reflecting any changes to the design shall be included in the submittal, and incorporated into the final as -built drawings for the project. D. Cooler and Condenser: Cooler shall be of shell and tube type construction, each in separate shells. Units shall be fabricated with high-performance tubing, minimum '/4 inch steel shell and tube sheets with fabricated steel waterboxes. a. Waterbox shall be nozzle -in -head waterbox (150 psig). b. Waterbox shall have standard Victaulic grooves. Condenser shall be of shell and tube type construction, each in separate shells. Units shall be fabricated with high-performance tubing, minimum ''14 inch steel shell and tube sheets with fabricated steel waterboxes. a. Waterbox shall be nozzle -in -head (150 psig). b. Waterbox shall have standard Victaulic grooves. Waterboxes shall have vents, drains, and covers to permit tube cleaning within the space shown on the drawings. A thermistor type temperature sensor with quick connects shall be factory installed in each water nozzle. 03878709 PACKAGE WATER CHILLERS - CENTRIFUGAL 15622-A - 4 09/ 10 1 b_> 4. Tubes shall be individually replaceable from either end of the heat exchanger without affectingthe strength and durability of the tube sheet and without causing � ty g leakage in adjacent tubes. 5. Tubing shall be copper, high -efficiency type, with integral internal and external t enhancement unless otherwise noted. Tubes shall be nominal 3/4-in. OD with nominal wall thickness of 0.025 in. measured at the root of the fin at the enhanced areas and nominal wall thickness of 0.049 in. where the tubes are in contact with the end tube sheets unless otherwise noted. Tubes shall be rolled into tube sheets and shall be individually replaceable. Tube sheet holes shall be double grooved for joint structural integrity. 6. Cooler shall be designed to prevent liquid refrigerant from entering the compressor. Devices that introduce pressure losses (such as mist eliminators) shall not be acceptable because they are subject to structural failures that can result in extensive compressor damage. 7. The condenser shell shall include a FLASC (Flash Sub -cooler) which cools the condensed liquid refrigerant to a reduced temperature, thereby increasing the refrigeration cycle efficiency. 8. A reseating type pressure relief valve shall be installed on each heat exchanger. If a non-reseating type is used, a backup reseating type shall be installed in series. E. Refrigerant Flow Control: To improve part load efficiency, liquid refrigerant shall be -' metered from the condenser to the cooler using a float -type metering valve to maintain the proper liquid level of refrigerant in the heat exchangers under both full and part load operating conditions. By maintaining a liquid seal at the flow valve, bypassed hot gas from the condenser to the cooler is eliminated. The float valve chamber shall have a float valve shall be field serviceable. F. Controls, Safeties, and Diagnostics: .,, 1. Controls: a. The chiller shall be provided with a factory installed and wired microprocessor control center. The control center shall include a 16-line by 40-character liquid crystal display, 4 function keys, stop button, and alarm light. The microprocessor can be configured for English units. b. All chiller and starter monitoring shall be displayed at the chiller control panel. C. The controls shall make use of non-volatile memory. d. The chiller control system shall have the ability to interface and communicate directly to the building control system. e. The default standard display screen shall simultaneously indicate the following minimum information: 1) date and time of day - 2) 24-character primary system status message 3) 24-character secondary status message 4) chiller operating hours 5) entering chilled water temperature 6) leaving chilled water temperature 7) evaporator refrigerant temperature 8) entering condenser water temperature 9) leaving condenser water temperature 10) condenser refrigerant temperature 11) oil supply pressure 12) oil sump temperature 13) percent motor Rated Load Amps (RLA) 03878709 PACKAGE WATER CHILLERS - CENTRIFUGAL 15622-A -5 i 09/ 10 S f. In addition to the default screen, status screens shall be accessible to view the 1 status of every point monitored by the control center including: 1) evaporator pressure 2) condenser pressure 3) bearing oil supply temperature 4) compressor discharge temperature 5) motor winding temperature 6) number of compressor starts 7) control point settings 8) discrete output status of various devices 9) compressor motor starter status 10) optional spare input channels 11) line current and voltage for each phase 12) frequency, kW, kW-hr, demand kW g. Schedule Function: The chiller controls shall be configurable for manual or automatic start-up and shutdown. In automatic operation mode, the controls shall be capable of automatically starting and stopping the chiller according to a stored user programmable occupancy schedule. The controls shall include built-in provisions for accepting: 1 } A minimum of two 365-day occupancy schedules. 2) Minimum of 8 separate occupied/unoccupied periods per day. 3) Daylight savings start/end. 4) 18 user -defined holidays. 5) Means of configuring an occupancy timed override. 6) Chiller start-up and shutdown via remote contact closure. h. Service Function: The controls shall provide a password protected service function which allows authorized individuals to view an alarm history file which shall contain the last 25 alarm/alert messages with time and date stamp. These messages shall be displayed in text form, not codes. i. Network Window Function: Each chiller control panel shall be capable of viewing multiple point values and statuses from other like controls connected on a common network, including controller maintenance data. The operator shall be able to alter the remote controller's set points or time schedule and to force point values or statuses for those points that are operator forcible. The } control panel shall also have access to the alarm history file of all like controllers connected on the network. j. Pump Control: Upon request to start the compressor, the control system shall start the chilled water pump, condenser water pumps and verify that flows have been established. k. Ramp Loading: A user -configurable ramp loading rate, effective during the chilled water temperature pulldown period, shall control the rate of guide } vane opening to prevent a rapid increase in compressor power consumption. The controls shall allow configuration of the ramp loading rate in either degrees/minute of chilled water temperature pulldown or percent motor amps/minute. During the ramp loading period, a message shall be displayed informingthe operator that the chiller is operating in ramp loading mode. { 03878709 PACKAGE WATER CHILLERS - CENTRIFUGAL 15622-A -6 09/10 i 1. Chilled Water Reset: The control center shall allow reset of the chilled -water temperature set point based on any one of the following criteria: 1) Chilled water reset based on an external 4 to 20 mA signal. 2) Chilled water reset based on a remote temperature sensor (such as outdoor air). 3) Chilled water reset based on water temperature rise across the evaporator. M. Demand Limit: The control center shall limit amp draw of the compressor to the rated load amps or to a lower value based on one of the following criteria: 1) Demand limit based on a user input ranging from 40% to l 00% of compressor rated load amps. 2) Demand limit based on external 4 to 20 mA signal. g_ n. Controlled Compressor Shutdown: The controls shall be capable of being configured to soft stop the compressor. When the stop button is pressed or remote contacts open with this feature active, the guide vanes shall close to a configured amperage level and the machine shall then shut down. The display L shall indicate "shutdown in progress." 2. Safeties: a. Unit shall automatically shut down when any of the following conditions occur: (Each of these protective limits shall require manual reset and cause an alarm message to be displayed on the control panel screen, informing the operator of the shutdown cause.) 1) motor overcurrent j' 2) over voltage* 3) under voltage* 4) single cycle dropout* _.4 5) bearing oil high temperature 6) low evaporator refrigerant temperature 7) high condenser pressure 8) high motor temperature 9) high compressor discharge temperature 10) low oil pressure 11) prolonged surge 12) loss of cooler water flow 13) loss of condenser water flow 14) starter fault *Shall not require manual reset or cause an alarm if auto -restart after power failure is enabled. b. The control system shall detect conditions that approach protective limits and take self corrective action prior to an alarm occurring. The system shall automatically reduce chiller capacity when any of the following parameters are outside their normal operating range: 1) high condenser pressure 2) high motor temperature 3) low evaporator refrigerant temperature 4) high motor amps. C. During the capacity override period, a pre -alarm (alert) message shall be displayed informing the operator which condition is causing the capacity override. Once the condition is again within acceptable limits, the override condition shall be terminated and the chiller shall revert to normal chilled water control. If during either condition the protective limit is reached, the 03878709 PACKAGE WATER CHILLERS - CENTRIFUGAL 15622-A - 7 - , 09/10 chiller shall shut down and a message shall be displayed informing the operator which condition caused the shutdown and alarm. d. Internal built-in safeties shall protect the chiller from loss of water flow. Differential pressure switches shall not be allowed to be the only form of r freeze protection. 3. Diagnostics and Service: A self diagnostic controls test shall be an integral part of the control system to allow quick identification of malfunctioning components. Once the controls test has been initiated, all pressure and temperature sensors shall be checked to ensure they are within normal operating range. A pump test shall automatically energize the chilled water pump, condenser water pump, and oil pump. The control system shall confirm that water flow and oil pressure have been ' established and require operator confirmation before proceeding to the next test. A guide vane actuator test shall open and close the guide vanes to check for proper operation. The operator manually acknowledges proper guide vane operation prior to proceeding to the next test. In addition to the automated controls test, the controls shall provide a manual test which permits selection and testing of individual control components and inputs. A thermistor test and transducer test shall display on the ICVC (International Chiller Visual Controller) screen the actual- reading of each transducer and each thermistor installed on the chiller. All out -of -range sensors shall be identified. G. Electrical Requirements: 1. Electrical contractor shall supply and install main electrical power line, disconnect switches, circuit breakers, and electrical protection devices per local code requirements and as indicated necessary by the chiller manufacturer. 2. Electrical contractor shall wire the chilled water pump, condenser water pump, and tower fan control circuit to the chiller control circuit. 3. Electrical contractor shall supply and install electrical wiring and devices required to - interface the chiller controls with the building control system if applicable. 4. Electrical power shall be supplied to the unit at the voltage, phase, and frequency 3 listed in the equipment schedule. - H. Piping Requirements — Instrumentation and Safeties: Mechanical contractor shall supply and install pressure gages in readily accessible locations in piping adjacent to the chiller —`. such that they can be easily read from a standing position on the floor. Scale range shall be such that design values shall be indicated at approximately mid -scale. Gages shall be installed in theenteringand leaving water lines of the cooler and condenser. I. Vibration Isolation: Chiller manufacturer shall furnish neoprene isolator pads for mounting equipment on a level concrete surface. J. Start-up: 1. The chiller manufacturer shall provide a factory trained representative, employed by the chiller manufacturer, to perform the start-up procedures as outlined in the Start- up, Operation and Maintenance manual provided by the chiller manufacturer. 2. Manufacturer shall supply the following literature: s a. Start-up, operation and maintenance instructions. J b. Installation instructions. C. Field wiring diagrams. d. One complete set of certified drawings. K. Special Features: 1. Soleplate Package Accessory: Unit manufacturer shall furnish a soleplate package consisting of soleplates, jacking screws, leveling pads, and neoprene pads. 2. Spare Sensors with Leads Accessory: Unit manufacturer shall furnish additional temperature sensors and leads. } t� 03878709 PACKAGE WATER CHILLERS - CENTRIFUGAL 15622-A - 8 09/10 J 03878709 09/ 10 Building Control System Interface (BACnet) Accessory: The chiller control system shall have the ability to interface and communicate directly to the building control using a BACnet-based system. BACnet Translator shall output data in standard BACnet profiles. Refrigerant Charge: The chiller shall ship from the factory fully charged with R-134a refrigerant and oil. Thermal Insulation: Unit manufacturer shall insulate the cooler shell, economizer low side compressor suction elbow, motor shell and motor cooling lines. Insulation shall be 3/4 in. (19 mm) thick with a thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.28 (Btu in.)/hr ft2 F and shall conform to UL standard 94, classification 94 HBF. 6. Cooler and Condenser Passes: Unit manufacturer shall provide the cooler and/or condenser with 1, 2 or 3 pass configuration on the water side as scheduled. 7. Nozzle -In -Head, 150 psig: Unit manufacturer shall furnish nozzle -in -head style waterboxes on the cooler and/or condenser rated at 150 psig. 8. Flanged Water Nozzles: Unit manufacturer shall furnish standard flanged piping connections on the cooler and/ or condenser. 9. Hinges: Unit manufacturer shall furnish hinges on condenser tube only, opposite of piping connections only, to facilitate tube cleaning. Provide standard connections elsewhere. 10. Compressor Discharge Isolation Valve and Liquid Line Ball Valve: These items shall be factory installed to allow isolation of the refrigerant charge in the condenser for servicing the compressor. 11. Unit -Mounted Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) with Built-in Harmonic Filter: a. Design: 1) VFD shall be refrigerant cooled, microprocessor based, pulse width modulated (PWM) design. 2) Input and output power devices shall be insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBTs). 3) Active rectifier shall convert incoming voltage / frequency to DC voltage. Input current and voltage shall be regulated. 4) Transistorized inverter and control regulator shall convert DC voltage to a sinusoidal PWM waveform. 5) Integrated chiller controls shall coordinate motor speed and guide vane position to optimize chiller performance over all chiller operating conditions. 6) Surge prevention and surge protection algorithms shall take action to prevent surge and move chiller operation away from surge. b. Enclosure: 1) Pre -painted unit mounted, NEMA 1 cabinet shall include hinged, lockable doors and removable lifting lugs. 2) VFD shall have a short circuit interrupt and withstand rating of at least 65,000 amps (35,000 amps for 575-v units). 3) Provisions to padlock main disconnect handle in the "Off' positions shall be provided. Mechanical interlock to prevent opening cabinet door with disconnect in the "On" position or moving disconnect to the "ON" position while the door is open shall be provided. 4) Provisions shall be made for top entry of incoming line power cables. PACKAGE WATER CHILLERS - CENTRIFUGAL 15622-A - 9 C. Heat Sink: 1) The heat sink shall be refrigerant cooled. Heat sink and mating flange shall be suitable for ASME design working pressure of 185 psig. 2) Refrigerant cooling shall be metered by microprocessor control solenoid valve to maintain heat sink temperature within acceptable limits for ambient temperature. d. VFD Rating: 1) Drive shall be suitable for continuous operation at nameplate voltage f 10%. 2) Drive shall be suitable for continuous operation at 100% of nameplate amps and 150% of nameplate amps for 5 seconds. 3) Drive shall comply with applicable ANSI, NEMA, UL and NEC standards. 4) Drive shall be suitable for operation in ambient temperatures between 40 and 104 F, 95% humidity (non -condensing) for altitudes up to 6000 feet above sea level. Specific drive performance at jobsite ambient temperature and elevation shall be provided by the manufacturer in the bid. e. User Interface: A single display shall provide interface for programming and display of VFD and chiller parameters. Viewable parameters include: 1) Operating, configuration and fault messages 2) Frequency in hertz 3) Load and line side voltage and current (at the VFD) 4) kW (line and load side) 5) IGBT temperatures f. VFD Performance: 1) VFD Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) and Harmonic Current Total Demand Distortion (TDD) shall not exceed IEEE-519 requirements using the VFD circuit breaker input terminals as the point of common coupling (PCC). 2) VFD full load efficiency shall meet or exceed 97% at 100% VFD Rated Ampacity. 3) Active rectifier shall regulate unity displacement power factor to 0.99 or higher at full load. 4) Voltage boost capability to provide full motor voltage at reduced line voltage conditions. 5) Soft start, linear acceleration, coast to stop. 6) Base motor frequency shall be either 60 hertz. Adjustable frequency range from 38 to 60 hertz or 32.5 to 50 hertz. g. VFD Electrical Service (single point power): 1) VFD shall have input circuit breaker with minimum 65,000 amp interrupt capacity. 2) VFD shall have standard 15 amp branch circuit breaker to provide power for chiller oil pump. 3) VFD shall have standard 3 kva control power transformer with circuit breaker provides power for oil heater, VFD controls and chiller controls. 4) The branch oil pump circuit breaker and control power transformer shall be factory wired 03878709 PACKAGE WATER CHILLERS - CENTRIFUGAL 15622-A - 10 09/] 0 } s 5) Nameplate voltage shall range between 380 to 460 f10 percent,_3 phase, 60 Hz, f2% Hz. h. Discrete Outputs: 115 v discrete contact outputs shall be provided for field wired: 1) Chilled water pump 2) Condenser water pump 3) Alarm status 4) Tower fan low 5) Tower fan high i. Analog Output: An analog (4 to 20 mA) output for head pressure reference shall be provided. This signal shall be suitable to control a 2-way or 3-way water regulating valve in the condenser piping. j. Protection (the following shall be supplied): 1) Under -voltage 2) Over voltage 3) Phase loss 4) Phase reversal 5) Ground fault 6) Phase unbalance protection 7) Single cycle voltage loss protection 8) Programmable auto re -start after loss of power 9) Motor overload protection (NEMA Class 10) k. VFD Testing: I) VFD shall be factory mounted, wired and tested on the chiller prior to shipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION Information to be included in Central Plant Project Specifications under Section 15622 — B. END OF SECTION 03878709 PACKAGE WATER CHILLERS - CENTRIFUGAL 15622-A - 11 09/ l 0 ' SECTION 15622-B PACKAGE WATER CHILLERS — CENTRIFUGAL <<FOR CONTRACTOR INSTALLATION OF OWNER PURCHASED EQUIPMENT>> PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes chiller package, charge of refrigerant and oil, controls and control connections, chilled water connections, condenser water connections, auxiliary water connections, starters, and electrical power connections. B. The chillers will be purchased by the Owner, for contractor installation. Contractor will provide all valves, electrical connections, controls, etc. for chillers that are required for the equipment to operate properly, but are not provided with the equipment from the manufacturer. This specification section is provided now for the owners to be able to ' procure the water cooled centrifugal chillers required for this project. This specification will be include as part of the project where the chillers will be listed as "existing owner purchased chillers" which are to be installed by the mechanical contractor. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: l . 1. ARI 550/590 - Water Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers: 1. 1. ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. 2. 2. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low -Rise Residential Buildings. C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: l . 1. ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels. D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. 1. UL 1995 - Heating and Cooling Equipment. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 15000 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate components, assembly, dimensions, weights and loads, required clearances, and location and size of field connections. Indicate equipment, piping and connections, valves, strainers, and thermostatic valves required for complete system. C. Product Data: Submit rated capacities, specialties and accessories, electrical requirements and wiring diagrams. D. Design Data: Indicate energy input versus cooling load output from 25 to 100 percent of full load at specified and minimum condenser water temperature. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit assembly, support details, connection requirements, and include start-up instructions. 03878709 PACKAGE WATER CHILLERS - CENTRIFUGAL 15622-B - I 09/ 10 _ F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements I 1 including components not produced by manufacturer. G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit start-up report for each unit. Indicate results of leak test and refrigerant pressure test. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01700: Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit start-up instructions, maintenance data, parts lists, controls, and accessories. Include trouble -shooting guide. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with Municipality of Lubbock, Texas Public Work's standard. -_ B. Construction and rating in accordance with ARI 550/590. C. Construct units with Energy Efficiency Ratings not less than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1. D. Conform to ASHRAE 15 code for construction and operation of chillers. E. E. Maintain one copy of each document on site 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.8 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Pre -installation meeting. : B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING _~' A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and ¢ , transporting units. C. Protect units from physical damage. Leave factory covers in place until installation. 1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. B. Furnish two containers of lubricating oil, per unit. t ._l PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER CHILLERS Equipment purchased by Owner, information provided for reference only. Refer to Section 15622-A. 03878709 PACKAGE WATER CHILLERS - CENTRIFUGAL 15622-B - 2 09/ 10 E c_ PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION �- A. Install chiller on new concrete housekeeping pads where applicable. Provide minimum clearances as required by manufacturer. B. Install the following piping accessories on evaporator chilled water piping connections. ._; 1. On inlet: a. Thermometer well for temperature controller. b. Thermometer well and thermometer. C. Strainer. d. Nipple and flow switch. e. Flexible pipe connector. f. Pressure gage. g. Shut-off valve. 2. On outlet: a. Thermometer well and thermometer. b. Flexible pipe connector. C. Pressure gage. d. Shut-off valve. e. Balancing valve. C. Insulate evaporator and cold surfaces. D. Install the following piping accessories on condenser water piping connections. 1. On inlet: a. Thermometer well for temperature controller. b. Thermometer well and thermometer. _ C. Strainer. d. Nipple and flow switch. e. Flexible pipe connector. y f. Pressure gage. g. Shut-off valve. 2. On outlet: a. Thermometer well and thermometer. b. Flexible pipe connector. C. Pressure gage. d. Shut-off valve. e. Balancing valve. E. Arrange piping for easy dismantling to permit tube cleaning. F. Install piping from chiller refrigerant relief valve to outdoors. Size as recommended by manufacturer. G. Install chiller accessories furnished loose for field mounting. H. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting. I. Install control wiring between chiller control panel and field mounted control devices. J. Provide for connection of electrical wiring between starter and chiller control panel. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Furnish cooling season start-up, winter season shutdown service, for first year of operation. When initial start-up and testing takes place in winter and machines are to remain inoperative, repeat start-up and testing operation at beginning of first cooling season. 03878709 PACKAGE WATER CHILLERS - CENTRIFUGAL 15622-B - 3 09/10 3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Furnish services of factory trained representative for minimum three days to leak test, refrigerant pressure test, evacuate, dehydrate, charge, start-up, calibrate controls, and instruct Owner on operation and maintenance. B. Furnish initial charge of refrigerant and oil. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Demonstrate system operations and verify specified performance. END OF SECTION 03878709 PACKAGE WATER CHILLERS - CENTRIFUGAL 15622-B - 4 09/ 10 SECTION 15635 REFRIGERANT DETECTION AND ALARM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Refrigerant monitors, notification appliances, and SCBA. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers 1. ASHRAE 15-01: Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems (ANSI). 2. ASHRAE 147-02: Reducing the Release of Halogenated Refrigerants from Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Equipment and Systems (ANSI). B. ASTM International 1. ASTM B 88-03: Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 2. ASTM B 88M-03: Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube [Metric]. 3. ASTM D 2737-03: Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Tubing. C. Code of Federal Regulations 1. 42 CFR — Public Health, Part 84 — "Approval of Respiratory Protective Devices," Subpart H — "Self -Contained Breathing Apparatus." 2003. D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association 1. NEMA 250-03: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 1. UL 464-03: Audible Signal Appliances. 2. UL 1971-02: Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. LCD: Liquid -crystal display. B. LED: Light -emitting diode. C. NDIR: Non -dispersive infrared. D. SCBA: Self-contained breathing apparatus. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. For each type of refrigerant monitor, include refrigerant sensing range in ppm, temperature and humidity range, alarm outputs, display range, furnished specialties, installation requirements, and electric power requirement. 2. For SCBA, include mounting details, service requirements, and compliance with authorized Federal agency. 03878709 REFRIGERANT DETECTION AND ALARM 09/ 10 15635 - 1 B. Coordination Drawings: Include machinery -room layout showing location of monitoring devices and air -sampling tubing with filter/inlet locations in relation to refrigerant equipment. C. Product Certificates: For monitoring devices and SCBA, signed by product manufacturer. t �y D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant monitoring equipment and SCBA to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate refrigerant detection and alarm system with refrigerant contained in refrigeration equipment for compatibility. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS P; A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing...1 contents. 1. One calibration kit including clean air calibration gas bottle for zero calibration and specific refrigerant calibration gas for span calibration, minimum 58-L capacity, pressure regulator, and tubing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NDIR REFRIGERANT MONITOR A. Manufacturers: 1. Bacharach, Inc. LJ 2. Genesis International Inc. 3. Substitutions: Section 15000 — Substitutions. B. Description: Sensor shall be factory tested, calibrated, and certified to continuously i measure and display the specific gas concentration and shall be capable of indicating, alarming and automatically activating ventilation system. C. ASHRAE: Monitoring system shall comply with ASHRAE 15. D. Performance: 1. Refrigerant to Be Monitored: R-134a. 2. Range: 0 to 1000 ppm. 3. Sensitivity: a. Minimum Detectability: 20 ppm. b. Accuracy: 0 to 100 ppm; plus or minus 10 ppm. 100 to 1000 ppm; plus or minus 10 . percent of reading. g C. Repeatability: Plus or minus 1 percent of full scale. d. Response: Maximum 10 seconds per sample. e. Detection Level Set Points: 1) Detection Level 1: 50 ppm. 2) Detection Level 2: 250 ppm. 4. Sensitivity: €_ 4 a. Minimum Detectability: 20 ppm. b. Accuracy: 0 to 100 ppm; plus or minus 20 ppm, 100 to 1000 ppm; plus or ! j minus 5 percent of reading. C. Repeatability: Plus or minus I percent of full scale. 03878709 REFRIGERANT DETECTION AND ALARM 15635 -2 09/ 10 d. Response:_50 percent of a step change in 60 seconds. e. Detection Level Set Points: 1) Detection Level 1: 50 ppm. 2) Detection Level 2: 250 ppm. 5. Operating Temperature: 32 to 110 deg F. 6. Relative Humidity: 20 to 95 percent, noncondensing over the operating temperature range. 7. Site Elevation: Maximum 2,860 feet. E. Input/Output Features: I. Maximum Power Input: 120-V ac, 60 Hz, 75 W. 2. Number of Air -Sampling Points: Eight. 3. Air -Sampling Point Inlet Filter: 0.10-micron filter element -for each sampling point. 4. Air -Sampling Point Analog Output: 0- to 10-V do into 2k ohms, or 4- to 20-mA into I ohms matched to sensor output. 5. Alarm Relays: Minimum 4 relays at a minimum of 5-A resistive load each. 6. Alarm Set Points: Displayed on front of meter and adjustable through keypad on front of meter. 7. Alarm Acknowledge Switch: Mount in the front panel of the monitor to stop audible and visual notification appliances, but alarm LED remains illuminated. 8. Alarm Manual Reset: Momentary -contact push button in the front panel of the monitor stops audible and visual notification appliances, extinguishes alarm LED, and returns monitor to detection mode at current detection levels. 9. Display: Alphanumeric LCD, LED indicating lights for each detection level; acknowledge switch and test switch mounted on front panel; alarm status LEDs and service fault LEDs. 10. Audible Output: Minimum 75 dB at 10 feet (3 m). 11. Visible Output: Strobe light. 12. Sensor Analog Output: 0- to 10-V do into 2k ohms, or 4- to 20-mA into 1 k ohms. 13. Serial Output: RS-232 or RS-485 compatible with HVAC controls. 14. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X, with locking quarter -turn latch and key. 2.2 MONITOR ALARM SEQUENCE A. Detection Level 1: Notify the HVAC control workstation of the detection in the refrigeration equipment room on a rise or fall of refrigerant concentration to this level. Run ventilation system at high speed on a rise in concentration to this level, and change to low speed on a reduction in concentration below this level. Operate the ventilation system at high speed for a minimum of five minutes. Cycle amber strobe lights. B. Detection Level 2: Notify the HVAC control workstation of the detection in the refrigeration equipment room on a rise or fall of refrigerant concentration to this level. Run ventilation system at high speed on a rise in concentration to this level, and change to low speed on a reduction in concentration below this level. Sound alarm horns and cycle red strobe lights inside and outside refrigeration equipment room. Terminate operation of any combustion -process equipment located in the refrigeration equipment room. Provide manual reset for this detection level. C. Sensor Fault/Trouble: Notify HVAC control workstation of fault/trouble detection in monitor. 03878709 REFRIGERANT DETECTION AND ALARM 15635 - 3 09/ 10 2.3 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Horns: Comply with UL 464; electric -vibrating -polarized type, listed by a qualified testing agency with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Horns shall produce a sound -pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn. B. Visible Alarm Devices: Comply with UL 1971; three color xenon strobe lights, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The words "REFRIGERANT DETECTION" printed in minimum 1/2-inch- high letters on the lens. Rated light output is 110 candela. 2.4 AIR -SAMPLING TUBING A. Annealed -Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B). B. Polyethylene Tubing: ASTM D 2737, flame-retardant, nonmetallic tubing rated for ambient temperature range of 10 to 150 deg F. 2.5 SCBA A. Manufacturers: l . MSA; Safety Products Division. 2. Scott Health & Safety; a division of Tyco Safety Products. 3. Survivair. 4. Substitutions: Section 15000 — Substitutions. B. Description: Open -circuit, pressure -demand, compressed -air SCBA; includes completely assembled, portable, self-contained devices designed for application in hazardous breathing environment. Tested and certified by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health and the Mine Safety and Health Administration according to 42 CFR 84, Subpart H. C. Face Piece Silicon, EPDM, or nitrile rubber, one -size -fits -all with double -sealing edge, stainless -steel speaking diaphragm and lens retainer, five adjustable straps to hold face piece to head (two straps on each side and one on top), exhalation valve in mask, close -fitting nose piece to ensure no COz buildup, and perspiration drain to avoid skin irritation and prevent lens fogging. D. Backplate: Ergonomically designed of aluminum. E. Harness and Carrier Assembly: Large triangular back pad, with backplate and adjustable waist and shoulders straps. Modular design, detachable components, easy to clean and maintain. Shoulder straps are padded with flame -resistant material, reinforced with stainless -steel cable, and attached with T-nuts, washers, and screws. F. Air Cylinder, Regulator, and Pressure Gages: 60-minute, low-pressure 2216-psig, carbon -fiber composite, or all -aluminum cylinders fitted with quick -fill assembly for refilling and air transfer. Two -stage regulator, and gage with end of service time whistle signal. G. Wall -Mounted Case: Watertight, high visibility orange or yellow, corrosion -resistant, tough, lockable plastic case. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASHRAE 15. B. Install air -sampling inlets, or diffusion type monitors in pits, tunnels, or trenches in machinery room that are accessible to personnel. Q t_t 03878709 REFRIGERANT DETECTION AND ALARM l 5635 - 4 09/ 10 =1 C. Floor mount diffusion -type monitor, sensor/transmitters, or air -sampling inlets on slotted channel frame 12 to 18 inches above the floor in a location near the refrigerant source or between the refrigerant source and the ventilation duct inlet. D. Wall mount air -sampling multiple -point monitors with top of unit 60 inches above finished floor. E. Run air -sampling tubing from monitor to air -sampling point, in size as required by monitor manufacturer. Install tubing with maximum unsupported length of 36 inches, for tubing exposed to view. Terminate air -sampling tubing at sampling point with filter recommended by monitor manufacturer. F. Install air -sampling tubing with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration -of tubing and movement of equipment. G. Purge air -sampling tubing with dry, oil -free compressed air before connecting to monitor. H. Number -code or color -code air -sampling tubing for future identification and service of air -sampling multiple -point monitors. I. Extend air -sampling tubing from exhaust part of multiple -point monitors to outside. J. Extend air -sampling tubing from outdoors to outdoor inlet connection of NDIR monitors. Terminate air -sampling tubing at outdoor inlet location with filter recommended by monitor manufacturer. K. Install warning signs, labels, and nameplates to identify detection devices and SCBA according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification." L. Audible Alarm -Indicating Devices: Install at each entry door to refrigeration equipment room, and position not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install horns on flush -mounted back boxes with the device -operating mechanism concealed behind a grille. M. Visible Alarm -Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm horn at each entry door to refrigeration equipment room, and position at least 6 inches below the ceiling. N. Mount primary SCBA on wall outside interior door to refrigeration equipment room. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect field -assembled components, equipment installation, and electrical connections for compliance with requirements. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 3. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: a. Test procedures used. b. Test results that comply with requirements. C. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. C. Repair or replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 03878709 REFRIGERANT DETECTION AND ALARM 09/ 10 15635 - 5 r2 \} � %] DEMONSTRATION {} A. Engage a factory -authorized maim representative m train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintainrfig q&dae£olndeWcs and SC«&equipment. R. SCBA Training: Provide an instructional video that details operating procedures of equipment. END OFSECTION 1i 03878709 REFRIGERANT DETECTION AND ALARM 1565-6 0 d 0 ©} \} M1 SECTION 15640 k- INDUCED DRAFT COUNTERFLOW COOLING TOWERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Open -circuit, induced -draft, counterflow cooling towers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ABS: Ac lonitrile Butadiene Styrene. tYrene. B. BMS: Building management system. C. CTI: Cooling Technology Institute. D. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride. 1.4 REFERENCES A. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air -Conditioning Engineers/Illuminating Engineering Society of North America. 1. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004: Energy Standard for Buildings except Low -Rise Residential Buildings (ANSI). B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers. 1. ASME PTC 23-2003: ASME Performance Test Codes — Code on Atmospheric - Water Cooling Equipment (ANSI). C. ASTM International. 1. ASTM E 84-04: Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. D. Code of Federal Regulations. 1: 29 CFR — Labor, Chapter XVII — Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor, Part 1910 — "Occupational Safety and Health Standards: Subpart D — "Walking -Working Surfaces," Section 1910.23— "Guarding Floor and Wall Openings and Holes." 2004. E. Cooling Technology Institute. 1. CTI ATC 105-2000: Acceptance Test Code for Water Cooling Towers. 2. CTI ATC 128-1981: Code for Measurement of Sound from Water Cooling Towers. 3. CTI STD 201-2004: Certification Standard for Commercial Water -Cooling Towers Thermal Performance. F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association. 1. NEMA 250-2003: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). G. National Fire Protection Association. 1. NFPA 70-2005: National Electrical Code. 03878709 INDUCED DRAFT COUNTERFLOW COOLING TOWERS 15640 - 1 09/ 10 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, pressure drop, fan performance data, rating curves with selected points indicated, furnished specialties, and accessories. 1. Maximum flow rate. 2. Minimum flow rate. 3. Drift loss as percent of design flow rate. 4. Sound power levels in eight octave bands for operation with fans off, fans at minimum, and design speed. 5. Performance Curves for the Following: a. Varying entering -water temperatures from design to minimum. b. Varying ambient wet -bulb temperatures from design to minimum. C. Varying water flow rates from design to minimum. d. Varying fan operation (off, minimum, and design speed). 6. Fan airflow, brake horsepower, and drive losses. 7. Motor amperage, efficiency, and power factor at 100, 75, 50, and 25 percent of nameplate horsepower. 8. Electrical power requirements for each cooling tower component requiring power. B. Shop Drawings: Complete set of manufacturer's prints of cooling tower assemblies, control panels, sections and elevations, and unit isolation. Include the following: 1. Assembled unit dimensions. 2. Weight and load distribution. 3. Required clearances for maintenance and operation. 4. Sizes and locations of piping and wiring connections. 5. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Source quality -control reports. D. Field quality -control reports. E. Startup service reports. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each cooling tower to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. G. Warranty: Section 15000 — Product Warranties. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Certified by CTI. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 for energy efficiency. D. CTI Certification: Cooling tower thermal performance according to CTI STD 201, "Certification Standard for Commercial Water -Cooling Towers Thermal Performance." 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes, locations, and anchoring attachments of structural -steel support structures. 03878709 INDUCED DRAFT COUNTERFLOW COOLING TOWERS 15640 - 2 09/ 10 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace the following components of cooling towers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period: 1. Fan assembly including fan, drive, motor, bearings, sheaves and fan shafts. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OPEN -CIRCUIT INDUCED -DRAFT COUNTERFLOW COOLING TOWERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: l . Evapco Inc. 2. Baltimore Air Coil Company. 3. Marley Cooling Towers. 4. Or equivalent manufacturer. B. Cooling tower designed to resist minimum wind load of 30 lbf/sq. ft. (1.44 kPa). _v C. Casing and Frame: 1. Casing and Frame Material: Stainless steel. 2. Fasteners: Stainless steel. 3. Joints and Seams: Sealed watertight. 4. Welded Connections: Continuous and watertight. D. Collection Basin: l . Material: Stainless steel. 2. Strainer: Removable stainless -steel strainer with openings smaller than nozzle orifices. 3. Overflow and drain connections. y 4. Makeup water connection. 5. Outlet Connection: Grooved for mechanical joint coupling. 6. Equalizer connection for field -installed equalizer piping. 7. Basin Sweeper Distribution Piping and Nozzles: a. Pipe Material: PVC. ' b. Nozzle Material: Plastic. C. Configure piping and nozzles to minimize sediment from collecting in the collection basin. E. Electric/Electronic, Collection Basin Water -Level Controller with Solenoid Valve: 1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X. 2. Sensor: Solid-state controls with multiple electrode probes and relays factory wired to a terminal strip to provide control of water makeup valve, low- and high-level alarms, and output for shutoff of pump on low level. 3. Electrode Probes: Stainless steel. 4. Water Stilling Chamber: Stainless steel. 5. Solenoid Valve: Slow closing with stainless -steel body; controlled and powered •F through level controller in response to water -level set point. 6. Electrical Connection Requirements: 120 V, single phase, 60 Hz. 03878709 INDUCED DRAFT COUNTERFLOW COOLING TOWERS l 5640 - 3 09/ l 0 F. Electric Basin Heater 1. Stainless -Steel Electric Immersion Heaters: Installed in a threaded coupling on the side of the collection basin. 2. Heater Control Panel: Mounted on the side of each cooling tower cell. 3. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X. 4. Magnetic contactors controlled by a temperature sensor/controller to maintain collection basin water -temperature set point. Water -level probe shall monitor coolie tower water level and de -energize the heater when the water reaches g g low-level set point. 5. Control -circuit transformer with primary and secondary side fuses. 6. Terminal blocks with numbered and color -coded wiring to match wiring diagram. 7. Single -point, field -power connection to a fused disconnect switch and heater branch circuiting complying with NFPA 70. 8. Factory Wiring Method: Metal raceway for factory -installed wiring outside of enclosures, except make connections to each electric basin heater with liquidtight conduit. G. Pressurized Water Distribution Piping: Main header and lateral branch piping designed for �.., even distribution over fill throughout the flow range without the need for balancing valves and for connecting individual, removable, nonclogging spray nozzles. 1. Pipe Material: PVC. 2. Spray Nozzle Material: PVC or ABS molded plastic. 3. Piping Supports: Corrosion -resistant hangers and supports to resist movement during operation and shipment. H. Fill: 1. Materials: PVC resistant to rot, decay, and biological attack; with maximum flame -spread index of 5 according to ASTM E 84. 2. Fabrication: Fill -type sheets, fabricated, formed, and bonded together after forming into removable assemblies that are factory installed by manufacturer. 3. Fill Material Operating Temperature: Suitable for entering -water temperatures up 4 through 130 deg F. -- I. Removable Drift Eliminator: ` 1. Material: PVC; resistant to rot, decay, and biological attack; with maximum - flame -spread index of 5 according to ASTM E 84. 2. UV Treatment: Inhibitors to protect against damage caused by UV radiation. 3. Configuration: Multipass, designed and tested to reduce water carryover to achieve performance indicated. ? J. Air -Intake Louvers: 1. Material: PVC. 2. UV Treatment: Inhibitors to protect against damage caused by UV radiation. 3. Louver Blades: Arranged to uniformly direct air into cooling tower, to minimize air resistance, and to prevent water from splashing out of tower during all modes of operation including operation with fans off. j K. Removable Air -Intake Screens: Stainless -steel wire mesh. L. Axial Fan: Balanced at the factory after assembly. 1. Blade Material: Aluminum. E 2. Hub Material: Aluminum. 3. Blade Pitch: Field adjustable. 4. Protective Enclosure: Removable, stainless -steel, wire -mesh screens, complying with OSHA regulations. b_ ,r s� 03878709 INDUCED DRAFT COUNTERFLOW COOLING TOWERS 15640 - 4 09/ 10 ; 5. Fan Shaft Bearings: Self -aligning ball or roller bearings with moisture -proof seals and premium, moisture -resistant grease suitable for temperatures between minus 20 and plus 300 deg F. Bearings designed for an L-10 life of 75,000 hours. 6. Bearings Grease Fittings: Extended lubrication lines to an easily accessible location. M. Belt Drive: 1. Service Factor: 1.5 based on motor nameplate horsepower. 2. Sheaves: Fan and motor shafts shall have taper -lock sheaves fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials. a. Belt: One-piece, multigrooved, solid -back belt. b. Belt Material: Oil resistant, nonstatic conducting, and constructed of neoprene polyester cord. C. Belt -Drive Guard: Comply with OSHA regulations. N. Fan Motor: 1. General Requirements for Fan Motors: Comply with NEMA designation and temperature -rating requirements specified in Division 16. 2. Motor Enclosure: Totally enclosed air over (TEAO) with epoxy or polyurethane finish. 3. Energy Efficiency: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. 4. Service Factor: 1.15. 5. Insulation: Class H. 6. Variable -Speed Motors: Inverter -duty rated per NEMA MG-1, Section N, "Performance Standard Applying to All Machines," Part 31, "Definite -Purpose, Inverter -Fed, Polyphase Motors." 7. Severe -duty rating with the following features: a. Rotor and stator protected with corrosion -inhibiting epoxy resin. a ' b. Double -shielded, vacuum-degassed bearings lubricated with premium, moisture -resistant grease suitable for temperatures between minus 20 and plus 300 deg F. ' 8. Motor Base: Adjustable, or other suitable provision for adjusting belt tension. O. Fan Discharge Stack: Material shall match casing, manufacturer's standard design. 1. Stack Termination: Wire -mesh, stainless -steel screens; complying with OSHA regulations. P. Vibration Switch: For each fan drive. 1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X. 3 2. Vibration Detection: Sensor with a field -adjustable, acceleration -sensitivity set point in a range of 0 to 1 g and frequency range of 0 to 3000 cycles per minute. Cooling tower manufacturer shall recommend switch set point for proper operation and protection. 3. Provide switch for field connection to a BMS and hardwired connection to fan motor ' electrical circuit. 4. Switch shall, on sensing excessive vibration, signal an alarm through the BMS and shut down the fan. .. - Q. Controls: Comply with requirements in Section 15900. R. Control Package: Factory installed and wired, and functionally tested at factory before shipment. 1. NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosure with removable internally mount backplate. 2. Control -circuit transformer with primary and secondary side fuses. 3. Terminal blocks with numbered and color -coded wiring to match wiring diagram. Spare wiring terminal block for connection to external controls or equipment. 03878709 INDUCED DRAFT COUNTERFLOW COOLING TOWERS 15640 - 5 ,. 09/10 4. Micr_opracessor-based controller for automatic control of fan based on cooling tower leaving -water temperature with control features to improve operating efficiency based on outdoor ambient wet -bulb temperature by using adaptive logic. rr 5. Fan motor sequencer for multiple -cell and two -speed applications with automatic lead stage rotation. 6. Collection basin level controller complying with requirements in "Electric/Electronic, Collection Basin Water -Level Controller with Solenoid Valve" Paragraph. 7. Electric basin heaters with temperature control and low -water -level safety switch for each cell, complying with requirements in "Electric Basin Heater" Paragraph. 8. Vibration switch for each fan, complying with requirements in "Vibration Switch" Paragraph. 9. Single -point, field -power connection to a fused disconnect switch for each cooling tower cell. l a. Branch power circuit to each motor and electric basin heater and to , controls with a disconnect switch. .. b. NEMA-rated motor controller, hand -off -auto switch, and overcurrent �. protection for each motor. Provide variable frequency controller with manual bypass and line reactors for each variable -speed motor indicated. 10. Factory -installed wiring outside of enclosures shall be in metal raceway, except make connections to each motor and electric basin heater with liquidtight conduit. 11. Visual indication of status and alarm with momentary test push button for each motor. 12. Visual indication of elapsed run time, graduated in hours for each motor. 13. Cooling tower shall have hardware to enable BMS to remotely monitor and display t the following: a. Operational status of each motor. b. Position of dampers. C. Motor speed (percent). d. Output frequency (Hertz). e. Cooling tower entering -water temperature. f. Cooling tower leaving -fluid temperature. I g. Fan vibration alarm. (_ h. Collection basin high- and low-water level alarms. i. Collection basin heater status." j. Operational status of each cooling tower pump. S. Personnel Access Components: I. External Platforms with Handrails: Galvanized -steel bar grating at cooling tower access doors when cooling towers are elevated and not accessible from grade. a. Handrail: Aluminum, galvanized steel, or stainless steel complete with ' kneerail and toeboard. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.23. b. Davit: Furnish davit and bracket for mounting to coding tower at each access door location. Galvanized steel davit with stainless steel bracket. T. Capacities and Characteristics: Refer to the Drawings Cooling Tower Schedule for capacities and characteristics. j 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Verification of Performance: Test and certify cooling tower performance according to CTI STD 201, "Certification Standard for Commercial Water -Cooling Towers Thermal Performance." 03878709 INDUCED DRAFT COUNTERFLOW COOLING TOWERS 15640 - 6 09/ 10 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Before cooling tower installation, examine roughing -in for tower support, anchor -bolt sizes and locations, piping, and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting tower performance, maintenance, and operation. 1. Cooling tower locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations before roughing -in for piping and electrical connections. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install cooling towers on support structure indicated. = B. Equipment Mounting: Install cooling tower using elastomeric pads. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration Isolation." l . Minimum Deflection: l /2 inch. 2. Provide stainless -steel plate to equally distribute weight over elastomeric pad. C. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. D. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance. E. Loose Components: Install electrical components, devices, and accessories that are not factory mounted. 3.3 CONNECTIONS { A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to cooling towers to allow service and maintenance. C. Install flexible pipe connectors at pipe connections of cooling towers mounted on vibration isolators. D. Provide drain piping with valve at cooling tower drain connections and at low points in piping. E. Connect cooling tower overflows and drains, and piping drains to point indicated on Drawings. F. Domestic Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping." Connect to water -level control with shutoff valve and union, flange, or mechanical coupling at each connection. G. Supply and Return Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15 Section "Hydronic Piping and Equipment." Connect to entering cooling tower connections with shutoff valve, balancing valve, thermometer, plugged tee with pressure gage, and drain connection with valve. Connect to leaving cooling tower connection with shutoff valve. Make connections to cooling tower with a mechanical coupling. H. Equalizer Piping: Piping requirements to match supply and return piping. Connect an equalizer pipe, full size of cooling tower connection, between tower cells. Connect to cooling tower with shutoff valve. 03878709 INDUCED DRAFT COUNTERFLOW COOLING TOWERS l 5640 - 7 09/10 1 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to perform field tests and inspections. B. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. 3.5 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to perform startup service. B. Inspect field -assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical connections for proper assemblies, installations, and connections. C. Obtain performance data from manufacturer. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and perform the following: a. Clean entire unit including basins. } b. Verify that accessories are properly installed. C. Verify clearances for airflow and for cooling tower servicing. d. Check for vibration isolation and structural support. e. Lubricate bearings. f. Verify fan rotation for correct direction and for vibration or binding and correct problems. g. Adjust belts to proper alignment and tension. h. Operate variable -speed fans through entire operating range and check for harmonic vibration imbalance. Set motor controller to skip speeds resulting in abnormal vibration. i. Check vibration switch setting. Verify operation. j. Verify water level in tower basin. Fill to proper startup level. Check makeup water -level control and valve. k. Verify operation of basin heater and control. 1. Verify that cooling tower air discharge is not recirculating air into tower or� HVAC air intakes. Recommend corrective action. in. Replace defective and malfunctioning units. D. Start cooling tower and associated water pumps. Follow manufacturer's written starting procedures. E. Prepare a written startup report that records the results of tests and inspections. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Set and balance water flow to each tower inlet. B. Adjust water -level control for proper operating level. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain cooling towers. END OF SECTION 03878709 INDUCED DRAFT COUNTERFLOW COOLING TOWERS 15640 - 8 09/10 { I II SECTION 15830 FANS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Upblast centrifugal roof fans. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Bearing Manufacturers Association: 1. ABMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. 2. ABMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. B. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.: 1. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook. 2. AMCA 204 - Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans. 3. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating. 4. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans. 5. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data. C. American Refrigeration Institute: 1. ARI 1060 - Air -to -Air Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment Certification Equipment Program. D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators. 2. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 705 - Power Ventilators. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate size and configuration of fan assembly, mountings, weights, ductwork and accessory connections. C. Product Data: Submit data on each type of fan and include accessories, fan curves with specified operating point plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, electrical characteristics and connection requirements. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit fan manufacturer's instructions. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 03878709 09/10 FANS 15830 - 1 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear AMCA Certified Rating Seal. B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal. C. UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL 705. D. Balance Quality: Conform to AMCA 204. E. Energy Recovery Unit Wheel Energy Transfer Rating: Meet ARI 1060. F. Perform Work in accordance with Municipality of Lubbock Public Work's standard. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.8 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Pre -installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements B. Protect motors, shafts, and bearings from weather and construction dust. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish five year manufacturer's warranty for fans. 1.12 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for maintenance service. B. Furnish service and maintenance of fans for five years from Date of Substantial Completion. C. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of fans, and controls checkout and adjustments. Repair or replace parts in accordance with manufacturer's operating and maintenance data. Use parts produced by manufacturer of original equipment. D. Perform work without removing fans from service during building normal occupied hours. E. Provide emergency call back service during working hours for this maintenance period. 03878709 FANS 15830 - 2 09/10 F. Maintain locally, near Place of the Work, adequate stock of parts for replacement or emergency purposes. Have personnel available to ensure fulfillment of this maintenance service, without unreasonable loss of time. G. Perform maintenance work using competent and qualified personnel under supervision of manufacturer or original installer. H. Do not assign or transfer maintenance service to agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of Owner. 1.13 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 UPBLAST CENTRIFUGAL ROOF FANS A. Manufacturers: 1. Acme Engineering and Manufacturing Corp. is not an acceptable manufacturer. 2. Greenheck Corp. 3. Loren Cook Company. 4. Penn Ventilation. B. Fan Unit: Upblast type. Direct drive, spun aluminum housing with grease tray; resilient mounted motor; aluminum wire bird screen; square base to suit roof curb with continuous curb gaskets. C. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and adjustable pitch motor sheave selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid -position; fan shaft with self -aligning pre -lubricated ball bearings. D. Motor: Totally enclosed fan cooled. E. Roof Curb: 16 inch high self -flashing of galvanized steel construction with continuously welded seams, built-in cant strips, 1 inch insulation and curb bottom, and factory installed nailer strip. F. Disconnect Switch: Factory wired, non -fusible, in housing for thermal overload protected motor NEMA 3R enclosure. G. Accessories: 1. Motor Operated Damper: Aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edged with offset hinge pin, nylon bearings, blades linked and line voltage motor drive, power open. H. 2. Fan speed controller. Electrical Characteristics and Components: 1. Refer to Division 16. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify roof curbs are installed and dimensions are as instructed by manufacturer. 03878709 FANS 15830 - 3 09/ 10 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Secure roof fans with cadmium plated steel lag screws to roof curb. B. Install backdraft dampers on inlet to roof exhaust fans. 3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for manufacturer's field services. B. Furnish services of factory trained representative for minimum of one day to start-up, calibrate controls, and instruct Owner on operation and maintenance. 3.4 CLEANING A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for cleaning. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and training. B. Demonstrate fan operation and maintenance procedures. 3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work. B. Do not operate fans for until ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. 3.7 SCHEDULES A. See Schedule Sheet. END OF SECTION 03878709 FANS 15830 - 4 09/10 SECTION 15900 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, and Division l - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. B. All work of this Division shall be coordinated and provided by the single Building Management System (BMS) Contractor. The new DDC system shall be installed to be expandable to include future projects. The new frontend and computer system shall be installed in the maintenance office at the Lubbock Civic Center, coordinate exact location at project site. The existing control system serving the Civic Center and the Central Plant shall remain operational, only those pieces of equipment specifically detailed in the specifications and plans shall be controlled by the new DDC system. C. The work of this Division shall be scheduled, coordinated, and interfaced with the associated work of other trades. Reference the Division 15 Sections for details. D. The work of this Division shall be as required by the Specifications, Point Schedules and Drawings. E. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Analog: A continuously variable system or value not having discrete levels. Typically exists within a defined range of limiting values. B. Binary: A two -state system where an "ON" condition is represented by one discrete signal level and an "OFF" condition is represented by a second discrete signal level. C. Building Management System (BMS): The total integrated system of fully operational and functional elements, including equipment, software, programming, and associated materials, to be provided by this Division BMS Contractor and to be interfaced to the associated work of other related trades. D. BMS Contractor: The single Contractor to provide the work of this Division. This Contractor shall be the primary manufacturer, installer, commissioner and ongoing service provider for the BMS work. E. Control Sequence: An BMS pre-programmed arrangement of software algorithms, logical computation, target values and limits as required to attain the defined operational control objectives. F. Direct Digital Control: The digital algorithms and pre -defined arrangements included in the BMS software to provide direct closed -loop control for the designated equipment and controlled variables. Inclusive of Proportional, Derivative and Integral control algorithms together with target values, limits, logical functions, arithmetic functions, constant values, timing considerations and the like. G. BMS Network: The total digital on-line real-time interconnected configuration of BMS digital processing units, workstations, panels, sub -panels, controllers, devices and associated elements individually known as network nodes. May exist as one or more fully interfaced and integrated sub -networks, LAN, WAN or the like. H. Node: A digitally programmable entity existing on the BMS network. 03878709 09/10 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS l 5900 - l I. BMS Integration: The complete functional and operational interconnection and interfacing of all BMS work elements and nodes in compliance with all applicable codes, standards and ordinances so as to provide a single coherent BMS as required by this Division. J. Provide: The term "Provide" and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean to furnish, install in place, connect, calibrate, test, commission, warrant, document and supply the associated required services ready for operation. K. PC: IBM-compatible Personal Computer from a recognized major manufacturer. L. Furnish: The term "Furnish" and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean supply at the BMS Contractor's cost to the designated third party trade contractor for installation. BMS Contractor shall connect furnished items to the BMS, calibrate, test, commission, warrant and document. M. Wiring: The term "Wiring" and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean provide the BMS wiring and terminations. N. Install: The term "Install" and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean receive at the jobsite and mount. O. Protocol: The term "protocol" and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean a defined set of rules and standards governing the on-line exchange of data between BMS network nodes. P. Software: The term "software" and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean all of programmed digital processor software, preprogrammed firmware and project specific digital process programming and database entries and definitions as generally understood in the BMS industry for real-time, on-line, integrated BMS configurations. Q. The use of words in the singular in these Division documents shall not be considered as limiting when other indications in these documents denote that more than one such item is being referenced. R. Headings, paragraph numbers, titles, shading, bolding, underscores, clouds and other symbolic interpretation aids included in the Division documents are for general information only and are to assist in the reading and interpretation of these Documents. S. The following abbreviations and acronyms may be used in describing the work of this Division: ADC - Analog to Digital Converter A] - Analog Input AN - Application Node ANSI - American National Standards Institute AO - Analog Output ASCII - American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers AWG - American Wire Gauge CPU - Central Processing Unit CRT - Cathode Ray Tube DAC - Digital to Analog Converter DDC - Direct Digital Control DI - Digital Input DO - Digital Output EEPROM - Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory EMI - Electromagnetic Interference FAS - Fire Alarm Detection and Annunciation System GUI - Graphical User Interface 03878709 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 2 09/10 HOA - Hand -Off -Auto ID - Identification IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers I/O - Input/Output LAN - Local Area Network LCD - Liquid Crystal Display LED - Light Emitting Diode MCC - Motor Control Center NC - Normally Closed NIC - Not In Contract NO - Normally Open OWS - Operator Workstation OAT - Outdoor Air Temperature PC - Personal Computer RAM - Random Access Memory RF - Radio Frequency RFI - Radio Frequency Interference RH - Relative Humidity ROM - Read Only Memory RTD - Resistance Temperature Device SPDT - Single Pole Double Throw SPST - Single Pole Single Throw XVGA - Extended Video Graphics Adapter TBA - To Be Advised TCP/IP - Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol TTD - Thermistor Temperature Device UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply VAC - Volts, Alternating Current VAV - Variable Air Volume VDC - Volts, Direct Current WAN - Wide Area Network 1.3 BMS DESCRIPTION A. The Building Management System (BMS) shall be a complete system designed for use with the enterprise IT systems. This functionality shall extend into the equipment rooms. Devices residing on the automation network located in equipment rooms and similar shall be fully IT compatible devices that mount and communicate directly on the IT infrastructure in the facility. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with the Owner's IT staff to ensure that the FMS will perform in the Owner's environment without disruption to any of the other activities taking place on that LAN. B. All points of user interface shall be on standard PCs that do not require the purchase of any special software from the BMS manufacturer for use as a building operations terminal. The primary point of interface on these PCs will be a standard Web Browser. C. The work of the single BMS Contractor shall be as defined individually and collectively in all Sections of this Division specifications together with the associated Point Sheets and Drawings and the associated interfacing work as referenced in the related documents. 03878709 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 3 09/10 i! 2. Submittals shall be in defined packages. Each package shall be complete and shall only reference itself and previously submitted packages. The packages shall be as approved by the Architect and Engineer for Contract compliance. 3. Allow 15 working days for the review of each package by the Architect and Engineer in the scheduling of the total BMS work. 4. Equipment and systems requiring approval of local authorities must comply with such regulations and be approved. Filing shall be at the expense of the BMS a Contractor where filing is necessary. Provide a copy of all related correspondence and permits to the Owner. 5. Prepare an index of all submittals and shop drawings for the installation. Index shall include a shop drawing identification number, Contract Documents reference and item description. 6. The BMS Contractor shall correct any errors or omissions noted in the first review. 7. At a minimum, submit the following: a. BMS network architecture diagrams including all nodes and interconnections. b. Systems schematics, sequences and flow diagrams. C. Points schedule for each point in the BMS, including: Point Type, Object Name, Expanded ID, Display Units, Controller Type, and Address. d. Samples of Graphic Display screen types and associated menus. e. Detailed Bill of Material list for each system or application, identifying quantities, part numbers, descriptions, and optional features. Control Damper Schedule including a separate line for each damper provided under this section and a column for each of the damper attributes, a' including: Code Number, Fail Position, Damper Type, Damper Operator, Duct Size, Damper Size, Mounting, and Actuator Type. f. Control Valve Schedules including a separate line for each valve provided under this section and a column for each of the valve attributes: Code Number, Configuration, Fail Position, Pipe Size, Valve Size, Body Configuration, Close off Pressure, Capacity, Valve CV, Design Pressure, and Actuator Type. - g. Details of all BMS interfaces and connections to the work of other trades. ; h. Product data sheets or marked catalog pages including part number, photo and ' description for all products including software. 1.7 RECORD DOCUMENTATION A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals l . Three (3) copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided to the Owner's Representative upon completion of the project. The entire Operation and I. Maintenance Manual shall be furnished on Compact Disc media, and include the following for the BMS provided: a. Table of contents. b. As -built system record drawings. Computer Aided Drawings (CAD) record drawings shall represent the as -built condition of the system and incorporate i all information supplied with the approved submittal. 4 C. Manufacturer's product data sheets or catalog pages for all products including software. d. System Operator's manuals. e. Archive copy of all site -specific databases and sequences. '- f. BMS network diagrams. g. Interfaces to all third -party products and work by other trades. 03878709 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS l 5900 - 6 09/10 2. The Operation and Maintenance Manual CD shall be self-contained, and include all necessary software required to access the product data sheets. A logically organized table of contents shall provide dynamic links to view and print all product data sheets. Viewer software shall provide the ability to display, zoom, and search all documents. JI-ILYRUM A. Standard Material and Labor Warranty: 1. Provide a one-year labor and material warranty on the BMS. 2. If within twelve (12) months from the date of acceptance of product, upon written notice from the owner, it is found to be defective in operation, workmanship or materials, it shall be replaced, repaired or adjusted at the option of the BMS Contractor at the cost of the BMS Contractor. 3. Maintain an adequate supply of materials within 150 miles of the Project site such that replacement of key parts and labor support, including programming. Warranty work shall be done during BMS Contractor's normal business hours. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 LARGE GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. The Building Management System (BMS) shall use an open architecture and fully support a multi -vendor environment. To accomplish this effectively, the BMS shall support open communication protocol standards and integrate a wide variety of third -party devices and applications. The system shall be designed for use on the Internet, or intranets using off the shelf, industry standard technology compatible with other owner provided networks. B. The Building Management System shall consist of the following: 1. Standalone Network Automation Engine(s). 2. Field Equipment Controller(s). 3. Input/Output Module(s). 4. Local Display Device(s). 5. Portable Operator's Terminal(s). 6. Distributed User Interface(s). 7. Network processing, data storage and communications equipment. 8. Other components required for a complete and working BMS. C. The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit expansion of both capacity and functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, controllers and operator devices, while re -using existing controls equipment. D. System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for alarm reporting and control execution. 1. The failure of any single component or network connection shall not interrupt the execution of control strategies at other operational devices. 2. The System shall maintain all settings and overrides through a system reboot. E. System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for alarm reporting and control execution. F. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Johnson Controls, Metasys System. 2. Or equivalent manufacturer. 3. Read Section 2. LA above. 03878709 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 7 09/10 i 2.2 BMS ARCHITECTURE A. Automation Network 1. The automation network shall be based on a PC industry standard of Ethernet TCP/IP. Where used, LAN controller cards shall be standard "off the shelf' products available through normal PC vendor channels. 2. The automation network shall be capable of operating at a communication speed of 100 Mbps, with full peer -to -peer network communication. 3. Network Automation Engines (NAE), or Invensys equivalent shall reside on the automation network. 4. The automation network will be compatible with other enterprise -wide networks. Where indicated, the automation network shall be connected to the enterprise network and share resources with it by way of standard networking devices and practices. B. Control Network 1. Network Automation Engines (NAE) shall provide supervisory control over the control network and shall support all three (3) of the following communication protocols: a. BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE SSPC-135, Clause 9. 1) The NAE shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL Label. 2) The NAE shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Building Controller (B-BC) or Invensys equivalent. b. LonWorks enabled devices using the Free Topology Transceiver (FTT-I Oa). C. The Johnson Controls N2 Field Bus or Invensys equivalent. 2. Control networks shall provide either "Peer -to -Peer," Master -Slave, or Supervised Token Passing communications, and shall operate at a minimum communication speed of 9600 baud. 3. DDC Controllers shall reside on the control network. 4. Control network communication protocol shall be BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE SSPC-135. 5. A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) shall be provided for each controller device (master or slave) that will communicate on the BACnet MS/TP Bus. 2.3 USER INTERFACE A. Dedicated Web Based User Interface 1. The BMS Contractor shall provide and install a new monitor, computer, keyboard, mouse, and printer. This will be used for command entry, information management, network alarm management, and database management functions. All real-time control functions, including scheduling, history collection and alarming, shall be resident in the BMS Network Automation Engines to facilitate greater fault tolerance and reliability. 03878709 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 8 09/ 10 2. Dedicated User Interface Architecture — The architecture of the computer shall be implemented to conform to industry standards, so that it can accommodate applications provided by the BMS Contractor and by other third party applications suppliers, including but not limited to Microsoft Office Applications. Specifically it must be implemented to conform to the following interface standards. a. Microsoft Internet Explorer for user interface functions. b. Microsoft Office Professional for creation, modification and maintenance of reports, sequences other necessary building management functions. C. Microsoft Outlook or other e-mail program for supplemental alarm functionality and communication of system events, and reports. d. Required network operating system for exchange of data and network functions such as printing of reports, trends and specific system summaries. 3. PC Hardware — The personal computer(s) shall be configured as follows: a. Memory — 1 GB (512 MB Minimum). b. CPU— Pentium 4 processor. 2.8 Hz Clock Speed (2.0 GHz minimum). C. Hard Drive — 80 GB free hard drive space (40GB minimum). d. Hard drive backup system — CD/RW, DVD/RW or network backup software provided by IT department. e. CD ROM Drive — 32X performance. f. Ports — (2) Serial and (1) parallel, (2) USB ports. g. Keyboard — 101 Keyboard and 2 Button Mouse. h. CRT configuration — 1-2 CRTs as follows: 1) Each Display — 17" Flat Panel Monitor 1280 x 1024 resolution minimum. 2) 16 bit or higher color resolution. 3) Display card with multiple monitor support LAN communications — Ethernet communications board; 3Comm or equal. 4. Operating System Software a. Windows XP Professional b. Where user interface is not provided via browser, provide complete operator workstation software package, including any hardware or software keys. Include the original installation disks and licenses for all included software, device drivers, and peripherals. C. Provide software registration cards to the Owner for all included software. 5. Peripheral Hardware a. Reports Printer: 1) Printer Make — Hewlett Packard DeskJet. 2) Print Speed — 600 DPI Black, 300 DPI Color. 3) Buffer — 64 K Input Print Buffer. 4) Color Printing — Include Color Kit. B. Distributed Web Based User Interface 1. All features and functions of the dedicated user interface previously defined in this document shall be available on any computer connected directly or via a wide area or virtual private network (WANNPN) to the automation network and conforming to the following specifications. 2. The software shall run on the Microsoft Internet Explorer (6.0 or higher) browser. 3. Minimum Hardware Requirements: a. 256 MB RAM. b. 2.0 GHz Clock Speed Pentium 4 Microprocessor. C. 40.0 GB Hard Drive. d. 1 Keyboard with 83 keys (minimum). 03878709 09/10 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 9 e. SVGA 1024x768 resolution display with 64K colors and 16 bit color depth. f. Mouse or other pointing device. C. User Interface Application Components 1. Operator Interface a. An integrated browser based client application shall be used as the user operator interface program. b. The System shall employ an event -driven rather than a device polling methodology to dynamically capture and present new data to the user. C. All Inputs, Outputs, Setpoints, and all other parameters as defined within Part 3, shown on the design drawings, or required as part of the system software, shall be displayed for operator viewing and modification from the operator interface software. d. The user interface software shall provide help menus and instructions for each operation and/or application. e. The system shall support customization of the Ul configuration and a home page display for each operator. f. The system shall support user preferences in the following screen presentations: 1) Alarm. 2) Trend. 3) Display. 4) Applications. g. All controller software operating parameters shall be displayed for the operator to view/modify from the user interface. These include: setpoints, alarm limits, time delays, PID tuning constants, run-times, point statistics, schedules, and so forth. h. The Operator Interface shall incorporate comprehensive support for functions including, but not necessarily limited to, the following: 1) User access for selective information retrieval and control command execution. 2) Monitoring and reporting. 3) Alarm, non -normal, and return to normal condition annunciation. 4) Selective operator override and other control actions. 5) Information archiving, manipulation, formatting, display and reporting. 6) FMS internal performance supervision and diagnostics. 7) On-line access to user HELP menus. 8) On-line access to current FMS as -built records and documentation. 9) Means for the controlled re -programming, re -configuration of FMS operation and for the manipulation of FMS database information in compliance with the prevailing codes, approvals and regulations for individual FMS applications. i. The system shall support a list of application programs configured by the users that are called up by the following means: I) The Tools Menu. 2) Hyperlinks within the graphics displays. 3) Key sequences. j. The operation of the control system shall be independent of the user interface, which shall be used for operator communications only. Systems that rely on an operator workstation- to provide supervisory control over controller execution of the sequences of operations or system communications shall not be acceptable. 03878709 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 10 09/10 2. Navigation Trees a. The system will have the capability to display multiple navigation trees that will aid the operator in navigating throughout all systems and points connected. At minimum provide a tree that identifies all systems on the networks. b. Provide the ability for the operator to add custom trees. The operator will be able to define any logical grouping of systems or points and arrange them on the tree in any order. It shall be possible to nest groups within other groups. Provide at minimum 5 levels of nesting. C. The navigation trees shall be "dockable" to other displays in the user interface such as graphics. This means that the trees will appear as part of the display, but can be detached and then minimized to the Windows task bar or closed altogether. A simple keystroke will reattach the navigation to the primary display of the user interface. 3. Alarms a. Alarms shall be routed directly from Network Automation Engines to PCs and servers. It shall be possible for specific alarms from specific points to be routed to specific PCs and servers. The alarm management portion of the user interface shall, at the minimum, provide the following functions: 1) Log date and time of alarm occurrence. 2) Generate a "Pop -Up" window, with audible alarm, informing a user that an alarm has been received. 3) Allow a user, with the appropriate security level, to acknowledge, temporarily silence, or discard an alarm. 4) Provide an audit trail on hard drive for alarms by recording user acknowledgment, deletion, or disabling of an alarm. The audit trail shall include the name of the user, the alarm, the action taken on the alarm, and a time/date stamp. 5) Provide the ability to direct alarms to an e-mail address or alphanumeric pager. This must be provided in addition to the pop up window described above. Systems that use e-mail and pagers as the exclusive means of annunciating alarms are not acceptable. 6) Any attribute of any object in the system may be designated to report an alarm. b. The FMS shall annunciate diagnostic alarms indicating system failures and non -normal operating conditions. C. The FMS shall allow a minimum of 4 categories of alarm sounds customizable through user defined way.files. d. The FMS shall annunciate application alarms at minimum, as required by Part 3. 4. Reports and Summaries a. Reports and Summaries shall be generated and directed to the user interface displays. As a minimum, the system shall provide the following reports: 1) All points in the BMS. 2) All points in each BMS application. 3) All points in a specific controller. 4) All points in a user -defined group of points. 5) All points currently in alarm. 6) All points locked out. 03878709 09/10 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 11 7) All BMS schedules. 8) All user defined and adjustable variables, schedules, interlocks and the like. b. Summaries and Reports shall be accessible via standard Ul functions and not dependent upon custom programming or user defined HTML pages. C. Selection of a single menu item, tool bar item, or too] bar button shall print any displayed report or summary on the system printer for use as a building management and diagnostics tool. d. The system shall allow for the creation of custom reports and queries via a standard web services XML interface and commercial off -the -shelf software such as Microsoft Access, Microsoft Excel, or Crystal Reports. 5. Schedules a. A graphical display for time -of -day scheduling and override scheduling of building operations shall be provided. At a minimum, the following functions shall be provided: 1) Weekly schedules. 2) Exception Schedules. t 3) Monthly calendars. b. Weekly schedules shall be provided for each group of equipment with a specific time use schedule. C. It shall be possible to define one or more exception schedules for each schedule including references to calendars d. Monthly calendars shall be provided that allow for simplified scheduling of holidays and special days for a minimum of five years in advance. Holidays and special days shall be user -selected with the pointing device or keyboard, and shall automatically reschedule equipment operation as previously defined on the exception schedules. e. Changes to schedules made from the User Interface shall directly modify the Network Automation Engine schedule database. f. Schedules and Calendars shall comply with ASHRAE SP135/2003 BACnet Standard. g. Selection of a single menu item or tool bar button shall print any displayed schedule on the system printer for use as a building management and diagnostics tool. 6. Password a. Multiple -level password access protection shall be provided to allow the,,, user/manager to user interface control, display, and database manipulation capabilities deemed appropriate for each user, based on an assigned password. b. Each user shall have the following: a user name (24 characters minimum), a: password (12 characters minimum), and access levels. C. The system shall allow each user to change his or her password at will. 4 d. When entering or editing passwords, the system shall not echo the actual 1( characters for display on the monitor. e. A minimum of five levels of access shall be supported individually or in any combination as follows: I 1) Level 1 = View Data. t 2) Level 2 = Command. r� 3) Level 3 = Operator Overrides. 4) Level 4 = Database Modification. 5) Level 5 = Database Configuration. 6) Level 6 = All privileges, including Password Add/Modify. t. 03878709 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 12 09/ 10 I f. A minimum of 100 unique passwords shall be supported. g. Operators shall be able to perform only those commands available for their respective passwords. Display of menu selections shall be limited to only those items defined for the access level of the password used to log -on. h. The system shall automatically generate a report of log-on/log-off and system activity for each user. Any action that results in a change in the operation or configuration of the control system shall be recorded, including: modification of point values, schedules or history collection parameters, and all changes to the alarm management system, including the acknowledgment and deletion of alarms. Screen Manager a. The User Interface shall be provided with screen management capabilities that allow the user to activate, close, and simultaneously manipulate a minimum of 4 active display windows plus a network or user defined navigation tree. Dynamic Color Graphics a. The graphics application program shall be supplied as an integral part of the User Interface. Browser or Workstation applications that rely only upon HTML pages shall not be acceptable. b. The graphics applications shall include a create/edit function and a runtime function. The system architecture shall support an unlimited number of graphics documents (graphic definition files) to be generated and executed. C. The graphics shall be able to display and provide animation based on it;w4lum uaia uiai ia`acqulre , derived, or entered. d. Graphics runtime functions — A maximum of 16 graphic applications shall be able to execute at any one time on a user interface or workstation with 4 visible to the user. Each graphic application shall be capable of the following functions: 1) All graphics shall be fully scalable. 2) The graphics shall support a maintained aspect ratio. 3) Multiple fonts shall be supported. 4) Unique background shall be assignable on a per graphic basis. 5) The color of all animations and values on displays shall indicate if the status of the object attribute. e. Operation from graphics — It shall be possible to change values (setpoints) and states in system controlled equipment by using drop -down windows accessible via the pointing device. f. Graphic editing too] — A graphic editing tool shall be provided that allows for the creation and editing of graphic files. The graphic editor shall be capable of performing/defining all animations, and defining all runtime binding. 1) The graphic editing tool shall in general provide for the creation and positioning of point objects by dragging from tool bars or drop -downs and positioning where required. 2) In addition, the graphic editing tool shall be able to add additional content to any graphic by importing backgrounds in the SVG, BMP or JPG file formats. g. Aliasing — Many graphic displays representing part of a building and various building components are exact duplicates, with the exception that the various variables are bound to different field values. Consequently, it shall be possible to bind the value of a graphic display to aliases, as opposed to the physical field tags. 03878709 09/ 10 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 13 9. Historical Trending and Data Collection-- t_ a. Each Automation Engine shall store trend and point history data for all analog and digital inputs and outputs, as follows: 1) Any point, physical or calculated, may be designated for trending. Three methods of collection shall be allowed: (a) Defined time interval. (b) Upon a change of value. 2) Each Automation Engine shall have the capability to store multiple samples for each physical point and software variable based upon available memory, including an individual sample time/date stamp. Points may be assigned to multiple history trends with different collection parameters. b. Trend and change of value data shall be stored within the engine and uploaded to a dedicated trend database or exported in a selectable data format via a = provided data export utility. Uploads to a dedicated database shall occur based 1 upon one of the following: user -defined interval, manual command, or when the trend buffers are full. Exports shall be as requested by the user or on a - time scheduled basis. C. The system shall provide a configurable data storage subsystem for the collection of historical data. Data can be stored in either Microsoft Access or SQL database format. 10. Trend Data Viewing and Analysis a. Provide a trend viewing utility that shall have access to all database points. b. It shall be possible to retrieve any historical database point for use in displays and reports by specifying the point name and associated trend name. t C. The trend viewing utility shall have the capability to define trend study displays to include multiple trends. d. Displays shall be able to be single or stacked graphs with on-line selectable display characteristics, such as ranging, color, and plot style. e. Display magnitude and units shall both be selectable by the operator at any time without reconfiguring the processing or collection of data. This is a zoom capability. f. Display magnitude shall automatically be scaled to show full graphic resolution of the data being displayed. g. Trend studies shall be capable of calculating and displaying calculated variables including highest value, lowest value and time based accumulation. h. The Display shall support the user's ability to change colors, sample sizes, and types of markers. 11. Database Management a. The System shall provide a Database Manager that separates the database monitoring and managing functions by supporting two separate windows. b. Database secure access shall be accomplished using standard SQLY. authentication including the ability to access data for use outside of the Building Automation application. C. The database managing function shall include summarized information on trend, alarm, event, and audit for the following database management actions: 1) Backup. 2) Purge. 3) Restore. 03878709 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 14 09/10 1 d. The Database Manager Shall Support Four Tabs: 1) Statistics — shall display Database Server information and Trend, Alarm (Event), and Audit information on the Metasys Databases. 2) Maintenance — shall provide an easy method of purging records from the Metasys Server trend, alarm (event), and audit databases by supporting separate screens for creating a backup prior to purging, selecting the database, and allowing for the retention of a selected number of day's data. 3) Backup — Shall provide the means to create a database backup file and select a storage location. 4) Restore — shall provide a restricted means of restoring a database by requiring the user to log into an Expert Mode in order to view the Restore screen. e. The Status Bar shall appear at the bottom ofallMetasys Database Manager Tabs and shall provide information on the current database activity. The following icons shall be provided: 1) Ready 2) Purging Record from a database 3) Action Failed 4) Refreshing Statistics 5) Restoring database 6) Shrinking a database 7) Backing up a database 8) Resetting internet information Services 9) Starting the Metasys Device Manager 10) Shutting down the Metasys Device Manager 11) Action successful f. The Database Manager monitoring functions shall be accessed through the Monitoring Settings window and shall continuously read database information once the user has logged in. g. The System shall provide user notification via taskbar icons and e-mail messages when a database value has exceeded a warning or alarm limit. h. The Monitoring Settings window shall have the following sections: 1) General — Shall allow the user to set and review scan intervals and start times. 2) Email — Shall allow the user to create and review e-mail and phone text messages to be delivered when a Warning or Alarm is generated. 3) Warning — shall allow the user to define the Warning limit parameters, set the Reminder Frequency, and link the e-mail message. 4) Alarm — shall allow the user to define the Alarm limit parameters, set the Reminder Frequency, and link the e-mail message. 5) Database login — Shall protect the system from unauthorized database manipulation by creating a Read Access and a Write Access for each of the Trend, Alarm (Event) and Audit databases as well as an Expert Mode required to restore a database. i. The Monitoring Settings Taskbar shall provide the following informational icons: 1) Normal — Indicates by color and size that all databases are within their limits. 2) Warning - Indicates by color and size that one or more databases have exceeded their Warning limit. 03878709 09/10 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 15 3) Alarm - Indicates by color and size that one or more databases have exceeded their Alarm limit. j. The System shall provide user notification via Taskbar icons and e-mail messages when a database value has exceeded a warning or alarm limit. 12. Demand Limiting and Load Rolling a. The System shall provide a Demand Limiting and Load Rolling program for the purpose of limiting peak energy usage and reducing overall energy consumption. b. The System shall support both Sliding Window and Fixed Window methods of predicting demand. C. The System shall support three levels of sensitivity in the Sliding Window demand calculations for fine tuning the system. l) Low Setting — Sheds loads later and over the shortest amount of time. Maximizes the time the equipment is on. 2) Medium Setting — Sheds loads earlier over a longer amount of time than the Low Setting. Increases the time the equipment is on and decreases the probability of exceeding the Tariff Target over the Low Setting. 3) High Setting — Sheds loads earlier over a longer amount of time than the Medium Setting. Minimizes the probability of exceeding the Tariff Target. d. The System shall have both a Shed Mode and a Monitor Only Mode of operation. 1) When the Shed Mode is engaged, the System shall actively control the Demand. 2) When the Monitor Mode is engaged, the System will simulate the shedding action but will not take any action. e. The Demand Limiting program shall monitor the energy consumption rate and compare it to a user defined Tariff Target. The system shall maintain consumption below the target by selectively shedding loads based upon a user defined strategy. f. The Demand Limiting program shall be capable of supporting a minimum of 10 separate Load Priorities. Each load shall be user assigned to a Load Priority. g. The Demand Limiting program shall be capable of supporting a minimum of 12 separate Tariff Targets defining the maximum allowed average power during the current interval. h. The System shall support a Maximum Shed Time for each load as determined by the user. The system shall restore the load before the Maximum Shed time has expired. i. The System shall support a Minimum Shed Time for each load as determined by the user. The system shall not restore the load sooner than the Minimum Shed Time has expired. j. The System shall support a Minimum Release Time for each load as determined by the user. The System shall not shed the load until it has been off for the Minimum Release time. L 03878709 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 16 09/ 10 k. The System shall support three user defined options if the meter goes unreliable. 1) Shedding — The currently shed loads will be released as their Maximum shed Times expire. 2) Maintain the Current Shed Rate — The System will use the Demand t Limiting shed rate that was present when the meter went unreliable. 3) Use Unreliable Meter Shed Rate — the system will control to a user defined Unreliable Shed Rate target. 1. The Load Rolling program shall sum the loads currently shed and compare it to a user defined Load Rolling Target. The system shall maintain consumption below the target by selectively shedding loads based upon a user defined Load Priority. In. The Load Rolling program shall be capable of supporting a minimum of 10 separate Load Priorities. Each load shall be user assigned to a Load Priority. n. The Load Rolling program shall be capable of supporting a minimum of 12 separate Tariff Targets defining the amount of power by which the demand must be reduced. o. The System shall provide the user with a Load Tab that displays all of the Demand Limiting and Load Rolling parameters for any selected load. p. The System shall provide the user with a Load Summary that displays all of the loads associated with the Demand Limiting and Load Rolling programs. Status Icons for each load shall indicate: 0 Load is Offline 1) Load is Disabled. 2) Load is Shed. 3) Load is Locked. 4) Load is in Comfort Override. q. The Load Summary shall include a Load Summary Runtime view listing the following load conditions: 1) Load Priority. 2) Shed Strategy. 3) Load Rating. 4) Present Value. 5) Ineligibility Status. 6) Active Timer. 7) Time Remaining. 8) Last Shed Time. 2.4 NETWORK AUTOMATION ENGINES (NAE) A. Network Automation Engine 1. The Network Automation Engine (NAE) shall be a fully user -programmable, supervisory controller. The NAE shall monitor the network of distributed application -specific controllers, provide global strategy and direction, and -_y communicate on a peer -to -peer basis with other Network Automation Engines. 2. Automation Network — The NAE shall reside on the automation network and shall q support a subnet of system controllers. 03878709 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 17 09/ 10 3. User Interface — Each NAE shall have the ability to deliver a web based User Interface (Ul) as previously described. All computers connected physically or virtually to the automation network shall have access to the web based Ul. a. The web based UI software shall be imbedded in the NAE. Systems that require a local copy of the system database on the user's personal computer are not acceptable. b. The NAE shall support up a minimum of four (4) concurrent users. C. The web based user shall have the capability to access all system data through one NAE. d. Remote users connected to the network through an Internet Service Provider (ISP) or telephone dial up shall also have total system access through one NAE. e. Systems that require the user to address more than one NAE to access all system information are not acceptable. f. The NAE shall have the capability of generating web based UI graphics. The graphics capability shall be imbedded in the NAE. g. Systems that support Ul Graphics from a central database or require the graphics to reside on the user's personal computer are not acceptable. h. The web based Ul shall support the following functions using a standard version of Microsoft Internet Explorer: I ) Configuration. 2) Commissioning. 3) Data Archiving. 4) Monitoring. 5) Commanding. 6) System Diagnostics. i. Systems that require workstation software or modified web browsers are not acceptable. j. The NAE shall allow temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected modems. 4. Processor — The NAE shall be microprocessor -based with a minimum word size of 32 bits. The NAE shall be a multi -tasking, multi-user, and real-time digital control processor. Standard operating systems shall be employed. NAE size and capability shall be sufficient to fully meet the requirements of this Specification. 5. Memory — Each NAE shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system, databases, and control programs, and to provide supervisory control for all control level devices. 6. Hardware Real Time Clock — The NAE shall include an integrated, hardware -based, real-time clock. 7. The NAE shall include troubleshooting LED indicators to identify the following conditions: a. Power - On/Off. b. Ethernet Traffic — Ethernet Traffic/No Ethernet Traffic. C. Ethernet Connection Speed — 10 Mbps/l 00 Mbps. d. FC Bus A — Normal Communications/No Field Communications. e. FC Bus B —Normal Communications/No Field Communications. f. Peer Communication — Data Traffic between NAE Devices. g. Run — NAE Running/NAE in Startup/NAE Shutting Down/Software Not Running. h. Bat Fault — Battery Defective, Data Protection Battery Not Installed. i. 24 VAC — 24 VAC Present/Loss Of 24VAC. 9 03878709 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 18 09/10 j. Fault — General Fault. k. Modem RX — NAE Modem Receiving Data. 1. Modem TX — NAE Modem Transmitting Data. 8. Communications Ports — The NAE shall provide the following ports for operation of operator Input/Output (I/O) devices, such as industry -standard computers, modems, and portable operator's terminals. a. Two (2) USB port. b. Two (2) URS-232 serial data communication port. C. Two (2) RS-485 port. d. One (1) Ethernet port. 9. Diagnostics — The NAE shall continuously perform self -diagnostics, communication diagnosis, and diagnosis of all panel components. The Network Automation Engine shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, low battery conditions, or repeated failures to establish communication. 10. Power Failure — In the event of the loss of normal power, The NAE shall continue to operate for a user adjustable period of up to 10 minutes after which there shall be an orderly shutdown of all programs to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. a. During a loss of normal power, the control sequences shall go to the normal system shutdown conditions. All critical configuration data shall be saved into Flash memory. b. Upon restoration of normal power and after a minimum off -time delay, the controller shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention through a normal soft -start sequence. 11. Certification — The NAE shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 12. Controller network — The NAE shall support the following communication protocols on the controller network: a. The NAE shall support BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE SSPC-135, Clause 9 on the controller network. 1) The NAE shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL Label. 2) The NAE shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Building Controller (B-BC). 3) A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be provided for the NAE. 4) The Conformance Statements shall be submitted 10 days prior to bidding. 5) The NAE shall support a minimum of 100 control devices. b. The NAE shall support LonWorks enabled devices using the Free Topology Transceiver FTT10. 1) All LonWorks controls devices shall be LonMark certified. 2) The NAE shall support a minimum of 255 LonWorks enabled control devices. C. The NAE shall support the Johnson Controls N2 Field Bus. 1) The NAE shall support a minimum of 100 N2 control devices. 2) The Bus shall conform to Electronic Industry Alliance (EIA) Standard RS-485. 3) The Bus shall employ a master/slave protocol where the NAE is the master. 03878709 09/10 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 19 4) The Bus shall employ a four (4) level priority system for polling frequency. 5) The Bus shall be optically isolated from the NAE. 6) The Bus shall support the Metasys Integrator System. 2.5 DDC SYSTEM CONTROLLERS A. Field Eq ui ment Controller P 1. The Field Equipment Controller (FEC) shall be a fully user -programmable, digital controller that communicates via BACnet MS/TP protocol. a. The FEC shall support BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE SSPC-135, Clause 9 on the controller network. l) The FEC shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL Label. 2) The FEC shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC). 3) A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be provided for the FEC. 4) The Conformance Statement shall be submitted 10 days prior to bidding. b. The FEC shall employ a finite state control engine to eliminate unnecessary conflicts between control functions at crossover points in their operational i sequences. Suppliers using non -state based DDC shall provide separate control strategy diagrams for all controlled functions in their submittals. C. Controllers shall be factory programmed with a continuous adaptive tuning algorithm that senses changes in the physical environment and continually adjusts loop tuning parameters appropriately. Controllers that require manual tuning of loops or perform automatic tuning on command only shall not be acceptable. 2. The FEC shall be assembled in a plenum -rated plastic housing with flammability rated to UL94-5VB. { 3. The FEC shall include a removable base to allow pre -wiring without the controller. 4. The FEC shall include troubleshooting LED indicators to identify the following conditions: a. Power On. b. Power Off. C. Download or Startup in progress, not ready for normal operation. d. No Faults. e. Device Fault. f. Field Controller Bus - Normal Data Transmission. g. Field Controller Bus - No Data Transmission. 1 h. Field Controller Bus - No Communication. i. Sensor -Actuator Bus - Normal Data Transmission. j. Sensor -Actuator Bus - No Data Transmission. k. Sensor -Actuator Bus - No Communication. 5. The FEC shall accommodate the direct wiring of analog and binary UO field points. - 6. The FEC shall support the following types of inputs and outputs: a. Universal Inputs - shall be configured to monitor any of the following: l) Analog Input, Voltage Mode. 2) Analog Input, Current Mode. 3) Analog Input, Resistive Mode. 03878709 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 20 09/ 10 1= 4) Binary Input, Dry Contact Maintained Mode. 5) Binary Input, Pulse Counter Mode. b. Binary Inputs - shall be configured to monitor either of the following: 1) Dry Contact Maintained Mode. 2) Pulse Counter Mode. C. Analog Outputs - shall be configured to output either of the following: 1) Analog Output, Voltage Mode. 2) Analog Output, current Mode. d. Binary Outputs - shall output the following: 1) 24 VAC Triac. e. Configurable Outputs - shall be capable of the following: 1) Analog Output, Voltage Mode. 2) Binary Output Mode. The FEC shall have the ability to reside on a Field Controller Bus (FC Bus). a. The FC Bus shall be a Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP) Bus supporting BACnet Standard protocol SSPC-135, Clause 9. b. The FC Bus shall support communications between the FECs and the NAE. C. The FC Bus shall also support Input/Output Module (IOM) communications with the FEC and with the NAE. d. The FC Bus shall support a minimum of 100 IOMs and FECs in any combination. e. The FC Bus shall operate at a maximum distance of 15,000 Ft. between the FEC and the furthest connected device. 8. The FEC shall have the ability to monitor and control a network of sensors and actuators over a Sensor -Actuator Bus (SA Bus). a. The SA Bus shall be a Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP) Bus supporting BACnet Standard Protocol SSPC-135, Clause 9. b. The SA Bus shall support a minimum of 10 devices per trunk. C. The SA Bus shall operate at a maximum distance of 1,200 Ft. between the FEC and the furthest connected device. 9. The FEC shall have the capability to execute complex control sequences involving direct wired 1/0 points as well as input and output devices communicating over the FC Bus or the SA Bus. 10. The FEC shall support, but not be limited to, the following: a. Hot water, chilled water/central plant applications. b. Built-up air handling units for special applications. C. Terminal units. d. Special programs as required for systems control. 2.6 FIELD DEVICES A. Input/Output Module The Input/Output Module (IOM) provides additional inputs and outputs for use in the FEC. The IOM shall communicate with the FEC over the FC Bus or the SA Bus. The IOM shall support BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE SSPC-135, Clause 9 on the controller network. a. The IOM shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL Label. b. The IOM shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC). 03878709 09/10 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 21 C. A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be provided for the FEC. d. The Conformance Statement shall be submitted 10 days prior to bidding. 4. The IOM shall be assembled in a plenum -rated plastic housing with flammability rated to UL94-5VB. 5. The IOM shall have a minimum of 4 points to a maximum of 17 points. 6. The IOM shall support the following types of inputs and outputs: a. Universal Inputs - shall be configured to monitor any of the following: 1) Analog Input, Voltage Mode. 2) Analog Input, Current Mode. 3) Analog Input, Resistive Mode. 4) Binary Input, Dry Contact Maintained Mode. 5) Binary Input, Pulse Counter Mode. b. Binary Inputs - shall be configured to monitor either of the following: 1) Dry Contact Maintained Mode. 2) Pulse Counter Mode. C. Analog Outputs - shall be configured to output either of the following: 1) Analog Output, Voltage Mode. 2) Analog Output, Current Mode. d. Binary Outputs - shall output the following: 1) 24 VAC Triac. e. Configurable Outputs - shall be capable of the following: 1) Analog Output, Voltage Mode. 2) Binary Output Mode. 7. The IOM shall include troubleshooting LED indicators to identify the following conditions: a. Power On. b. Power Off. C. Download or Startup in progress, not ready for normal operation. d. No Faults. e. Device Fault. f. Normal Data Transmission. g. No Data Transmission. h. No Communication. B. Network Sensors 1. The Network Sensors (NS) shall have the ability to monitor the following variables as required by the systems sequence of operations: a. Zone Temperature. b. Zone Humidity. C. Zone Setpoint. d. Discharge Air Temperature. 2. The NS shall transmit the information back to the controller on the Sensor -Actuator Bus (SA Bus) using BACnet Standard protocol SSPC-135, Clause 9. 3. The NS shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL Label. a. The NS shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Smart Sensors (B-SS). b. A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be provided for the NS. C. The Conformance Statement shall be submitted 10 days prior to bidding. 03878709 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 22 09/ 10 4. The Network Zone Sensors shall include the following items: a. A backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) to indicate the Temperature, Humidity and Setpoint. b. An LED to indicate the status of the Override feature. C. A button to toggle the temperature display between Fahrenheit and Celsius. d. A button to initiate a timed override command. e. Available in either surface mount or wall mount. f. Available with either screw terminals or phone jack. 5. The Network Discharge Air Sensors shall include the following: a. 4 inch or 8 inch duct insertion probe. b. 10 foot pigtail lead. C. Dip Switches for programmable address selection. d. Ability to provide an averaging temperature from multiple locations. e. Ability to provide a selectable temperature from multiple locations. 2.7 SYSTEM TOOLS A. System Configuration Tool 1. The Configuration Tool shall be a software package enabling a computer platform to be used as a stand-alone engineering configuration tool for a Network Automation Engine (NAE) or a Network Integration Engine (NIE). 2. The configuration tool shall provide an archive database for the configuration and application data. - 3. The configuration tool shall have the same look -and -feel at the User Interface (UI) regardless of whether the configuration is being done online or offline. 4. The configuration tool shall include the following features: a. Basic system navigation tree for connected networks. b. Integration of Metasys N1, LonWorks, and BACnet enabled devices. C. Customized user navigation trees. d. Point naming operating parameter setting. e. Graphic diagram configuration. f. Alarm and event message routing. g. Graphical logic connector tool for custom programming. h. Downloading, uploading, and archiving databases. 5. The configuration tool shall have the capability to automatically discover field devices on connected buses and networks. Automatic discovery shall be available for the following field devices: a. BACnet Devices. b. LonWorks Devices. C. N2 Bus Devices. d. Metasys N1 Networks. 6. The configuration tool shall be capable of programming the Field Equipment 3 Controllers. a. The configuration tool shall provide the capability to configure, simulate, and commission the Field Equipment Controllers. b. The configuration tool shall allow the FECs to be run in Simulation Mode to verify the applications. C. The configuration tool shall contain a library of standard applications to be usedforconfiguration. 03878709 09/ 10 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 23 7. The configuration tool shall be capable of programming the field devices. a. The configuration tool shall provide the capability to configure, simulate, and commission the field devices. b. The configuration tool shall allow the field devices to be run in Simulation Mode to verify the applications. C. The configuration tool shall contain a library of standard applications to be used for configuration. 8. A wireless access point shall allow a wireless enabled portable PC to make a temporary Ethernet connection to the automation network. a. The wireless connection shall allow the PC to access configuration tool through the web browser using the User Interface (UI). b. The wireless use of configuration tool shall be the same as a wired connection in every respect. C. The wireless connection shall use the Bluetooth Wireless Technology. B. Wireless MS/TP Converter a. The converter shall provide a temporary wireless connection between the SA or FC Bus and a wireless enabled portable PC. b. The converter shall support downloading and troubleshooting FEC and field devices from the PC over the wireless connection. C. The converter shall employ Bluetooth Wireless Technology. d. The converter shall be powered through a connection to either the Sensor -Actuator (SA) or the Field Controller (FC) Bus. e. The converter shall operate over a minimum of thirty three (33) feet within a building. f. The converter shall have LED indicators to provide information regarding the following conditions: 1) Power - On/Off. 2) Fault — Fault/No Fault. 3) SA/FC Bus — Bus Activity/ No Bus Activity. 4) Blue — Bluetooth Communication Established/ Bluetooth Communication Not Established. g. The SWCVT shall comply with FCC Part 15.247 regulations for low -power unlicensed transmitters. 2.8 INPUT DEVICES A. General Requirements 1. Installation, testing, and calibration of all sensors, transmitters, and other input devices shall be provided to meet the system requirements. B. Temperature Sensors 1. General Requirements: a. Sensors and transmitters shall be provided, as outlined in the input/output summary and sequence of operations. b. The temperature sensor shall be of the resistance type, and shall be either two -wire 1000 ohm nickel RTD, or two -wire 1000 ohm platinum RTD. 03878709 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 24 09/ 10 C 3 4 5 C. The following point types (and the accuracy of each) are required, and their associated accuracy values include errors associated with the sensor, lead wire, and A to D conversion: Point Type Accuracy Chilled Water + .5°F. Room Temperature + .5°F. Duct Temperature + .5°F. All Others + .75°F. Room Temperature Sensors a. Room sensors shall be constructed for either surface or wall box mounting. b. Room sensors shall have the following options when specified: 1) Setpoint reset slide switch providing a +3 degree (adjustable range). 2) Individual heating/cooling setpoint slide switches. 3) A momentary override request push button for activation of after-hours operation. 4) Analog thermometer. Room Temperature Sensors with Integral Display a. Room sensors shall be constructed for either surface or wall box mounting. b. Room sensors shall have an integral LCD display and four button keypad with the following capabilities: 1) Display room and outside air temperatures. 2) Display and adjust room comfort setpoint. 3) Display and adjust fan operation status. 4) Timed override request push button with LED status for activation of after-hours operation. 5) Display controller mode. 6) Password selectable adjustment of setpoint an override modes. Thermo wells a. When thermo wells are required, the sensor and well shall be supplied as a complete assembly, including wellhead and Greenfield fitting. b. Thermo wells shall be pressure rated and constructed in accordance with the system working pressure. C. Thermo wells and sensors shall be mounted in a threadolet or 1/2" NFT saddle and allow easy access to the sensor for repair or replacement. d. Thermo wells shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel. Outside Air Sensors a. Outside air sensors shall be designed to withstand the environmental conditions to which they will be exposed. They shall also be provided with a solar shield. b. Sensors exposed to wind velocity pressures shall be shielded by a perforated plate that surrounds the sensor element. C. Temperature transmitters shall be of NEMA 3R construction and rated for ambient temperatures. 03878709 09/ 10 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 25 C. Differential Pressure Transmitters -- 1 . General Air and Water Pressure Transmitter Requirements: a. Pressure transmitters shall be constructed to withstand 100% pressure over -range without damage, and to hold calibrated accuracy when subject to a momentary 40% over -range input. b. Pressure transmitters shall transmit a 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA output signal C. Differential pressure transmitters used for flow measurement shall be sized to the flow sensing device, and shall be supplied with Tee fittings and shut-off -; valves in the high and low sensing pick-up lines to allow the balancing Contractor and Owner permanent, easy -to -use connection. d. A minimum of a NEMA l housing shall be provided for the transmitter. Transmitters shall be located in accessible local control panels wherever possible. -' 2. Low Differential Water Pressure Applications (0" - 20" w.c.) a. The differential pressure transmitter shall be of industrial quality and transmit a linear, 4 to 20 mA output in response to variation of flow meter differential pressure or water pressure sensing points. b. The differential pressure transmitter shall have non -interactive zero and span adjustments that are adjustable from the outside cover and meet the following performance specifications: l) .01-20" w.c. input differential pressure range. 2) 4-20 mA output. 3) Maintain accuracy up to 20 to l ratio turndown. 4) Reference Accuracy: +0.2% of full span. 3. Medium to High Differential Water Pressure Applications (Over 21" w.c.) a. The differential pressure transmitter shall meet the low pressure transmitter specifications with the following exceptions: 1) Differential pressure range l 0" w.c. to 300 PSI. 2) Reference Accuracy: +l % of full span (includes non -linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability). (F b. Standalone pressure transmitters shall be mounted in a bypass valve assembly "+ panel. The panel shall be constructed to NEMA 1 standards. The transmitter shall be installed in the panel with high and low connections piped and valved. Air bleed units, bypass valves, and compression fittings shall be provided. 4. Building Differential Air Pressure Applications (-l"to+l" w.c.) a. The differential pressure transmitter shall be of industrial quality and transmit a linear, 4 to 20 mA output in response to variation of differential pressure or air pressure sensing points. b. The differential pressure transmitter shall have non -interactive zero and span adjustments that are adjustable from the outside cover and meet the following performance specifications: l) -1.00 to +1.00 w.c. input differential pressure ranges. (Select range appropriate for system application) i 2) 4-20 mA output. 3) Maintain accuracy up to 20 to l ratio turndown. 4) Reference Accuracy: +0.2% of full span. 03878709 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 09/10 l 5900 - 26 5. Low Differential Air Pressure Applications (0" to 5" w.c.) a. The differential pressure transmitter shall be of industrial quality and transmit a linear, 4 to 20 mA output in response to variation of differential pressure or air pressure sensing points. b. The differential pressure transmitter shall have non -interactive zero and span adjustments that are adjustable from the outside cover and meet the following performance specifications: 1) (0.00 - 1.00" to 5.00") w.c. input differential pressure ranges. (Select range appropriate for system application.) 2) 4-20 mA output. 3) Maintain accuracy up to 20 to 1 ratio turndown. 4) Reference Accuracy: +0.2% of full span. 6. Medium Differential Air Pressure Applications (5" to 21" w.c.) a. The pressure transmitter shall be similar to the Low Air Pressure Transmitter, except that the performance specifications are not as severe. Differential pressure transmitters shall be provided that meet the following performance requirements: 1) Zero & span: (c/o F.S./Deg. F):.04% including linearity, hysteresis and repeatability. 2) Accuracy: 1% F.S. (best straight line) Static Pressure Effect: 0.5% F.S. (to 100 PSIG. 3) Thermal Effects: <+.033 F.S./Deg. F. over 40°F. to 100°F. (calibrated at 70°F.). b. Standalone pressure transmitters shall be mounted in a bypass valve assembly panel. The panel shall be constructed to NEMA 1 standards. The transmitter shall be installed in the panel with high and low connections piped and valved. Air bleed units, bypass valves, and compression fittings shall be provided. 1) Duct static traverse probes shall be provided where required to monitor duct static pressure. The probe shall contain multiple static pressure sensors located along exterior surface of the cylindrical probe. 2) A shielded static pressure probe shall be provided at each end of the building. The probe shall have multiple sensing ports, an impulse suppression chamber, and airflow shielding. A suitable probe for indoor and outdoor locations shall be provided. 7. Water Flow Monitoring a. Water flow meters shall be electromagnetic type with integral microprocessor -Based electronics. The meter shall have an accuracy of 0.25%. D. Status and Safety Switches 1. General Requirements a. Switches shall be provided to monitor equipment status, safety conditions, and generate alarms at the BMS when a failure or abnormal condition occurs. Safety switches shall be provided with two sets of contacts and shall be interlock wired to shut down respective equipment. 03878709 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 27 09/10 2. Current Sensing Switches a. The current sensing switch shall be self -powered with solid-state circuitry and a dry contact output. It shall consist of a current transformer, a solid state current sensing circuit, adjustable trip point, solid state switch, SPDT relay, and an LED indicating the on or off status. A conductor of the load shall be passed through the window of the device. It shall accept over -current up tc) twice its trip point range. b. Current sensing switches shall be used for run status for fans, pumps, and other miscellaneous motor loads. C. Current sensing switches shall be calibrated to show a positive run status only when the motor is operating under load. A motor running with a broken belt or coupling shall indicate a negative run status. 3. Air Flow Switches a. Differential pressure flow switches shall be bellows actuated mercury switches or snap acting micro -switches with appropriate scale range and differential adjustment for intended service.< 4. Air Pressure Safety Switches a. Air pressure safety switches shall be of the manual reset type with SPDT contacts rated for 2 amps at 120VAC. Ell, b. Pressure range shall be adjustable with appropriate scale range and differential adjustment for intended service. 5. Water Flow Switches a. Water flow switches shall be equal to the Johnson Controls P74. 6. Low Temperature Limit Switches a. The low temperature limit switch shall be of the manual reset type with Double Pole/Single Throw snap acting contacts rated for 16 amps at 120VAC. b. The sensing element shall be a minimum of 15 feet in length and shall react to the coldest 18-inch section. Element shall be mounted horizontally across duct in accordance with manufacturers recommended installation procedures. C. For large duct areas where the sensing element does not provide full coverage of the air stream, additional switches shall be provided as required to provide full protection of the air stream. t 2.9 OUTPUT DEVICES A. Actuators 1. General Requirements a. Damper and valve actuators shall be electronic and/or pneumatic, as specified in the System Description section. 2. Electronic Damper Actuators a. Electronic damper actuators shall be direct shaft mount. b. Modulating and two -position actuators shall be provided as required by the sequence of operations. Damper sections shall be sized Based on actuator manufacturer's recommendations for face velocity, differential pressure and damper type. The actuator mounting arrangement and spring return feature shall permit normally open or normally closed positions of the dampers, as required. All actuators (except terminal units) shall be furnished with mechanical spring return unless otherwise specified in the sequences of operations. All actuators shall have external adjustable stops to limit the travel in either direction, and a gear release to allow manual positioning. 03 878709 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 28 09/10 C. Modulating actuators shall accept 24 VAC or VDC power supply, consume no more than 15 VA, and be UL listed. The control signal shall be 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA, and the actuator shall provide a clamp position feedback signal of 2-10 VDC. The feedback signal shall be independent of the input signal and may be used to parallel other actuators and provide true position indication. The feedback signal of one damper actuator for each separately controlled damper shall be wired back to a terminal strip in the control panel for trouble -shooting purposes. d. Two -position or open/closed actuators shall accept 24 or 120 VAC power supply and be UL listed. Isolation, smoke, exhaust fan, and other dampers, as specified in the sequence of operations, shall be furnished with adjustable end switches to indicate open/closed position or be hard wired to start/stop associated fan. Two -position -actuators, as specified in sequencesofoperations as "quick acting," shall move full stroke within 20 seconds. All smoke damper actuators shall be quick acting. Electronic Valve Actuators a. Electronic valve actuators shall be manufactured by the valve manufacturer. b. Each actuator shall have current limiting circuitry incorporated in its design to prevent damage to the actuator. C. Modulating and two -position actuators shall be provided as required by the sequence of operations. Actuators shall provide the minimum torque required for proper valve close -off against the system pressure for the required application. The valve actuator shall be sized Based on valve manufacturer's recommendations for flow and pressure differential. All actuators shall fail in the last position unless specified with mechanical spring return in the sequence of operations. The spring return feature shall permit normally open or normally closed positions of the valves, as required. All direct shaft mount rotational actuators shall have external adjustable stops to limit the travel in either direction. d. Modulating Actuators shall accept 24 VAC or VDC and 120 VAC power supply and be UL listed. The control signal shall be 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA and the actuator shall provide a clamp position feedback signal of 2-10 VDC. The feedback signal shall be independent of the input signal, and may be used to parallel other actuators and provide true position indication. The feedback signal of each valve actuator (except terminal valves) shall be wired back to a terminal strip in the control panel for trouble -shooting purposes. e. Two -position or open/closed actuators shall accept 24 or 120 VAC power supply and be UL listed. Butterfly isolation and other valves, as specified in the sequence of operations, shall be furnished with adjustable end switches to indicate open/closed position or be hard wired to start/stop the associated pump or chiller. B. Control Dampers 1. The BMS Contractor shall furnish all automatic dampers. All automatic dampers shall be sized for the application by the BMS Contractor or as specifically indicated on the Drawings. 2. All dampers used for throttling airflow shall be of the opposed blade type arranged for normally open or normally closed operation, as required. The damper is to be sized so that, when wide open, the pressure drop is a sufficient amount of its close -off pressure drop to shift the characteristic curve to near linear. 3. All dampers used for two -position, open/close control shall be parallel blade type arranged for normally open or closed operation, as required. 03878709 09/ 10 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 29 4. Damper frames and blades shall be constructed of either galvanized steel or aluminum. Maximum blade length in any section shall be 60". Damper blades shall be 16-gauge minimum and shall not exceed eight (8) inches in width. Damper frames shall be 16-gauge minimum hat channel type with corner bracing. A11 damper bearings shall be made of reinforced nylon, stainless steel or oil -impregnated bronze. Dampers shall be tight closing, low leakage type, with synthetic elastomer seals on the blade edges and flexible stainless steel side seals. Dampers of 48"x48" size shall not leak in excess of 8.0 cfm per square foot when closed against 4" w.g. static pressure when tested in accordance with AMCA Std. 500. 5. Airfoil blade dampers of double skin construction with linkage out of the air stream shall be used whenever the damper face velocity exceeds 1500 FPM or system pressure exceeds 2.5" w.g., but no more than 4000 FPM or 6" w.g. Acceptable manufacturers are Johnson Controls D-7250 D-1250 or D-1300, Ruskin CD50, and Vent Products 5650.. 6. One piece rolled blade dampers with exposed or concealed linkage may be used with face velocities of 1500 FPM or below. Acceptable manufacturers are: Johnson Controls D-1600, Ruskin CD36, and Vent Products 5800. 7. Multiple section dampers may be jack -shafted to allow mounting of piston' pneumatic actuators and direct connect electronic actuators. Each end of the _ B jackshaft shall receive at least one actuator to reduce jackshaft twist. C. Control Relays 1. Control Pilot Relays I a. Control pilot relays shall be of a modular plug-in design with retaining springs or clips. b. Mounting Bases shall be snap -mount. C. DPDT, 3PDT, or 4PDT relays shall be provided, as appropriate for application. d. Contacts shall be rated for 10 amps at 120VAC. e. Relays shall have an integral indicator light and check button. -' 2. Lighting Control Relays a. Lighting control relays shall be latching with integral status contacts. b. Contacts shall be rated for 20 amps at 277 VAC. C. The coil shall be a split low -voltage coil that moves the line voltage contact armature to the ON or OFF latched position. d. Lighting control relays shall be controlled by: 1) Pulsed Tri-state Output — Preferred method. 2) Pulsed Paired Binary Outputs. 3) A Binary Input to the Facility Management System shall monitor integral status contacts on the lighting control relay. Relay status contacts shall be of the "dry -contact" type. e. The relay shall be designed so that power outages do not result in a change -of -state, and so that multiple same state commands will simply ' maintain the commanded state. Example: Multiple OFF command pulses shall simply keep the contacts in the OFF position. D. Control Valves 1. All automatic control valves shall be fully proportioning and provide near linear heat transfer control. The valves shall be quiet in operation and fail-safe open, closed, or in their last position. All valves shall operate in sequence with another valve when required by the sequence of operations. All control valves shall be sized by the control manufacturer, and shall be guaranteed to meet the heating and cooling loads, �f 03878709 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 30 09/10 as specified. All control valves shall be suitable for -the -system flow conditions and close against the differential pressures involved. Body pressure rating and connection type (sweat, screwed, or flanged) shall conform to the pipe schedule elsewhere in this Specification. 2. Chilled water control valves shall be modulating plug, ball, and/or butterfly, as required by the specific application. Modulating water valves shall be sized per manufacturer's recommendations for the given application. In general, valves (2 or 3-way) serving variable flow air handling unit coils shall be sized for a pressure drop equal to the actual coil pressure drop, but no less than 5 PSI. Valves (3-way) serving constant flow air handling unit coils with secondary circuit pumps shall be sized for a pressure drop equal to 25% the actual coil pressure drop, but no less than 2 PSI. Mixing valves (3-way) serving secondary water circuits shall be sized for a pressure drop of no less than 5 PSI. Valves for terminal reheat coils shall besized for a 2 PSIG pressure drop, but no more than a 5 PSI drop. 3. Ball valves shall be used for hot and chilled water applications, water terminal reheat coils, radiant panels, unit heaters, package air conditioning units, and fan coil units except those described hereinafter. 4. Modulating plug water valves of the single -seat type with equal percentage flow characteristics shall be used for all special applications as indicated on the valve schedule. Valve discs shall be composition type. Valve stems shall be stainless steel. 5. Butterfly valves shall be acceptable for modulating large flow applications greater than modulating plug valves, and for all two -position, open/close applications. In -line and/or three-way butterfly valves shall be heavy-duty pattern with a body rating comparable to the pipe rating, replaceable lining suitable for temperature of system, and a stainless steel vane. Valves for modulating service shall be sized and travel limited to 50 degrees of full open. Valves for isolation service shall be the same as the pipe. Valves in the closed position shall be bubble -tight. E. External Manual Override Stations 1. External manual override stations shall provide the following: a. An integral HAND/OFF/AUTO switch shall override the controlled device X pilot relay. b. A status input to the Facility Management System shall indicate whenever the ' switch is not in the automatic position. C. A Status LED shall illuminate whenever the output is ON. d. An Override LED shall illuminate whenever the BOA switch is in either the HAND or OFF position. e. Contacts shall be rated for a minimum of 1 amp at 24 VAC. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES A. Local Control Panels 1. All control panels shall be factory constructed, incorporating the BMS manufacturer's standard designs and layouts. All control panels shall be UL inspected and listed as an assembly and carry a UL 508 label listing compliance. Control panels shall be fully enclosed, with perforated sub -panel, hinged door, and slotted flush latch. 2. In general, the control panels shall consist of the DDC controller(s), display module as specified and indicated on the plans, and 1/0 devices —such as relays, transducers, and so forth —that are not requiredtobe located external to the control panel due to function. Where specified the display module shall be flush mounted in the panel face unless otherwise noted. 03878709 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 31 09/10 3. All I/O connections on the DDC controller shall be provide via removable or fixed screw terminals. 4. Low and line voltage wiring shall be segregated. All provided terminal strips and wiring shall be UL listed, 300-volt service and provide adequate clearance for field wiring. 5. All wiring shall be neatly installed in plastic trays or tie -wrapped. 6. A convenience 120 VAC duplex receptacle shall be provided in each enclosure, fused on/off power switch, and required transformers. B. Thermostats 1. Electric room thermostats of the heavy-duty type shall be provided for unit heaters, cabinet unit heaters, and ventilation fans, where required. All these items shall be provided with concealed adjustment. Finish of covers for all room -type instruments shall match and, unless otherwise indicated or specified, covers shall be , manufacturer's standard finish. j PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 BMS SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS A. Graphic Displays 1. Provide a color graphic system flow diagram display for each system with all points as indicated on the point list. All terminal unit graphic displays shall be from a standard design library. 2. User shall access the various system schematics via a graphical penetration scheme and/or menu selection. 3.2 INSTALLATION PRACTICES A. BMS Wiring„ l . All conduit, wiring, accessories and wiring connections required for the installation of the Building Management System, as herein specified, shall be provided by the ..-� BMS Contractor unless specifically shown on the Electrical Drawings under Division 16 Electrical. All wiring shall comply with the requirements of applicable portions of Division 16 and all local and national electric codes, unless specified o otherwise in this section. ►�j 2. All BMS wiring materials and installation methods shall comply with BMS manufacturer recommendations. 3. The sizing, type and provision of cable, conduit, cable trays, and raceways shall be the design responsibility of the BMS Contractor. If complications arise, however, due to the incorrect selection of cable, cable trays, raceways and/or conduit by the BMS Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred in 1 replacing the selected components. 4. Class 2 Wiring a. All Class 2 (24VAC or less) wiring shall be installed in conduit unless otherwise specified. b. Conduit is not required for Class 2 wiring in concealed accessible locations. Class 2 wiring not installed in conduit shall be supported every 5' from the building structure utilizing metal hangers designed for this application. Wiring shall be installed parallel to the building structural lines. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with local code requirements. 03878709 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 32 09/ 10 11 5. Class 2 signal wiring and 24VAC power can be run in the same conduit. Power wiring 120VAC and greater cannot share the same conduit with Class 2 signal wiring. 6. Provide for complete grounding of all applicable signal and communications cables, panels and equipment so as to ensure system integrity of operation. Ground cabling and conduit at the panel terminations. Avoid grounding loops. B. BMS Line Voltage Power Source 1. 120-volt AC circuits used for the Building Management System shall be taken from panel boards and circuit breakers provided by Division 16. 2. Circuits used for the BMS shall be dedicated to the BMS and shall not be used for any other purposes. 3. DDC terminal unit controllers may use AC power from motor power circuits. C. BMS Raceway 1. All wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway. Minimum control wiring conduit size 1/2". 2. Where it is not possible to conceal raceways in finished locations, surface raceway (Wiremold) may be used as approved by the Architect. 3. All conduits and raceways shall be installed level, plumb, at right angles to the building lines and shall follow the contours of the surface to which they are attached. 4. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be used for vibration isolation and shall be limited to 3 feet in length when terminating to vibrating equipment. Flexible Metal Conduit may be used within partition walls. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be UL listed. D. Penetrations 1. Provide fire stopping for all penetrations used by dedicated BMS conduits and raceways. 2. All openings in fire proofed or fire stopped components shall be closed by using - approved fire resistive sealant. 3. All wiring passing through penetrations, including walls shall be in conduit or enclosed raceway. _ 4. Penetrations of floor slabs shall be by core drilling. All penetrations shall be plumb, true, and square. _ E. BMS Identification Standards 1. Node Identification. All nodes shall be identified by a permanent label fastened to the enclosure. Labels shall be suitable for the node location. 2. Cable types specified in Item A shall be color coded for easy identification and troubleshooting. F. BMS Panel Installation 1. The BMS panels and cabinets shall be located as indicated at an elevation of not less than 2 feet from the bottom edge of the panel to the finished floor. Each cabinet shall be anchored per the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. The BMS contractor shall be responsible for coordinating panel locations with other trades and electrical and mechanical contractors. G. Input Devices 1. All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendation. 2. Locate components of the BMS in accessible local control panels wherever possible. H. HVAC Input Devices — General 1. All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendation. 2. Locate components of the BMS in accessible local control panels wherever possible. 3. The mechanical contractor shall install all in -line devices such as temperature wells, pressure taps, airflow stations, etc. 03878709 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 33 09/ 10 4. Input Flow Measuring Devices shall be installed in strict compliance with ASME guidelines affecting non-standard approach conditions. 5. Outside Air Sensors a. Sensors shall be mounted on the North wall to minimize solar radiant heat impact or located in a continuous intake flow adequate to monitor outside air conditions accurately. b. Sensors shall be installed with a rain proof, perforated cover. 6. Water Differential Pressure Sensors a. Differential pressure transmitters used for flow measurement shall be sized to the flow -sensing device. b. Differential pressure transmitters shall be supplied with tee fittings and shut-off valves in the high and low sensing pick-up lines. C. The transmitters shall be installed in an accessible location wherever possible. 7. Medium to High Differential Water Pressure Applications (Over 2 1 " w.c.): a. Air bleed units, bypass valves and compression fittings shall be provided. 8. Space Sensors: a. Shall be mounted per ADA requirements. b. Provide lockable tamper -proof covers in public -areas and/or where indicated on the plans. 9. Low Temperature Limit Switches: a. Install on the discharge side of the first water or steam coil in the air stream. b. Mount element horizontally across duct in a serpentine pattern insuring each square foot of coil is protected by I foot of sensor. C. For large duct areas where the sensing element does not provide full coverage of' the air stream, provide additional switches as required to provide full protection of the air stream. 10. Air Differential Pressure Status Switches: a. Install with static pressure tips, tubing, fittings, and air filter. 11. Water Differential Pressure Status Switches: a. Install with shut off valves for isolation. 1. HVAC Output Devices 1. All output devices shall be installed per the manufacturers recommendation. The mechanical contractor shall install all in -line devices such as control valves, dampers, airflow stations, pressure wells, etc. 2. Actuators: All control actuators shall be sized capable of closing against the maximum system shut-off pressure. The actuator shall modulate in a smooth fashion through the entire stroke. When any pneumatic actuator is sequenced with another device, pilot positioners shall be installed to allow for proper sequencing. 3. Control Dampers: Shall be opposed blade for modulating control of airflow. Parallel blade dampers shall be installed for two position applications. 4. Control Valves: Shall be sized for proper flow control with equal percentage valve plugs. The maximum pressure drop for water applications shall be 5 PSI. The maximum pressure drop for steam applications shall be 7 PSI. 111 03878709 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 34 09/10 3.3 TRAINING A. The BMS Contractor shall provide the following training services: 1. One day of on -site orientation by a system technician who is fully knowledgeable of the specific installation details of the project. This orientation shall, at a minimum, consist of a review of the project as -built drawings, the BMS software layout and naming conventions, and a walk through of the facility to identify panel and device locations. 3.4 SEQUENCES A. Refer to Section 15940 - Sequence of Operation. 3.5 POINT LISTS f� A. Refer to the Drawings. END OF SECTION t_. �s �w 03878709 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 15900 - 35 09/10 SECTION 15950 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of air systems. B. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of hydronic systems. C. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Associated Air Balance Council: 1. AABC MN-1 - National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Systems. C. Natural Environmental Balancing Bureau: 1. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Division 1 and Section 15000 — Submittals. B. Prior to commencing Work, submit proof of latest calibration date of each instrument. C. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC MN-1 National Standards for Total System Balance forms and NEBB Report forms. D. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies preventing proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. E. Prior to commencing Work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data required. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms and copy of AABC National Project Performance Guaranty or Copy of NEBB Certificate of Conformance Certification. F. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. G. Furnish reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with table of contents page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations. 03878709 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 09/10 15950 - 1 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow measuring stations, balancing valves and rough setting. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Furnish final copy of testing, adjusting, and balancing report inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with State and Local Standards. B. Perform Work in accordance with AABC MN-1 National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems. C. Maintain one copy of each document on site. D. Prior to commencing Work, calibrate each instrument to be used. Upon completing Work, recalibrate each instrument to assure reliability. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Agency: Company specializing in testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience certified by AABC or NEBB. B. Perform Work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer or NEBB Certified Testing, Balancing and Adjusting Supervisor and a registered professional 1 engineer experienced in performance of this Work and licensed in State of Texas. 1.8 SEQUENCING A. Sequence balancing between completion of systems tested and Date of Substantial Completion. 1.9 SCHEDULING C, I A. Schedule and provide assistance in final adjustment. J PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Verify the following: 1. Systems are started and operating in safe and normal condition. l 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. j 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters. 5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 6. Fans are rotating correctly. 3 l._ 3 03878709 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 2 09/ 10 ['l 7. Access doors are_closed_and duct end caps are in place. 8. Air outlets are installed and connected. 9. Duct system leakage is minimized. 10. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented. 11. Pumps are rotating correctly. 12. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place or in normal position. 13. Service and balancing valves are open. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Furnish instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. B. Make instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. C. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Verify recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted. If disrupted, verify correcting adjustments have been made. D. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services, preventing system balance. E. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. F. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by Owner. G. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit report. 3.5 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to obtain required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities at site altitude. B. Make air quantity measurements in main ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct. C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts. E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by using volume dampers located in ducts. F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide sheave drive changes to vary fan speed. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. 03878709 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 09/10 15950 - 3 ;s G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet Or inlet. H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters. I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions. J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage. K. At modulating damper locations, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions. L. Check multi -zone units for motorized damper leakage. Adjust air quantities with mixing dampers set first for cooling, then heating, then modulating. 3.6 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust water systems, after air balancing, to obtain design quantities. ~ B. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gauges to determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow -metering devices are not installed, i base flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in system. C. Adjust systems to obtain specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in conjunction with air balancing. D. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open or in normal position to heat transfer elements. E. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point. F. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system parts, simulate full flow in one part by temporary restriction of flow to other parts. 3.7 SCHEDULES A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: l . HVAC Pumps. 2. Water Tube Boilers. 3. Centrifugal Water Chillers. 4. Induced Draft Cooling Tower. 5. Fans. 6. Air Filters. 7. Air Inlets and Outlets. B. Report Forms 1. Title Page: a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. C. Telephone and facsimile numbers of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. d. Project name. e. Project location. f. Project Architect. g. Project Engineer. h. Project Contractor. Ll 03878709 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 4 09/10 L Project altitude. j. Report date. 2. Summary Comments: a. Design versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of system. C. Description of systems operation sequence. d. Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate building pressurization. e. Nomenclature used throughout report. f. Test conditions. 3. Instrument List: a. Instrument. b. Manufacturer. C. Model number. d. Serial number. e. Range. f. Calibration date. 4. Electric Motors: a. Manufacturer. b. Model/Frame. C. HP/BHP and kW. d. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load. e. RPM. f. Service factor. g. Starter size, rating, heater elements. h. Sheave Make/Size/Bore. 5. V-Belt Drive: a. Identification/location. b. Required driven RPM. C. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM. d. Belt, size and quantity. e. Motor sheave diameter and RPM. f. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual. 6. Pump Data: a. Identification/number. b. Manufacturer. C. Size/model. d. Impeller. e. Service. f. Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP and kW. g. Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP and kW. h. Discharge pressure. i. Suction pressure. j. Total operating head pressure. k. Shut off, discharge and suction pressures. 1. Shut off, total head pressure. 03878709 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 09/10 15950 - 5 7. Combustion Test: a. Manufacturer. b. Model number. C. Serial number. d. Firing rate. e. Overfire draft. f. Gas meter timing dial size. g. Gas meter time per revolution. h. Gas pressure at meter outlet. i. Gas flow rate. j. Heat input. k. Burner manifold gas pressure. 1. Percent carbon monoxide (CO). in. Percent carbon dioxide (CO2). n. Percent oxygen (02). o. Percent excess air. P. Flue gas temperature at outlet. q. Ambient temperature. r. Net stack temperature. S. Percent stack loss. t. Percent combustion efficiency. U. Heat output. 8. Boilers: a. Identification/number. b. Location. C. Manufacturer. d. Model number. e. Serial number. f. Entering water temperature, design and actual. g. Leaving water temperature, design and actual. h. Water flow rate, design and actual. 9. Chillers: a. Identification/number. b. Manufacturer. C. Capacity. d. Model number. e. Serial number. f. Evaporator entering water temperature, design and actual. g. Evaporator leaving water temperature, design and actual. h. Evaporator pressure drop, design and actual. i. Evaporator water flow rate, design and actual. j. Condenser entering water temperature, design and actual. k. Condenser pressure drop, design and actual. 1. Condenser water flow rate, design and actual. 10. Cooling Tower: a. Tower identification/number. b. Manufacturer. C. Model number. d. Serial number. e. Rated capacity. In 03878709 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 6 09/ 10 f. Entering air WB temperature, specified and actual. g. Leaving air WB temperature, specified and actual. h. Ambient air DB temperature. i. Condenser water entering temperature. j. Condenser water leaving temperature. k. Condenser water flow rate. 1. Fan RPM. 11. Exhaust Fan Data: a. Location. b. Manufacturer. C. Model number. d. Serial number. e. Air flow, specified and actual. f. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual. g. Inlet pressure. h. Discharge pressure. i. Sheave Make/Size/Bore. j. Number of Belts/Make/Size. k. Fan RPM. 12. Air Distribution Test Sheet: a. Air terminal number. b. Room number/location. C. Terminal type. d. Terminal size. e. Area factor. f. Design velocity. g. Design air flow. h. Test (final) velocity. i. Test (final) air flow. j. Percent of design air flow. END OF SECTION 03878709 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 09/10 15950 - 7 SECTION 16000 BASIC ELECTRICAL METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work in this section. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES AND STANDARDS A. Regulatory Agencies: Installation, materials, equipment and workmanship shall conform to the applicable provisions of the following: B. National Electrical Code (NEC) C. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) D. Terms and conditions of the electrical utility and other authorities having lawful jurisdiction pertaining to the work required. E. All temperature control wiring and associated conduit and boxes, shall be provided under other sections of the specifications. All power and control wiring, not identified under Division 15, shall be provided under Division 16. F. The work covered by Division 16 of the Specifications includes the furnishing of all materials, labor, transportation, tools, permits, and fees for the complete installation of all electrical work required in the Contract Drawings. G. In the event that additional or special construction is required, the Contractor is responsible for providing all material and equipment which are usually furnished with such construction in order to complete the installation, whether indicated or not. H. The contractor shall familiarize himself with the existing conditions of the site and advise the Architect of any discrepancy or conflict prior to bidding. I. The contractor shall be responsible for all permits, fees, and licenses required for the project. All cost of such permits or fees shall be included in the bid. J. All equipment and material shall be installed in accordance with the applicable manufacturer's recommendations and standards. K. Install sleeves, sealant pans, and roof penetrations as required for the installation of the electrical work. All such work is subject to the approval of the Architect. L. Any fees or charges associated with delivering this project shall be included in the Contractor's bid. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. The intent of this section is to give general submittal information, refer to specific submittal information in the subsequent mechanical sections. B. Within 10 days after award of the contract, and before orders are placed, Contractor shall submit specific information on list of equipment and principal materials specified. Contractor shall indicate and/or provide names of manufacturers, catalog and model numbers, cut sheets, and such other supplementary information as necessary for evaluation. Minimum of six (6) copies, or as directed by the Engineer, of each shall be submitted and shall include all items 03878709 09/10 E_. BASIC ELECTRICAL METHODS 16000 - 1 mentioned by model number and/or manufacturer's name in the specifications or in schedules on the drawings. C. Requirements for each submittal: 1. Bear a dated stamp or specific written indication that the Contractor has reviewed and approved all submittal prior to submission to Engineer. 2. Have all information deleted by Contractor that pertains to the means and methods of construction or to fabrication, assembly, installation, or erection (approval by Engineer shall not extend to these areas unless specifically noted by Engineer). 3. Be clearly and SPECIFICALLY marked as to which specific piece of equipment is being submitted, by use of a permanent marker, stamp, etc., so as to distinguish it from other pieces of equipment that may occur on the same page. 4. Be clearly marked as to which available options are being submitted that are associated with a piece of equipment. 5. Be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specific performance, materials, and similar data to enable the Engineer to review the proposed equipment. Omission by Contractor of any of the above requirements or submittals will subject submittal to automatic rejection without review. Any submittals received by Engineer that were not requested shall be returned without review of any kind. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS A. The electrical requirements for equipment specified or indicated on the drawings are based on information available at the time of design. If equipment furnished for installation has electrical requirements other than indicated on the electrical drawings, the Contractor shall make any required changes to wire and conduit size, controls, overcurrent protection and installation as required to accommodate the equipment supplied, without additional charge to the Owner. The ` complete responsibility and costs for such adjustments shall be assigned to the respective section of this specification under which the equipment is furnished. 2.2 MATERIALS (_ A. All similar materials and equipment shall be the product of the same manufacturer unless specified otherwise. B. Materials and equipment shall be the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such material and shall be the manufacturer's current and standard design. C. Altitude: Equipment affected by altitude shall perform satisfactorily for the function intended at the altitude of the project site. D. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid and alkali -resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, minimum 6" wide and 4 mils z_ thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30" deep; colored as follows: 1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 03878709 BASIC ELECTRICAL METHODS 16000 - 2 09/ 10 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems. E. Backfill Material I. Material 4" below and 12" above pipes and conduit shall be natural or manufactured sand complying to ASTM C 33. 2. Material more than 12" above pipes and conduits shall be sand indicated above or native fill free of rock or gravel larger than 3/8" in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Fabrication, erection and installation of the complete electrical system shall be done in accordance -with accepted good practice by qualified personnel experienced in such work and shall proceed in an orderly manner so as not to impede the progress of the project. The Electrical Contractor shall check all areas and surfaces where electrical equipment material is to be installed, removed or relocated and report any unsatisfactory conditions before starting work. Commencement of work signifies this Contractor's acceptance of existing conditions. In the acceptance or rejection of the finished installation, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of workmen. Surfaces requiring coatings will be completed prior to installation of any electrical work on these surfaces. B. The electrical drawings are diagrammatic. The installation requirements shall be carefully coordinated with structural, architectural and mechanical conditions and shall be adjusted to avoid conflict. C. All work shall be concealed in walls, ceilings, chases unless specifically noted to be exposed or otherwise approved. D. The locations of electrical equipment is approximate and are not intended to convey the exact details and mounting of location of outlets, equipment and other items. Exact locations are to be field determined by actual measurements. E. The location height and projection of fixtures illuminating signs or special features shall be approved by Architect prior to installation. F. Contractor shall coordinate the location of all exterior fixtures with Architectural drawings and specifications. G. Consult the Architectural Drawings to determine wall finishes and locations of wall mounted equipment, counter top splashes and similar items to avoid conflict with electrical equipment. H. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. I. Excavation for Pipe and Conduit 1. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. 2. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12" higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. 03878709 09/10 BASIC ELECTRICAL METHODS 16000 - 3 3. Trench_ Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade. a. For pipes and conduit less than 6" in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multiple -duct conduit units, hand excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. b. For pipes and conduit 6" or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill. C. Excavate trenches 4" deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. 4. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8" in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4" in loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers. 5. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698: a. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12" of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent. b. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6" below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 92 percent. C. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6" below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 85 percent. 6. Install detectable warning tape above conduits and pipe, 12" below finished grade, except 6" below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 7. Protection a. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. b. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1) Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1) Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible. 8. Disposal of Surplus and Waste Materials a. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property unless otherwise directed by Owner. b. Repair: Any damage to shrubs, grass or structures shall be repaired to previous condition by Contractor at no additional expense to Owner. It shall be the responsibility of the Division 16 Contractor to provide for all disconnecting and motor control devices for all equipment. The Contractor shall coordinate to determine voltage, phase and configurations. Any changes necessary to coordinate these items between Division 15 and Division 16 shall be considered part of this contract. 03878709 BASIC ELECTRICAL METHODS 16000 - 4 09/10 m j 3_2 PERFORMANCE TESTS A. Thoroughly test all control circuits, fixtures, services and all circuits for proper operating condition and freedom from grounds and short circuits before acceptance is requested. All equipment, appliances and devices shall be operated under load conditions. B. After the interior wiring system installation is complete conduct operating tests for approval. When requested, test all the wire, cable, devices and equipment after installation, to assure that all material continues to possess all the original characteristics as required by governing codes and standards listed in these specifications. C. After motor operation has been verified make voltage readings at all panelboards and starters. Based on these readings, make final adjustments of primary taps on all transformers in the building as directed, or coordinate with the utility proper building voltage. D. Perform such other tests as required by other sections of these specifications or as requested to prove acceptability. E. Furnish all instruments and labor for testing. F. All material installed shall be listed, inspected, and approved by a nationally accepted testing laboratory such as UL and/or ETL. All material shall bear the UL or ETL label where available. 3.3 SUBMITTAL AND APPROVAL OF MATERIALS A. All requirements for submittals shall comply with the applicable provisions included in the individual specification sections. END OF SECTION 03878709 BASIC ELECTRICAL METHODS 16000 - 5 09/10 M a SECTION 16111 CONDUIT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division l - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal conduit. B. Flexible metal conduit. C. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. D. Electrical metallic tubing. E. Fittings and conduit bodies. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07270 - Fire Stopping. B. Section 16130 - Boxes. C. Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding. D. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. E. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. B. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. C. ANSI NEMA FB l - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. D. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. E. NECA "Standard of Installation." F. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. 1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquidtight flexible metal conduit, nonmetallic conduit, fittings and conduit bodies. 03878709 CONDUIT 1611l - l 09/10 1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Accurately record actual routing of conduits. 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage. C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. D. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough -in. C. Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch unless otherwise specified. B. Wet and Damp Locations above grade: Use rigid steel or liquid tight flexible conduit. C. Dry Locations: Use electrical metallic tubing for concealed and exposed locations. D. Below Slab: Non metallic PVC conduit is acceptable within limitations specified. E. Below Grade: Use only PVC coated rigid galvanized steel, wrapped rigid steel, or non metallic PVC conduit within limitations specified. F. MC Cable: Shall not be utilized on this project. 2.2 METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied. 2. Wheatland. 3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; all steel fittings. 03878709 CONDUIT 16111 - 2 09/10 2.3 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: l . Greenfield. 2. Electri-Flex. 3. Allied Tube. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. B. Description: Interlocked steel construction. Aluminum is not permitted. C. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB l with fittings approved for steel flex. D. Applications: Use for final connections to motorized equipment, connections to recessed lighting fixtures located in accessible ceilings, and connections to dry type transformers. Utilization of 3/8" in lieu of the minimum 2" is acceptable under the limitations of the National Electrical Code. 2.4 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. U 1"tratite. 2. Electri-flex. 3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. B. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket. C. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1. D. Applications: Use for final connections to motorized equipment in exterior locations and areas subjected to moisture. 2.5 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied. 2. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. B. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing. ` C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB l; all steel, compression. D. Applications: Do not use below grade or in exterior locations. Use only in interior locations. 2.6 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Levy. 2. Robroy Industries. 3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. B. Description: NEMA RNA, rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating, 20 mil thick. C. General: Protective layer may be factory applied or galvanized rigid steel conduit may be applied with two layers of corrosion resistant tape. D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB l; steel fittings with external PVC coatings to match conduit. 03878709 CONDUIT 16111 -3 09/10 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. D. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay -in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. E. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel. F. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 16190. G. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports H. Do not attach conduittoceiling support wires. I. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. J. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. K. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. L. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping. M. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F. N. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de -burr cut ends. O. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. P. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations and to cast boxes. Q. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size. R. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. S. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses, control and expansion joints. T. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples. U. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. V. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 16170. W. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 16195. X. Ducts shall be cleaned with an flexible mandrel assembly. Y. All conduits passing vertically through slabs on grade shall be PVC -coated, rigid steel. Rigid steel conduits shall be applied with protective coatings as indicated herein. Z. Service entrance and primary PVC conduit shall be concrete encased in accordance with the drawings. AA. Minimum cover for underground conduits shall be 24 inches unless otherwise noted. BB. All conduit shall be routed concealed as much as possible including conduit serving roof -mounted equipment. Roof penetrations for conduits shall adhere to the requirements and details as indicated on the Architectural drawings. 03878709 CONDUIT 16111 - 4 09/l 0 3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods under the provisions of Section 07270. B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation. END OF SECTION 03878709 09/10 CONDUIT SECTION 16123 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division I - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Building wire and cable. B. Wiring connectors and connections. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Section 01400 - Quality Control Requirements: Requirements for references and standards. B. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association). C. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems (International Electrical Testing Association). D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 01330 — Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide for each cable assembly type. 1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Section 01330 — Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. B. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and values obtained. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. 1.7 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 01700 — Execution Requirements: Procedures for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. 03878709 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123 - 1 09/10 1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Section 01300 — Administrative Requirements. B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. C. Conductor sizes are based on copper. D. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01300. B. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing and lengths required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BUILDING WIRE A. Manufacturers: 1. Southwire. 2. American Cable. 3. Houston Wire and Cable. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 — Product Requirements. B. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. C. Conductor: Copper. D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. E. Insulation: NFPA 70, Type indicated herein. F. MC Cable: Shall not be utilized on this project. 2.2 WIRING CONNECTORS A. Split Bolt Connectors: I . Ilsco. 2. Buchanan. 3. Bumdy. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 — Product Requirements. B. Solderless Pressure Connectors: I. Ilsco. 2. Buchanan. 3. Bumdy. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 — Product Requirements. 03878709 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123 - 2 09/10 1. C. Spring Wire Connectors: 1. Ideal. 2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 — Product Requirements. g' D. Compression Connectors: 1. Ilsco. 2. Buchanan. 3. Burndy. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 — Product Requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300 — Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. C. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. D. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire. 3.3 WIRING METHODS A. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THW or THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. B. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THW or THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. C. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire, Type THW or THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. D. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THW or THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. E. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THW, THHN/THWN or XHHW insulation, in raceway. F. Use wiring methods indicated. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Manufacturer's instructions. B. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions. C. Install cable in accordance with the NECA "Standard of Installation." D. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. E. Use stranded conductors for control circuits. F. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits with the exception of pre -manufactured fixture whips, listed for such use and not exceeding 6' in length. G. Use conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for control circuits. H. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 100 feet and as indicated on the drawings. 03878709 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123 - 3 09/10 1. Install all conductors in conduit. J. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. K. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger. L. Protect exposed cable from damage. M. All cables shall be neatly supported. N. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. O. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. P. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. Q. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. R. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor. S. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller. T. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 j AWG and smaller. �. U. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 16195. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated. V. The number of conductors in each conduit run shall be limited to the requirements as indicated on the drawings and indicated in Article 310 of the 2008 National Electrical Code. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Field inspection, testing and adjusting. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1. END OF SECTION 1-1 03878709 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123 - 4 09/10 + l 1..1 SECTIOON 1613:0 BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. B. Pull and junction boxes. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07270 - Firestopping. B. Section 16140 - Wiring Devices: Wall plates in finished areas. 1.4 REFERENCES A. NECA - Standard of Installation. B. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. C. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet -steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT A. Section 01700 — Execution Requirements: Submittals for Project closeout. B. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes on project record documents. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTLET BOXES A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. B. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include half -inch male fixture studs where required. 03878709 BOXES 16130 - 1 09/10 C. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Provide gasketed-caver_by box manufacturer. D. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 16140. 2.2 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. B. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat -flanged, surface mounted junction box: C. Material: Galvanized cast iron. D. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify locations of outlets in all locations areas prior to -rough -in. 3.2 INSTALLATION f A. Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements. C. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights specified in section for outlet device. D. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Adjust box location up to 10 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose. E. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 16140. F. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance. G. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07270. H. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes with Architectural drawings and other trades. I. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan. J. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. K. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas....1 L. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. M. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls. N. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. O. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. P. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. Q. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. R. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires. S. Support boxes independently of conduit. T. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. U. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. 03878709 BOXES 16130 - 2 09/10 11 V. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather_ and wet locations -and-at _all locations serving kitchen equipment. W. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface -mounted cast metal box in other locations. X. Coordinate with other trades for box rough -in, such that control devices are grouped (i.e., thermostats, wall switches, volume controls, etc.). 3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate installation of outlet box for equipment connected under Section 16180. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Section 01700 — Execution Requirements: Adjusting installed work. B. Adjust flush -mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. C. Install knockout closures in unused box openings. 3.5 CLEANING A. Section 01700 — Execution Requirements: Cleaning installed work. B. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. C. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. 3.6 REPAIR A. Repair any areas or surfaces damaged during conduit installation. B. Paint (resurface) to original condition. END OF SECTION 03878709 09/ 10 BOXES 16130 - 3 SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall switches. B. Receptacles. C. Device plates and decorative box covers. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16130 - Boxes. 1.4 REFERENCES A. NECA - Standard of Installation. B. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. C. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 01330 — Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations. C. Manufacturers with similar catalog numbers will not be considered as a basis for an equivalent product. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 03878709 WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 1 09/10 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell HBL 1221-I. 2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600. B. Description: NEMA WD 1, 20 amp, Heavy -Duty, AC only general -use snap switch. C. Body and Handle: nylon ivory handle. D. Utilize equivalent series of manufacturer's numbers above for threeway, four-way and two -pole applications. 2.2 RECEPTACLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell HBL 5352-I 2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600. Equivalent. B. Description: NEMA WD 1, Heavy-duty general use receptacle, with triple wipe contacts and grounding contacts integral with backstrap (no rivets). C. Device Body: Ivory plastic. D. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated. E. Convenience Receptacle: Type 5-20. F. GFCI Receptacle: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet regulatory requirements. Hubbell GF5352-I or equivalent. 2.3 WALL PLATES A. Decorative Cover Plate: Stainless steel. B. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with gasketed device cover on exterior devices C. Surface Mounted Plates: Galvanized steel plates PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300 — Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions prior to beginning work. B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height. C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. E. Verify installation location of all boxes to be installed in millwork with Architect. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean debris from outlet boxes. 03878709 WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 2 09/10 t: 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install devices plumb and level. C. Install switches with OFF position down. D. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers. E. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. F. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. G. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. H. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. 1. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls. J. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets. K. Install blank cover plate to match other wall plates on all unused boxes. 3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 16130 to obtain mounting heights specified and indicated on drawings. B. Install all wall switches, thermostats, and fire alarm pull stations at 48 inches above finished floor. C. Install convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor. } D. Install convenience receptacle 6 inches above backsplash of counter unless otherwise directed by Architect. E. Install telephone jack 18 inches above finished floor. F. Install telephone for jack wall telephone to position top of telephone at 48 inches above finished floor. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ` A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Field inspection, testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Inspect each wiring device for defects. C. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. D. Verify that each receptacle device is energized. E. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity. F. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Section 01700 — Execution Requirements: Adjusting installed work. B. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. 3.7 CLEANING A. Section 01700 — Execution Requirements: Cleaning installed work. B. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish. END OF SECTION 03878709 09/10 WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 3 I SECTION 16470 SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 — General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Distribution and Branch circuit panelboards. B. Switchboards. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. B. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification: Engraved nameplates. 1.4 REFERENCES A. NECA (National Electrical Contractors Association) "Standard of Installation." B. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. C. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. D. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. E. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. F. NEMA PB-2 - Switchboards G. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of General Conditions. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of General Conditions. Record actual locations of Products; indicate actual branch circuit arrangement. 03878709 SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS 16470 - 1 09/10 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of General Conditions. Maintenance Data: Include spare parts data listing; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. 1.9 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years experience. 1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements ofNFPA 70. Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. 1.11 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. 1.12 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide maintenance materials under provisions of General Conditions. Provide two of each panelboard key if required. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Square-D. 2. General Electric. 3. Siemens. 4. Or approved equal. B. Description: NEMA PB-1, circuit breaker type. C. Panelboard Bus: Copper with ratings as indicated. Provide a copper ground bus in each panelboard. D. Minimum integrated shortcircuit rating: Fully rated devices with minimum levels as indicated. Series rated systems will not be allowed. Minimum calculated values are labeled on each panelboard schedule and are indicated as "A1C". E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt -on, circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as type HACR for air-conditioning equipment loads and type SWD for switching applications. F. Enclosure: NEMA PB-1, Type 1. 03878709 SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS 16470 - 2 09/ 10 ^ G. Cabinet Front: Surface or recessed type as indicated on the drawings,_ fastened_ with concealed trim clamps, hinged door with flush lock, metal directory frame, and finished in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 2.2 SWITCHBOARDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D. 2. General Electric. 3. Or approved equal. B. Construction: Unit shall be constructed of steel members bolted or welded to form a rigid frame. All closure plates shall be constructed to allow a single individual to install. All sections `5 shall be rear aligned and shall be front accessible. Sections shall be bolted together to form a mechanically and electrically continuous unit. C. Bussing: Tin or silver plated copper for all sections. Brace bars for indicated interrupting e d ratings. Bus joints shall be bolted with grade 5 bolts. Horizontal bussing shall be full size and full length of the switchboard. Install vertical bussing the full height of the switchboard with a minimum of ampacity of 80% of the total of all protective devices of the bussed space. Provide .3 a full size full length neutral bus with the same ampacity as the phase bus. Provide a copper ground bus the full length. D. Metering: The main distribution panel (or switchboard) shall be equipped with a power monitoring and control system equal to Square D Power Logic CM 2450. E. Main Device: Thermal -Magnetic Molded Case circuit breaker with electronic trip and adjustable long time, short time and instantaneous settings. Interrupting rating shall be as indicated on the drawings and shown as "AIC" on the schedule for a fully rated system. Series rated systems will not be allowed. F. Feeder Devices: Instantaneous thermal and magnetic trips, molded case circuit breakers. Provide adjustable magnetic trip option on frame sizes 225 amps and larger. Feeder breakers shall be group mounted. G. Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) for Panel "MSB": Unit shall be mounted integral in panel. Provide circuit breaker for TVSS unit as required by manufacturer. Equipment shall be Square D FC41MA24-INT 240KA/phase: Standard Protection Modes: L-N, L-G, L-L, and N-G or approved equal. H. Provide an integral monitoring and metering device to monitor the following for all phases for Panel "MSB": l . Phase current. 2. Phase voltage (L-L and L-N). 3. Real power. 4. Apparent power. 5. Power factor. 6. Frequency. 7. Energy (KWH). 8. Front Display. 9. THD. 10. Current and Power Demand. 11. Alarms. i 03878709 SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS 16470 - 3 09/10 : 12. Min/Max Readings. 13. Date/Event Logs. The circuit monitor shall be capable of networking for remote indication. Unit shall be Square D PM 820 with all necessary current transformers or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB I.I. Install panelboards plumb. Provide supports in accordance with drawings and Section 16190. Height: 6 ft maximum to top of panelboard. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. Spare slots shall be labeled as such in erasable pencil on directory. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195. B. Provide two empty 1 inch conduits from each recessed panelboard to an accessible location above and label as "spare". C. Ground each panelboard and switchboard in accordance with section 16170. D. Provide for a 4 inch concrete pad for each switchboard. Remove or modify any existing concrete pads to match the new equipment. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and test for grounds on each circuit after installation is completed. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi -wire branch circuits. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for circuit breakers, fusible switches, and fuses. END OF SECTION 03878709 SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS 16470 - 4 09/10 SECTION 16170 GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Grounding electrodes and conductors. B. Equipment grounding conductors. C. Bonding. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for references and standards. B. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems (International Electrical Testing Association). C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 GROUNDING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Metal underground water pipe. B. Metal frame of the building. C. Rod electrodes. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Grounding System Maximum Resistance: 10 ohms. 1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 01330 — Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide for grounding electrodes and connections. 1.7 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT A. Section 01700 — Execution Requirements: Procedures for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and grounding electrodes. C. Certificate of Compliance: Indicate approval of installation by authority having jurisdiction. 03878709 09/10 GROUNDING & BONDING 16170 - 1 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project. 1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROD ELECTRODES A. Material: Copper. B. Diameter: 3/4 inch. C. Length: 10 feet. 2.2 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS A. Material: Bronze. 2.3 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS A. Manufacturers: Cadweld. 2.4 WIRE A. Material: Stranded copper. B. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Minimum size to meet NFPA 70 requirements or as indicated on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300 — Administration Requirements: Verification of existing conditions prior to beginning work. B. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Manufacturer's instructions. B. Install rod electrodes. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve a resistance to ground of 10 ohms or less. Rods shall be installed with a minimum separation of 6 feet. C. Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements. 03878709 GROUNDING & BONDING 16170 - 2 09/10 D. Bond together metalsi.ding_not_attached to grounded structure; bond to ground. E. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing. F. Grounding Electrode System: The new grounding electrode system shall consist of the common bonding of building steel, underground steel water piping and supplemental ground rods as detailed on the drawings. G. Provide proper bonding of the electrical system's grounded conductor (neutral) and the grounding electrode system sized in accordance with N.E.C. Article 250. This bonding shall occur at all locations where there are separately derived systems. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Field inspection, testing, and adjusting. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13. END OF SECTION 03878709 09/10 GROUNDING & BONDING 16170 - 3 I SECTION 16180 EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical connections to equipment specified under other sections. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16000 - Basic Electrical Methods. 1.4 REFERENCES A. NEMA WD 1 - General Purpose Wiring Devices. B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device Configurations. C. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Product Data: Provide wiring device manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, configurations, and construction. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01300. B. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections. C. Determine connection locations and requirements. D. Sequence rough -in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation schedule for equipment. E. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up schedule for equipment. k 03878709 EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS 16180 - l 09/10 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CORDS AND CAPS A. Attachment Plug Construction: Conform to NEMA WD 1. B. Configuration: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment. C. Cord Construction: ANSI/NFPA 70, multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations. D. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection. E. Division 16 - Contractor shall be responsible for providing matching cord/receptacle for all equipment not furnished with such equipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify conditions under provisions of Section 01300. B. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization. 3.2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations including all locations serving kitchen equipment. Utilize pvc-coated, rigid steel conduit for all conduit stub -ups serving kitchen equipment. All boxes for use in the kitchen shall be for use in wet locations (last type). C. Make wiring connections using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered in heat producing equipment. D. Provide receptacle outlet where connection with attachment plug is indicated. Provide cord and cap where field -supplied attachment plug is indicated. E. Provide suitable strain -relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. F. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices as indicated. G. Modify equipment control wiring with terminal block jumpers as indicated. H. Provide interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment where indicated. I. Check and modify phase connections as required for proper motor rotation. J. Provide power to equipment only after equipment supplier verifies acceptance to receive and approves. K. Contractor shall coordinate with all equipment to verify exact power and control wiring as required to properly serve equipment. END OF SECTION 03878709 EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS 16180 - 2 09/ 10 SECTION 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work in this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Conduit and equipment supports. B. Anchors and fasteners. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association. B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance. B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products. C. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use expansion anchors, powder actuated anchors and preset inserts. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, spring steel clips and steel ramset fasteners. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self -drilling anchors and expansion anchors. 4. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 5. Wood Elements: Use wood screws. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation". 03878709 SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190 - 1 09/10 C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and- conduit. D. Obtain permission from Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members. E. Fabricate supports from structural steel as indicated on drawings. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use lock washers under all nuts. F. Install surface -mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. G. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one inch off wall. H. Install conduit supports a maximum spacing specified in the NEC. END OF SECTION 03878709 SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190 - 2 09/10 SE-C_TION_16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work in this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates and labels. B. Wire and cable markers. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.I NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Nameplates and Labels: Engraved three -layer laminated plastic, white letters on black background. B. Locations: 1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. 2. Communication cabinets, and computer cabinets. 3. Field disconnects, start stop stations, control panels. 4. Each pad -mounted switch, transformer and terminal cabinet enclosure. C. Letter Size: 1. Use 1/4 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. Use 1 /4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads. 3. Use 3/8 inch letters for identifying Main Disconnect equipment. 2.2 WIRE/CONDUITBOX MARKERS A. Description: Brady B-321 Heat -Shrink Polyolefin markers. Typed label to identify each termination end point of the conductor. DC conductors shall identify polarity. B. Locations: Each conductor at wireway, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and each load connection. All conduit penetrations identifying the location of each end. C. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on drawings. D. Boxes: 1. Label each junction box in accessible locations to indicate the type of system (i.e.; security; power circuit - 1,3,5; etc.) 03878709 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 - 1 09/10 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines. B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws or rivets. C. Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape per trench at 12 inches below finished grade. Identify all conduit at exposed locations into all boxes, cabinets, etc. (see specification Section 16000) D. Identify all conductors at every termination indicating endpoints of termination and tag identification as required. E. Color coding for phase identification: 120/208 volts Phase 277/480 volts Black A Brown Red B Orange Blue C Yellow White Neutral Gray Green Ground Green Conductor phase and voltage identification shall be made by color -coded insulation for all conductors smaller than No. 6 AWG. For conductors No. 6 AWG and larger, identification shall be made by color -coded insulation, or conductors with black insulation may be furnished and identified by colored electrical tape. Conductor identification shall be provided within each enclosure where a tap, splice, or termination is made. END OF SECTION 03878709 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 - 2 09/10 C- SECTION I64_41 r--, ENCLOSED SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division l - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fusible switches. B. Non -fusible switches. C. Fuses_ 1.3 REFERENCES A. NEMA KS l - Enclosed Switches. .'' B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. C. UL 198C - High -Interrupting Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Type. D. UL 198E - Class R Fuses. E. NEMA AB l — Molded Case Circuit Breakers } F. NECA — Standard of Installation 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Product Data: Provide switch ratings and enclosure dimensions. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 03878709 ENCLOSED SWITCHES 16441 - 1 09/10 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Square D B. General Electric C. Eaton D. Siemens 2.2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES A. Fusible or Non -fusible as indicated. B. Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front- cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. C. Fuse Clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, class R fuses. D. Enclosures: NEMA KS 1. E. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. F. Exterior Locations: Type 3R or 4. G. NEMA ratings of enclosures as specified on drawings take precedence over location specification. H. Current rating of switch to be equal to or greater than that of the circuit it is interrupting. 2.3 FUSES A. Manufacturers: I. Bussman 2. Littlefuse 3. Gould Shawmut B. Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, Class as specified or indicated. C. Voltage: Provide fuses with suitable voltage ratings for phase to phase voltages. D. Service Entrance: Class L, Bussman Low -peak or equivalent. E. General Purpose Loads: Class RKI, Bussman Low -peak or equivalent. F. Motor Loads: Class RK5, Bussman Fusetron or equivalent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation B. Install fuses in all fusible disconnects. C. Apply adhesive tag on the inside door of all disconnects indicating the NEMA class fuse and size installed. D. Provide a disconnect switch for all equipment where indicated or required by the National Electrical Code. Coordinate with other disciplines to determine where disconnects are furnished with equipment. END OF SECTION 03878709 ENCLOSED SWITCHES 16441 -2 09/10 SECTION 16463 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Dry type Two -Winding transformers. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NEMA ST 1 - Specialty Transformers. B. ANSI/NEMA ST 20 - Dry Type Transformers for General Applications. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on dry type transformers, vibration isolators and accessories. B. Include outline and support point dimensions of enclosures and accessories; unit weight; voltage; KVA; impedance ratings and characteristics; loss data; efficiency at 25, 50, 75 and 100 percent rated load; sound level; tap configurations; insulation system type, and rated temperature rise. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store transformers in a clean and dry space and protected from weather. B. Transformer shall not be used as work tables, scaffolds or ladders. C. Handle transformers carefully to avoid damage to material components, enclosure and finish. Use only lifting eyes and brackets provided for that purpose. Damaged transformers shall be rejected and not be installed on project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Transformers shall be of dry type complying with the design function requirements of the project. Design characteristics shall be as noted in manufacturer's submittal data. B. Provide barrel type coils vacuum impregnated with high grade insulating varnish, non- hydroscopic thermo-setting type. C. Furnish copper windings, continuous without splice. D. Use non -aging silicon steel cores held together with steel channels or angles, with low flux density, quiet operating, and vibration isolated from enclosure and support channels. 03878709 09/10 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 16463-1 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - DRY TYPE TWO -WINDING TRANSFORMERS A. Square D. B. Siemens. C. General Electric Company. D. Other manufacturers of .dry type Two -Winding transformers equal in design and function will be considered upon submittal of manufacturer's data. 2.3 DRY TYPE TWO -WINDING TRANSFORMERS A. Dry type transformers shall be ANSI/NEMA ST 20; factory -assembled, air cooled dry type transformers; ratings as shown on the Drawings. B. Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated KVA as follows: Ratin Class Rise (degree C) 1-15 KVA 80 25-500 KVA 115 C. Case temperature shall not exceed 35 degrees C. rise above ambient at its warmest point. D. Winding Taps, Transformers 25 KVA and Larger: Two 2-1/2 percent above rated voltage and four 2-1/2 percent below rated voltage, full capacity taps on primary. E. Sound Levels: Maximum sound levels are as follows: KVA Sound Ratin Level 0-9 40 db 10-50 45 db 51-150 50 db 151-300 55 db 301-500 60 db F. Basic impulse level shall be 10 KV. G. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of a visible flexible copper grounding strap. H. Transformers 75 KVA and less shall be suitable for wall, floor, or trapeze mounting; transformers larger than 75 KVA shall be floor mounted. 1. Enclosure shall be ANSI/NEMA ST 20; Type 1 and Type 3R. Provide lifting eyes or brackets. J. Nameplate on transformer shall include transformer connection data. 03878709 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 16463-2 09/ 10 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Installer shall examine the areas and conditions under which dry type transformers are to be installed and notify the contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install dry type transformers as indicated, in accordance with the applicable requirements of the NEC and the National Electrical Contractors Association's "Standard of Installation". B. Check for damage and tight connections prior to energizing transformer. C. Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments- D. Set transformer plumb and level. E. Use flexible conduit, 2 ft. minimum length, for connections to transformer case. Make conduit connections to sidepanelof enclosure. F. Mount transformers on vibration isolating pads suitable for isolating the transformer noise from the building structure. 1. For floor transformer installations. Mount transformer on a 4" high concrete housekeeping pad. 2. For wall hung transformer installations, use spring type Korfund Series P, or equal. Provide sound pads at each corner of the transformer, sized for i/2 inch deflection. G. Exact transformer mounting type and location shall be determined by actual field conditions. H. Provide a neutral -ground bond and extend the grounding electrode conductor to the grounding electrode system. 03878709 09/ 10 END OF SECTION DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 16463-3 SECTION 1648=1 ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manual motor starters. B. Magnetic motor starters. C. Combination magnetic motor -starters. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code. B. UL 1 98C - High -Interrupting Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Type. C. UL 1 98E - Class R Fuses. D. NECA "Standard of Installation," published by National Electrical Contractors Association. E. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. F. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. G. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of other Section. B. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of switching and overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure details. C. Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 03878709 ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS 09/10 16481 - 1 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUAL CONTROLLERS A. Manual Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, full -voltage controller with overload element, NO auxiliary contact, and toggle operator. B. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controller: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, full -voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with thermal Overload unit, and toggle operator. C. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6; Type 1. 2.2 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS A. Magnetic Motor Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A magnetic controller for induction motors rated in horsepower. B. Coil operating voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz. C. Overload Relay: NEMA ICS; electronic type; with phase loss and unbalance protection. D. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1. 2.3 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND FEATURES A. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, 2 each field convertible contacts in addition to seal -in contact. B. Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 2, heavy duty type. C. Pushbuttons: Recessed type. D. Indicating Lights: LED type. E. Selector Switches: Rotary type. F. Relays: NEMA ICS 2. G. Control Power Transformers: 120 volt secondary. Provide fused primary and secondary, and bond unfused leg of secondary to enclosure. 2.4 DISCONNECTS A. Combination Controllers: Combine motor controllers with fusible switch disconnect in common enclosure. B. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, enclosed knife switch ith externally operable handle. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate Class R fuses. 2.5 FUSES A. Description: Dual element, current limiting, time delay, one-time fuse, 250V volt, UL 198E, Class RK 5. B. Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rms amperes. 03878709 ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS 16481 -2 09/10 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install enclosed controllers where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide a motor controller for all equipment not furnished as integral with equipment. Coordinate actual motor loads with overload protection. B. Install enclosed controllers plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 16190. C. Height: 5 ft to operating handle. D. Install fuses in fusible switches. E. Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed motor characteristics. F. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195. G. Provide neatly typed label inside each motor controller door identifying motor served, ,^ nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating. y 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of other Sections. B. Inspect and test each enclosed controller to NEMA ICS 2. END OF SECTION 03878709 ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS 09/ 10 16481 - 3